Home

TP-Link T3700G-28TQ User Guide

Contents

1. LED Status Indication Flashing The switch works properly System On Off The switch works improperly Both the built in power supply and the redundant power Green supply work properly On The built in power supply works improperly but the RPS Yellow redundant power supply works properly Off The switch is not connected to any redundant power supply Green All the fans work properl FAN Cae Yellow Not all the fans work properly On The switch works as master in the stack system or does not Master join any stack system Off The switch works as slave in the stack system An Interface Card is connected to the switch and works On green properly Module An Interface Card is connected to the switch but works Flashing yellow improperly Off No Interface Card is connected to the switch o A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding port Green but no activity Link Act Flashing Data is being transmitted or received Port 1 24 R A 10 100Mbps device is connected to the corresponding Yellow i port but no activity Flashing Data is being transmitted or received An SFP transceiver is connected to the corresponding port On ae M and it is connected to a device but no activity f A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding port Flashing o 21F 24F and transmitting data An SFP transceiver is connected to the corresponding port Off but it is not connected
2. O Enable Disable Apply choose Format 1 0 1 1 4094 1 4094 16 characters maximum C VLAN SP VLAN Description Operation No entry in the table Al Figure 7 14 Create VLAN Mapping Entry The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config VLAN Mapping Enable Disable the VLAN mapping function 84 gt VLAN Mapping Config Port C VLAN SP VLAN Name gt VLAN Mapping List Select Operation Select Input the port number Enter the ID number of the Customer VLAN C VLAN refers to the VLAN to which the packet received by switch belongs Enter the ID number of the Service Provider VLAN Give a name to the VLAN Mapping entry or leave it blank Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN Mapping entry It is multi optional Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry Click Edit to display the following figure Global Config VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping Config Port C VLAN SP VLAN Name VLAN Mapping List Select Port Modify the SP VLAN and name of the selected entry and click Edit to apply O 6 016 A Note When VPN mode is globally enabled VPN function takes effect on all ports If VPN mode is disabled VLAN Mapping function can be enabled by selecting your desired port on this Port Enable page O Enable Disable En Lchoose Jrormat 11011 1 4094 22 61 4094 test2
3. Group Number LAG1 v Description L Member Port UNIT 3 MEEA 2 El Unselected Port s C Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Note 1 LAG denotes the Link Aggregation Group which the port belongs to 2 It s not suggested to set 100M and 1000M ports in the same LAG 3 The LAG created by LACP can t be modified Figure 6 9 Static LAG Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LAG Config Group Number Select a Group Number for the LAG Description Displays the description of the LAG for identification gt Member Port UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Member Port Select the port as the LAG member Clearing all the ports of the LAG will delete this LAG Tips 1 The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports 2 A port can only be added to a LAG If a port is the member of a LAG or is dynamically aggregated as the LACP member the port number will be displayed in gray and can not be selected 6 2 3 LACP Config LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol is defined in IEEE802 3ad 802 1ax and enables the dynamic link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner The switch can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link which will highly extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load With the LACP feature enabled the port will notify its partner of the syst
4. Step Operation 1 For each switch except the one chosen as the root bridge in a network the port that receives the BPDU with the highest priority is chosen as the root port of the switch 2 Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost the switch generates a designated port BPDU for each of its ports e Root ID is replaced with that of the root port Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and the path cost between this port and the root port The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch e The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port 3 The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port whose role you want to determine e If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port the port is chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced with the resulting BPDU The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU the BPDU of this port is not replaced and the port is blocked The port only can receive BPDUs Table 8 2 Selecting root port and designated port Tips In an STP with stable topology only the root port and designated port can forward data and the other ports are blocked The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol evolved from the 802 1D STP stand
5. gt Port States In an MSTP ports can be in the following four states gt Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In this status the port is not participating in the STP Port Roles In an MSTP the following roles exist Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP The following diagram shows the different port roles 100 Connect to the root bridge Region edge port port 1 2 Master port port 1 Alternate port port 2 Designated port port 3 5 Backup port port 6 Figure 8 3 Port roles The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the swit
6. Displays the Discover packet received Displays the Request packet received Displays the Decline packet received Displays the Release packet received Displays the Inform packet received Displays the Bootp Reply packet sent Displays the Offer packet sent Displays the Ack packet sent Displays the Nak packet sent Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Create VLAN interface Required On the Routing Static Routing Static Routing Config page create the interface IP address of the VLAN 4 Enable DHCP Server Required On the Routing DHCP Server DHCP Server page enable the DHCP Server function 5 Configure Excluded IP Optional On the Routing gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Server Address page configure the Excluded IP Address which can not be assigned by the switch 6 Configure IP Pool Required On the Routing DHCP Server gt Pool Setting page configure the parameters of IP Pool including Mask lease time gateway and DNS address 7 Bind IP Manually Optional On the Routing DHCP Server Manual Binding page you can specify the IP
7. Incoming Interface Mroute Table Group Source Incoming Interface Uptime Expires RPF Neighbor Protocol Flags Detail Outgoing Interface Select All to display all entries Select Group and enter the group of desired entry Select Source and enter the source of desired entry Select Incoming Interface and enter the incoming interface of desired entry The destination group IP address The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the Group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source group arrive The time in seconds since the entry was created The time in seconds before this entry will age out and be removed from the table The IP address of the Reverse Path Forwarding neighbor The multicast routing protocol which created this entry The possibilities are PIM DM and PIM SM The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIM SM The possible values are RPT or SPT For other protocols an is displayed Displays the detailed information of the mroute entries Displays the outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source group are forwarded 212 11 2 IGMP gt Brief Introduction of IGMP IGMP stands for Internet Group Management Protocol It is responsible for the management of IP multicast members in IPv4 an
8. Windows Media Play Y Paint All Programs 5 Figure 19 2 Open Hyper Terminal 2 The Connection Description Window will prompt shown as Figure 19 3 Enter a name into the Name field and click OK Connection Description Y New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection hals tp ink Mos eu Figure 19 3 Connection Description 3 Select the port to connect in Figure 19 4 and click OK 365 Connect To B tp link Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code Phone number Connect using COM1 Figure 19 4 Select the port to connect 4 Configure the port selected in the step above shown as the following Figure 19 5 Configure Bits per second as 38400 Data bits as 8 Parity as None Stop bits as 1 Flow control as None and then click OK COM1 Properties er Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 19 5 Port Settings 3 Download Firmware via bootutil menu To download firmware to the switch via FTP function you need to enter into the bootutil menu of the switch and take the following steps 1 Connect the console port of the PC to the console port of the switch and open hyper terminal Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 366 2 Power off and restart the switch When you are prompted that Press CTRL B to enter
9. gt Network Requirements Establish a stack of ring topology with four T3700 28TQ switches gt Network Diagram Switch C Switch D gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A B C and D before physically connecting them Step Operation Description 1 Configure the stack Optional On Stack Management Stack Config page name configure the stack name 42 Step Operation Description 2 Configure stack port Required On Stack Management gt Stack Config page mode configure the stack port status as Enable 3 Configure authentication Optional On Stack Management Stack Config page select mode and authentication the Stack Auth Mode and configure the Stack Auth Key password 4 Configure unit number Optional On Stack Management gt Stack Renumber page configure the unit number of switch A B C and D as 1 2 3 and 4 respectively e Connect the switches Connect switch A B C and D as the network diagram shows and then power the switches on to establish a stack Return to CONTENTS 43 Port LAG Traffic Monitor and MAC Address 6 1 Port The Port function allowing you to configure the basic features for the port is implemented on the Chapter 6 Switching Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch including four submenus Port Config Port Mirror Port Security and Port Isolation pages 6 1 1 Port
10. LAG 50 DHCP Snooping and Port Configuration Speed Flow If the LAG is needed you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the other functions for the member ports Tips 1 Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of 1000Mbps Full Duplex the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps 2000Mbps 4 because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up linked speed of 1000Mbps and the down linked speed of 1000Mbps 2 The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate Arithmetic If the connections of one or several ports are broken the traffic of these ports will be transmitted on the normal ports so as to guarantee the connection reliability Depending on different aggregation modes aggregation groups fall into two types Static LAG and LACP Config The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table Static LAG and LACP Config configuration pages 6 2 1 LAG Table On this page you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LAG Table to load the following page Global Config Hash Algorithm SRC IP DST IP MI Apply LAG Table Select Group Number Description Member Operation O 1 Static LAG 1 011 1 0 3 5 Edit Detail All Delete Help Note The LAG created by LACP cant be deleted Figure 6 7 LAG Table The following entries are displayed on
11. This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network diagnostics 18 4 1 Ping Ping test function testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the network malfunctions Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnostics Ping to load the following page Ping Config Destination IP Ping Times Data Size Interval Ping Result 192 168 0 1 4 1 10 64 byte 1 1024 1000 millisec 100 1000 Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 bytes 64 time 16ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 0 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average Oms Figure18 9 Ping The following entries are displayed on this screen 362 gt Ping Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test Ping Times Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Data Size Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Interval Specify the interval to send
12. VLAN 6 Figure 7 1 VLAN implementation Compared with the traditional Ethernet VLAN enjoys the following advantages 1 Broadcasts are confined to VLANs This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves network performance 2 Network security is improved VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly That is a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly unless routers or Layer 3 switches are used 3 Network configuration workload for the host is reduced VLAN can be used to group specific hosts When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN you need not to change its network configuration A VLAN can span across multiple switches or even routers This enables hosts in a VLAN to be dispersed in a looser way That is hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network segment This switch supports three ways namely 802 1Q VLAN MAC VLAN and Protocol VLAN to classify VLANs VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs The switch can analyze the received untagged packets on the port and match the 66 packets with the MAC VLAN Protocol VLAN and 802 1Q VLAN in turn If a packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it and forward it in the corresponding VLAN 7 1 802 1Q VLAN VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs The switch works at the data lin
13. e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch C as the On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance designated bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 4096 6 Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 0 e Configure switch D Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN1
14. it will consider this port is not a router port any more Specify the aging time of the member port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Display the dynamic router port Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 124 Static Router Ports Select the desired port as the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology Ano ile The router port should be in the multicast VLAN otherwise the member ports can not receive multicast streams The Multicast VLAN won t take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802 1Q VLAN page It is recommended to choose GENERAL as the link type of the member ports in the multicast VLAN Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as TAG and the link type as GENERAL otherwise all the member ports in the multicast VLAN can not receive multicast streams After a multicast VLAN is created all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the multicast VLAN Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 E
15. 120 sec 1 500 default 1 20 Add Network format 192 168 0 0 RIP Network List Select Added Network No entry in the table Al Figure 10 26 RIP Basic Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt RIP Enable RIP Protocol Global Config RIP Version RIP Distance Choose to enable or disable the RIP function By default is disable Choose the global RIP version e Default send with RIP version 1 and receive with both RIP version 1 and 2 e RIPvi send and receive RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIPv2 send and receive RIP version 2 packets using multicast Set the RIP router distance 161 gt Auto Summary Default Metric Redistribute Static Redistribute OSPF Redistribute Static Metric Redistribute OSPF Metric Update Timer Timeout Timer Garbage Timer Network Enable If you select enable groups of adjacent routes will be summarized into single entries in order to reduce the total number of entries The default is disable Set the default metric for the redistributed routes The valid values are 1 to 15 Choose to distribute Static router entries to RIP the default is disable Choose to distribute OSPF router entries to RIP the default is disable Set the metric of redistributed Static routes The valid values are 0 to 15 Redistribute OSPF Metric Set the metric of redistributed OSPF routes The v
16. Appendix D Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOT
17. Displays the Source of the entry e All All the bound entries will be displayed e Manual Only the manually added entries will be displayed e Scanning Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning will be displayed e Snooping Only the entries formed via DHCP Snooping will be displayed Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the IP address you entered Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name and Protect Type It is multi optional Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry Displays the Source of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries 1 Among the entries with Critical collision level the one with the highest Source priority will take effect 14 1 2 Manual Binding You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Manual Binding to load the following page 276 Manual Bin
18. Port Displays the port number of the switch Priority Enter the priority of the port in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port Path Cost Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Port Role Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance 108 Port Status LAG Mote The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different Displays the working status of the port Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function Step Operation Description 1 Make clear roles the switches Preparation play in spanning tree instances root bridge or designated bridge 2 Globally configure MSTP Required Enable Spanning Tree function on the switch parameters and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page 3 Configure MSTP parameters Required Configure MSTP parameters for ports on for ports Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page 4 Configure the MST region Required Create MST region and configure the role the switch plays in the MST region on Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Region Config and Instance Config page 5 Configure MSTP paramet
19. Query Interval Max Response Time General Query Source IP Last Listener Query Interval Last Listener Query Count Special Query Source IP IGMP Snooping Querier Table O 1 4094 60 secs 10 300 10 secs 1 25 192 168 0 1 format 192 168 0 1 Add 4 secs 1 5 y 2 5 192 168 0 1 format 192 168 0 1 Select VLANID Quer interval 3 Response General Query Source IP LastListener LastListener Special Query Source Query Interval Query Count E IP Total Querier Number 0 No entry in the table All Apply Delete Help Figure 9 8 Packet Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen IGMP Snooping Querier Config VLAN ID Query Interval Max Response Time General Query Source IP Last Listener Query Interval Last Listener Query Count Special Query Source IP Enter the ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Querier Enter the time interval of sending a general query frame by IGMP Snooping Querier Enter the maximal time for the host to respond to a general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier Enter the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP Enter the time interval of sending specific query frames by IGMP Snooping Querier A specific query will be sent on condition that fast leave is not enabled and a leave frame is received Ente
20. User Table User ID User Name Access Level Status 1 admin Admin Enable Figure 4 7 User Table 4 2 2 User Config On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management page The switch provides two access levels Guest and Admin The guest only can view the settings without the right to configure the switch the admin can configure all the functions of the switch The Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin s login without any explanation Choose the menu System User Management gt User Config to load the following page 19 User Info User Name Access Level User Status Password Confirm Password Password Display Mode User Table Select User ID O 1 Note Guest v Enable Disable User Name Simple v Status Enable Operation Edit Access Level admin Admin The User Name should be less than 16 characters and Password should be less than 31 characters using digits English letters and underlines only Figure 4 8 User Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt User Info User Name Access Level User Status Password Confirm Password Password Display Mode User Table Select User ID Name Access Level and status Create a name for users login Select the access level to login e Admin Admin can edit modify and view all the settings of
21. 1 Port Priority Port priority is just a property of the port After port priority is configured the data stream will be mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship between CoS and queues 245 2 802 1P Priority Ethernet Frame 3bit for CoS 802 1p priority PRI CFI VLAN ID 802 1 Q p Tag Figure 12 2 802 10 frame As shown in the figure above each 802 1Q Tag has a Pri field comprising 3 bits The 3 bit priority field is 802 1p priority in the range of O to 7 802 1P priority determines the priority of the packets based on the Pri value On the Web management page of the switch you can configure different priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels and then the switch determine which packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets The switch processes untagged packets based on the default priority mode 3 DSCP Priority IPv4 datagram IPv4 Standard a DiffServ Coda Point DSCP DS Region Figure 12 3 IP datagram As shown in the figure above the ToS Type of Service in an IP header contains 8 bits The first three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7 RFC2474 re defines the ToS field in the IP packet header which is called the DS field The first six bits bit O bit 5 of the DS field indicate DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63 The last 2 bits bit 6 and bit 7 are reserved On the Web management page you can configure
22. 10 10 Basic Contig en a A AA a ae i aa hes 202 10 102 Advanced Coidiniocoiinniaa nat edad cases 204 10 10 3 Virtual IP Coi syste secede ee aati aided a Seti raat ota tee he ede tec 205 10 10 4 Track CONTIG rn ache ok sese tirarla 206 10 10 5 Virtual Router Statistics 0 0 cece eee eenee tekir teeke eee seer teats eeennaeeeeeneneeeeees 208 Chapter 11 Multicast ROUtING ocoocoooococccnncocononconcnccnnnoncnnnnnnonnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnaninnanns 210 11 1 Global Confieso lic een eaaa 211 11 1 1 Global Config ee ce 211 MAZ Moute Table aldo lat 211 1 NS 213 11 2 1 Interface Coi lic bi eee a te 217 112 2 Vnterface State iii A A AA 218 11 23 Static Multicast CONfIY coooooococccnnncicnconooocccnncnnoncnnnnnconnnnononnonannnnnnnnnnennanannnnncos 219 11 24 Multicast Group Table ooooonnococccnnnncccncononocccnncnconcnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnes 221 11 25 Profile BINGING xiii AA A 222 11 2 07 Packet Statistics uma ri cba 224 13 PIM e e olen ate chat Sl ack tha re an atten ai debate 224 11 3 1 PIM DM Interface cts cocotero delatan bicis rei 229 11 3 2 PIM DM Neighbor ccccccccinonononocccccocinncononncnnnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnnnnnencinannnnnnes 230 114 PIM Mica A A AA AA acd ida 231 11 41 PIM SM Interface n hiaan pilotar rta 236 11 4 2 PIM SM NelighDoF occccccccinonononnccnococinncanonncononcnconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnnnenninannnnenes 237 114 3 E a coran id 23
23. 16 characters maximum C VLAN SP VLAN Description 2 3 test Al Figure 7 15 VLAN Mapping Entry Config Configuration Procedure of VLAN VPN Function Operation Edit Step Operation Description 1 Enable VPN mode Required On the VLAN VLAN VPN gt VPN Config page enable the VPN mode 2 Configure the global TPID Optional On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt gt VPN Config page to the up link port configure the global TPID basing on the devices connected 85 Step Operation Description 3 Set the VPN up link port Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VPN Config page specify the desired port to be the VPN up link port It s required to set the port connected to the backbone networks to be up link port 4 Create VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping entries page configure the VLAN Mapping entries basing on the actual application 5 Create SP Service Optional On the VLAN gt 8802 1Q VLAN page create the Provider VLAN SP VLAN For the steps of creating VLAN please refer to 802 1Q VLAN Configuration Procedure of VLAN Mapping Function Step Operation Description 1 Create VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping entries page configure the VLAN Mapping entries basing on the actual application 2 Enable VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN VLAN VPN gt Port Enable page functio
24. 3 Specify the trusted port Required On the Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Detect page specify the trusted port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port 4 Enable ARP Detect feature Required On the Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Detect page enable the ARP Detect feature 14 3 2 ARP Defend With the ARP Defend enabled the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300 seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Defend to load the following page 289 ARP Defend UNIT 1 Select Port Defend Speed 10 100 pps Current Speed pps Status LAG Operation O v O 1 0 11 Disable 15 a ma A O 1 0 2 Disable 15 s E 1 0 3 Disable 15 at Fa O 1 0 4 Disable 15 a C 1 0 5 Disable 15 cs O 1 0 6 Disable 15 sat a za C 1 0 7 Disable 15 Se O 1 0 8 Disable 15 an En sn O 1 0 9 Disable 15 E Ez O 4 0 10 Disable 15 a O 1 0 11 Disable 15 a 410 12 Disable 15 O 4 0 13 Disable 15 m C 1 0 14 Disable 15 zat at Es O 4 0 15 Disable 5 Y 4 ES Note Itis not recommended to enable ARP Defend for LAG member Figure 14 15 ARP Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Defend UNIT Se
25. Attacker Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 14 11 ARP Attack Cheating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Gateway tries to communicate with Host A in LAN it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Terminal Hosts The attacker sends the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host Server to another terminal Host which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment can not communicate with each other normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal Hosts is illustrated in the following figure IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 3 Host B tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Host B Attacker Host B Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 44 44 44 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 2 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00
26. Auth Mode Auth Password Privacy Mode Privacy Password User Table Select User Name User Type Group Name Security Model Security Level Auth Mode Privacy Mode Operation Enter the User Name here Select the type for the User e Local User Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine e Remote User Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine Select the Group Name of the User The User is classified to the corresponding Group according to its Group Name Security Model and Security Level Select the Security Model for the User Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No authentication method is used e MD5 The port authentication is performed via HMAC MD5 algorithm e SHA The port authentication is performed via SHA Secure Hash Algorithm This authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode Enter the password for authentication Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No privacy method is used e DES DES encryption method is used Enter the Privacy Password Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding User It is multi optional Displays the name of the User Displays the User Type Displays the Group Name of the User Displays the Security Model of the User Displays the Security Level of the User Displays the Authentication Mode of the U
27. If Fast Leave is enabled for a port the switch will immediately remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IGMP leave messages LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to P VON 1 Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 2 When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled the leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi user will result in the other users intermitting the multicast business 9 1 3 VLAN Config Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs On this page you can configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs 121 Choose the menu Multicast gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Config to load the following page VLAN Config VLAN ID 1 4094 Router Port Time 300 sec 60 600 recommend 300 Member Port Time 260 sec 60 600 recommend 260 Leave Time 1 sec 1 30 recommend 1 Router Ports UNIT 1 P24 fa fe P64 Fro 62 64 Fe 8 20 621124 26 1 33 5 7 8 1 93 18 17 19 21 231 25 Ea Unselected Port s a Selected Port s y Not Available for Selection Vian Table Select VLAN ID Router Member Leave Static Router Ports Dynamic Router Ports Operation PortTime PortTime Time Note No entry in the table All Delete l Help J The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN
28. Mask These fields can be available for configuration only when IP based mode is selected Only the users within the IP range you set here are allowed for login MAC Address The field can be available for configuration only when MAC based mode is selected Only the user with this MAC Address you set here is allowed for login Port The field can be available for configuration only when Port based mode is selected Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed for login gt Session Config Session Timeout If you do nothing with the Web management page within the timeout time the system will log out automatically If you want to reconfigure please login again gt Access User Number Number Control Select Enable Disable the Number Control function 25 Admin Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Admin Guest Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Guest 4 4 2 SSL Config SSL Secure Sockets Layer a security protocol is to provide a secure connection for the application layer protocol e g HTTP communication based on TCP SSL is widely used to secure the data transmission between the Web browser and servers It is mainly applied through ecommerce and online banking SSL mainly provides the following services 1 Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data ar
29. The edge port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay Select the P2P link status If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or designated port they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce the unnecessary forward delay Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port Unchange means no MCheck operation Display the spanning tree mode of the port 104 Port Role Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP Port Status Displays the working status of the port Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status th
30. This IP address can be the same as the interface address of any router in the backup group In this case the virtual router is also called IP address owner All physical routers in the backup group have their own IP addresses 198 Hosts in LAN only recognize the IP address of the virtual router but not that of the master router or backup routers The IP address of the virtual router is assigned as the default gateway for the participating routers Hosts in LAN communicate with external network via the virtual router Once the master router in backup group fails another router will be selected to replace it from the backup group through election protocol and thus provides routing service for hosts Therefore communication between hosts and external network can be established without interruption gt Advantages of VRRP VRRP owns the following advantages 1 Simplified network management In LAN with multicast or broadcast function such as Ethernet even though a device fails with the help of VRRP highly reliable default link can still be provided and network interruption can be avoided after a single link fails without reconfiguration of dynamic routing or router discovery protocols or default gateway configuration on every end host 2 Small network overhead The single message that VRRP defines is the VRRP advertisement which can only be sent by the master router gt Typical Networking Application Diagram Virtual router
31. amp Good Copyright 2014 TP LINK Technologies Co Ltd All rights reserved Figure 3 3 Main Setup Menu Ave Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted If you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted please click Save Config You are suggested to click Save Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the switch to avoid losing the new configurations Return to CONTENTS 13 Chapter 4 System The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch including four submenus System Info User Management System Tools and Access Security 4 1 System Info The System Info mainly for basic properties configuration can be implemented on System Summary Device Description System Time and Daylight Saving Time pages 4 1 1 System Summary On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information The port status diagram shows the working status of 24 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 ports 4 1000Mbps SFP ports and 2 10000Mbps SFP ports of the switch Ports 27T and 28T are Combo ports with SFP ports labeled 27F and 28F Choose the menu System System Info System Summary to load the following page Port Info UNIT 1 2 4 6 Be 1012 14 16 13 20 222 328 22F 24F 26 uu O uu a E DO E DD D RUI DU DADA DA DD DAE BA DA PD A 1 3 5 T S A 13 15 de 19 fal 23 21F 23F 25 System Info UNIT 1 System Description
32. field in the packet without VLAN Tag Thus to avoid confusion happening when the switch forwards or receives a packet you must not configure the following protocol type values listed in the following table as the TPID value Protocol type Value ARP 0x0806 IP 0x0800 MPLS 0x8847 0x8848 IPX 0x8137 IS IS 0x8000 82 Protocol type Value LACP 0x8809 802 1X 0x888E Table 7 3 Values of Ethernet frame protocol type in common use This VLAN VPN function is implemented on the VPN Config VLAN Mapping and Port Enable pages 7 7 1 VPN Config This page allows you to enable the VPN function adjust the global TPID for VLAN VPN packets and enable the VPN up link port When VPN mode is enabled the switch will add a tag to the received tagged packet basing on the VLAN mapping entries Choose the menu VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VPN Config to load the following page Global Config VPN Mode O Enable Disable Apply Global TPID 8100 4 Hex integers VPN Up link Ports UNIT 1 2101804042 44 66 4811201221124 28 J AERA RY RIRA RY LYR FA ES Unselected Port s C Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Figure 7 12 VPN Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config VPN Mode Allows you to Enable Disable the VLAN VPN function Global TPID Enter the global TPID Tag protocol identifier gt VPN Up link Ports Unit
33. o Port 4 A Switch C Port 21 Port ij Switch A Switch B Meeting Room A pu Y Meeting Room B Notebook A Notebook B gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 11 and Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively ports 75 Step Operation Description 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 4 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 10 the MAC address as 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 5 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 20 the MAC address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 6 Port Enable Required On the VLAN MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select and enable Port 11 and Port 12 for MAC VLAN feature e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 21 and Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK resp
34. topology Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors 340 Current Device Info Device Name TP_0 T3700G 28TQ MAC 00 0A EB 00 13 57 Hops 0 HW Version T3700G 28TQ 1 0 IP Address 192 168 0 1 Firmware Version 0 1 2 1 Build 20131113 Rel 78809 Cluster Info Cluster TP s Commander Neighbor Info Native Port Remote Port Device MAC Speed Mbit s Duplex No entry in the table Back Figure17 6 Information of the Current Device 17 2 2 NTDP Summary On this page you can view the NTDP configuration Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Summary to load the following page Global Config NTDP Disable NTDP Interval Time 1 min NTDP Hops 3hop NTDP Hop Delay 200ms NTDP Port Delay 20ms Port Status UNIT 1 2416108710112 44 46 18120122124 00317 ALS R RARA RARA 21 291 ES Unselected Port s ES Selected Port s ES Not Available for Selection Figure17 7 NTDP Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen 341 Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay Port Status UNIT Selected Port s Unselected Port s 17 2 3 NTDP Config On this page you can configure NTDP globally Displays the NTDP status enabled or disabled of the switch globally Displays the interval to collect topology information Displays the hop count the switch topology collects Displays the time between the switch receiv
35. 012 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 13 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 14 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 05 0 0 0 0 Statistics iv Figure6 11 Traffic Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Traffic Summary UNIT Port Select Port Packets Rx Packets Tx Octets Rx Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the port number Displays the number of packets received on the port The error packets are not counted in Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port Displays the number of octets received on the port The error octets are counted in 56 Octets Tx Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port Statistics Click the Statistics button to view the detailed traffic statistics of the port 6 3 2 Traffic Statistics Traffic Statistics screen displays the detailed traffic information of each port which facilitates you to monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly Choose the menu Switching Traffic Monitor Traffic Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Port Select
36. 1 0 11 1 1 0 and the interfaces are enable RIP in these network segments These network segments located will be displayed in RIP Network List after they are successfully added 10 9 OSPF OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a routing protocol based on link state and also an internal gateway protocol which is developed and recommended by IETF The OSPF protocol standard in current use for IPv4 network is OSPF Version 2 which is defined specifically in RFC2328 and will be introduced generally in this Guide gt Introduction 1 OSPF Features OSPF protocol is a popular routing protocol in networking with the following features e Fast convergence It could send update packets immediately upon the change of network topology to quickly synchronize the update for the routers in the autonomous system e Due to the rapid convergence OSPF routing protocol acts with great speediness and stability in the large scale network and is not prone to some harmful routing information e OSPF protocol introduces the concept of area to manage the autonomous system by area which means the routers only need to synchronize the link state database with the other routers in the same area Thus the smaller link state database requires lower memory consumption from the routers and the less routing information to manage also releases certain CPU resources for the routers and meanwhile reduces the network bandwidth occupied by the routing inform
37. 168 0 103 00 0F 12 0E ED 2D 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF OF 4E ARP Response Unicast Figure 14 3 ARP Implementation Procedure 1 Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN Host A and Host B To send a packet to Host B Host A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host B exists If yes Host A will directly send the packets to Host B If the corresponding MAC address is not found in the ARP Table Host A will broadcast ARP request packet which contains the IP address of Host B the IP address of Host A and the MAC address of Host A in the LAN 2 Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted all hosts in the LAN can receive it However only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request Host B sends back an ARP reply packet to Host A with its MAC address carried in the packet 3 Upon receiving the ARP reply packet Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN Upon receiving the ARP reply packet the switch can get the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the packet and bind them conveniently Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding ARP Scanning to load the following page 278 Scanning Option Start IP Address End I
38. 221124 2 kbA ESI EALA RARAY RS RABY RH RY 25 a Unselected Port s E Selected Port s ES Not Available for Selection Port Isolation Config UNIT Port Forward Portlist Figure 6 6 Port Isolation Config Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the port number to set its forward list It is multi optional Select the port that to be forwarded to It is multi optional Click the Back button to go back to the port isolation list 6 2 LAG LAG Link Aggregation Group is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data path so as to implement the traffic load sharing among the member ports in the group and to enhance the connection reliability For the member ports in an aggregation group their basic configuration must be the same The basic configuration includes STP QoS GVRP VLAN port attributes MAC Address Learning mode and other associated settings The further explains are as following If the ports which are enabled for the IGMP IGMP Snooping GVRP 802 1Q VLAN Voice VLAN STP QoS Port Isolation Control are in a LAG their configurations should be the same The ports which are enabled for the Port Security Port Mirror MAC Address Filtering Static MAC Address Binding 802 1X Authentication IP Source Guard half duplex and Routed Port can not be added to the LAG It s not suggested to add the ports with ARP Inspection and DoS Defend enabled to the
39. 25 26 designed to install the 10Gbps SFP transceiver cable T3700G 28TQ also provides an interface card slot on the rear panel to install the expansion card TX432 of TP LINK for example If TX432 is installed you get another two 10Gbps SFP ports gt Unit ID LED Designed to display the stack unit number of the switch For the switch that does not join any stack system it displays its default unit number To modify the default unit number please logon to the GUI of the switch and go to Stack Stack Management Switch Renumber page 2 3 2 Rear Panel The rear panel of T3700G 28TQ is shown as the following figure RPS Input Connector Dc 12V al ES P wy ES E o al MIDI J psmsoac MID 100 2 SORO aA Interface Card Slot Grounding Terminal RPS Input Connector Power Supply Module Figure 2 2 Rear Panel 1 10 Anzte The Interface Card Slot RPS Input Connector and AC Power Supply Module Slot are shipped with protective covers gt Interface Card Slot Designed to extend the interfaces You can select an Interface Card TX432 of TP LINK for example for your switch if needed gt Grounding Terminal T3700G 28TQ already comes with Lightning Protection Mechanism You can also ground the switch through the PE Protecting Earth cable of AC cord or with Ground Cable For detailed information please refer
40. 3 coso O 1 0 4 Coso O 1 0 5 coso O 110 6 Coso O 11017 coso O 1 0 8 coso O 1 0 9 coso E O 1 0 10 coso O 1 0 11 Coso O 1 0 12 Coso O 1 0 13 Coso O 1 01 4 coso O 1 01 5 coso v Al Note Port priority is one property of the port When the port priority is specified the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the CoS value of the ingress port and the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in 802 1P CoS mapping Figure 12 6 Port Priority Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Priority Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port to configure its priority It is multi optional Port Displays the physical port number of the switch Priority Specify the priority for the port 248 LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Mote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Select the port priority Required On QoS DiffServ Port Priority page configure the port priority 2 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ 802 1P Priority page relation between the CoS configure the mapping relation between the CoS and priority and TC TC 3 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page
41. 4 MAG AQUTeSS escindida 59 6 4 1 Address Table iii AAA eee eh ee es 59 6 4 2 Static Address a E 61 6 4 3 Dynamic Address ii A A Aids 62 6 4 4 Filtering Addres Siir Kie nni a A A eae aaa 64 Chapter VEAN aa 66 PAD BOL AGE VLAN ii 67 TR MEAN CONO ut a ticas 68 7 1 2 Port CON unit AA oe etn a teat 70 7 2 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN ooooococicccccccnnnnononcnnnnccnnnnnnnonnnnnononinnannnnnnnnnnoninnns 72 Ta MAC VLAN oo ia da dad KAVARNE 73 TSA MACVEAN di bid tin 73 7 3 2 PortEnable ista aa tloteaddesestet 74 7 4 Application Example for MAC VLAN ooocccccnncoconccccccccnonnnnonncnnnnoninnannnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnccnno 75 TO Protocol VLAN Massie diesel ear ei Wate it ede i aeons 77 7 5 1 ProtoGol Group Table viscosa title 77 7 5 2 A eaea e a E e AE ANE naa andet E iaip aaea 78 7 5 3 Protocol Tem plates mrien reran a bo beeadddebivvaiesdetead 79 7 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN cccceeceecceeceeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeeeeeeseneeneaeeeeeeeess 80 O menea a e aa a e A aa tuted caesar 82 TL A O ad 83 7 7 2 Port Enable visitarla ai 83 7 7 3 IN 84 TE E EN r Boas E le RO 86 1 9 Private VEAN rani aerian eei e eiee a i adi a ne or i 89 RIL PILAN Configs aaeh a a tl E R OA 91 7 9 2 Port COM isis ti nia 92 7 10 Application Example for Private VLAN ooooococicnncicccnococoncccccccnonnnnnnnncnnnnoninnannnnnnnnncnninnns 93 Chapter 3 Spanning Tree unica ip 96 SAT STP CONIO oeer alegre menace ate Ut ae ea ete dead att
42. 4 3 4 Firmware Upgrade siisii ni i il ii in iinet 23 4 3 5 System Reboot ii Manin hoa on ein einen 24 4 3 6 System RESE ino e e raaa EEANN a EE EENE EAA PATEE 24 AA Access SOCUIMY si ear e AA N EE N EEL A E 24 4 4 1 Accessi CONTO ita hala 24 AAD SECO a e aes date asia eases aati ees 26 4 4 3 SSH CONTO tii a EEEE E a AEE anaa REPEDE EdE 27 Chapter S AC A ee dete ee i ed Sed Ee ee a 33 5 1 Stack Management ccccccccecceeccece cece eeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeececceeaeeeseeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeeesseeenseneeees 39 5 1 1 SHACK MINTO sess A doce an 39 BAZ Stack CONG esini raa aa sudan aea eara Ai aieea Aaaa Tanan 40 5 1 3 Switch RENUMbEL 000 ee ceeeee eter eeeeeene eter eeneaeeeeeneaeeeesseneeeesesneeeeeetsieeeeeeeeaes 41 5 2 Application Example for Stack oooooconnnnonocococcccoccnonannnncnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnconennnnnnnnnnnnnoninnns 42 Chapter 6 SWitehingir iiine ea A dete da 44 Ole PO A ae E ld 44 6 1 1 Port Contig igh ia nea hash Gat eae PEO Aaaa 44 6 1 2 POMIMO ierra iaa aa A E ie tiaeabened lide eeeerere ies 45 6 1 3 Port Security niera a a N A A eee dad 47 6 1 4 Port SOLANO sets n id A A ee a 49 i EEE E nd ac 50 6 21 EAG Tale a ae te dec e a e ar a ae aaa E 51 A e aaarnas nae AA 52 eee A E 0 CONTO eraran O 53 0 30 Traffic MoOnItO opc it a Pad 55 6 3 1 Traffic S mmaTy indir ea ae dali 55 6 3 2 Traffic Statistics 2 cece ects ener e eee teek errr tenn eee eeesaeeeeseeneeeesesneeeeeessieetereneaee 57 0
43. 5 8 5 Application Example for STP Function gt Network Requirements e SwitchA B C D and E all support MSTP function e Ais the central switch e Band C are switches in the convergence layer D E and F are switches in the access layer e There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101 VLAN106 in the network e All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region e The data in VLAN101 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge The data in VLAN102 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge gt Network Diagram m a Switch A Switch B Switch C aa ta Switch D Switch E Switch F 112 gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt
44. 5 1 32768 Active Disable E 110 6 1 32768 Active Disable O 110 7 1 32768 Active Disable C 110 8 1 32768 Active Disable O 1 0 9 1 32768 Active Disable O 1 0 10 1 32768 Active Disable E 1 0 11 1 32768 Active Disable C 110 12 1 32768 Active Disable E 1 0 13 1 32768 Active Disable O 1 0 14 1 32768 Active Disable O 1 0 15 1 32768 Active Disable y Al Note 1 To avoid any broadcast storm when LACP takes effect you are suggested to enable Spanning Tree function 2 LACP function can not be enabled for the port already in a static link aggregation group Figure 6 10 LACP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config System Priority Specify the system priority for the switch The system priority and MAC address constitute the system identification ID A lower system priority value indicates a higher system priority When exchanging information between systems the system with higher priority determines which link aggregation a link belongs to and the system with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation according to the selection of its partner gt LACP Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 54 Select Port Admin Key Port Priority Mode Status LAG Select the desired port for LACP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Specify an Admin Key for the port The member ports in a dynamic aggregat
45. 6 LLDP MED Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP MED Parameters Config Fast Start Count When LLDP MED fast start mechanism is activated multiple LLDP MED frames will be transmitted the number of frames equals this parameter The default value is 4 329 16 4 2 Port Config Device Class LLDP MED devices are comprised of two primary device types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices In turn Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes Class Class Il and Class Ill Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device On this page you can configure all ports LLDP MED parameters Choose the menu LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Port Config to load the following page LLDP MED Port Config UNIT Select pp L 4 p p 90 0000000 1 Port 1 0 11 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 17 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 1 0 11 1 0 12 1 0 13 1 0 14 1 0 15 LLDP MED Status Included TLVs B Disable Detail MN Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail 3 Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail Disable Detail v Figure 16 7 LLDP MED Port Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP MED Port Config Select LLDP MED Status Included TLVs Detail Select the desired port to configure Configure the
46. Address 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 Interface Status Up Line Protocol Status Up Admin Status Enable Interface Name Interface Setting Detail Information MTU is 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is enabled Split horizon is disabled ICMP redirects are never sent ICMP unreachables are always sent ICMP mask replies are never sent Back gt Detail Information Interface ID Displays ID of the interface including VLAN ID loopback interface and routed port IP Address Mode Displays the IP address allocation mode None without ip Static setup manually DHCP allocated through DHCP BOOTP allocated through BOOTP IP Address Displays the IP address and subnet mask of the interface Interface Status Displays the interface current working status which is up when Admin Status is enable line protocol is up and IP address is set Line Protocol Displays the line protocol status which is up if any up link port is Status connected to the interface Admin Status Displays the Admin status Choose Disable to disable the interface s Layer 3 capabilities Interface Name Displays the name of the interface 137 gt Interface Setting Detail Information Displays the detailed setting information of the interface 10 2 Routing Table This page displays the routing information summary generated by different routing protocols Choose the menu Routing Routing Table Routing Table to lo
47. BDR DR is responsible to flood the routing information in the network to all the neighbors When DR fails BDR will become the new DR which avoids network block during the DR re election Then a new BDR needs to be re elected for sure but the process would not affect the communication even though it still requires quite a long time Once DR and BDR are determined in a network unless they become invalid any new routers joining or exiting would not cause re election As shown below on a network of five routers ten adjacency relations need to be established if one between every two routers but only seven adjacencies are required if DR and BDR are introduced To conclude on a network of N routers N N 1 2 adjacencies are required in general but the adjacencies required will be N 2 2 1 if DR and BDR are introduced Therefore the more routers on the network the more significant the advantages will be 167 Physical Connection Adjacency Relation Figure 10 30 Diagram of DR BDR Adjacency Relation DR or BDR is determined by the interface priority and router ID First of all whether a router could be the DR or BDR on a network is decided by its interface priority The one of highest priority would be elected as DR or BDR while if all the interfaces are of the same priority it would then be decided by the router ID In conclusion DR or BDR is the feature of a certain interface of the router which indicates the status of th
48. Config On this page you can configure the basic parameters for the ports When the port is disabled the packets on the port will be discarded Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce the power consumption effectively And you can enable the port when it is in need The parameters will affect the working mode of the port please set the parameters appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Switching gt Port gt Port Config to load the following page Port Config UNIT 3 Select Port 3 0 1 3 0 2 3 0 3 3 0 4 3 0 5 3 0 6 3 0 17 3 0 8 3 0 9 3 0 10 3 0 11 3 0 12 3 0 13 3 0 14 3 0 15 OOOOOOOO0O00000000 Note Type Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Description Status Speed Duplex Flow Control S S a F Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable Enable Auto Auto Disable All The Port Description should be not more than 16 characters Figure 6 1 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select Port Type LAG Select the unit ID
49. Config to load the following page 105 Region Config Region Name 00 00 54 28 c0 69 a appi Revision lo 065535 Figure 8 7 Region Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Region Config Region Name Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters Revision Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification 8 3 2 Instance Config Instance Configuration a property of MST region is used to describe the VLAN to Instance mapping configuration You can assign VLAN to different instances appropriate to your needs Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance Config to load the following page VLAN Instance Mapping Instance ID 0 8 0 stand for CIST Add VLAN ID 1 4094 format 1 3 4 7 11 30 Instance Config Select InstanceID Status Priority VLAN ID O i CIST Disable 32768 1 4094 Show All Clear Al O 1 Disable 32768 Show All Clear A Fi 2 Disable 32768 Show All Clear Al F 3 Disable 32768 Show All Clear Al O 4 Disable 32768 Show All Clear A F 5 Disable 32768 Show All Clear A O 6 Disable 32768 Show All Clear A F 7 Disable 32768 Show All Clear Al O 8 Disable 32768 Show All Clear Al Apply Note Instance except CIST will be automatically enabled when VLAN ID is mapped to it Figure 8 8 Instance Config The following
50. DHCP allocated through DHCP BOOTP allocated through BOOTP Displays the IP address of the interface Displays the subnet mask of the interface Displays the name of the interface Displays interface current working status Working status is up when admin status is enable line protocol is up and IP Address is set You can configure the interface by clicking the Edit or check Detail information by clicking Detail Click Edit to display the following figure Modify Interface Interface ID Vlan1 IP Address Mode None Static O DHCP O BOOTP pr IP Address 192 168 0 1 Format 192 168 0 1 Gua e SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Format 255 255 255 0 Hel Admin Status Enable v Interface Name Optional 1 32 characters gt Modify Interface Interface ID Displays ID of the interface including VLAN ID loopback interface and routed port Mode View and modify the IP address allocation mode None without ip Static setup manually DHCP allocated through DHCP BOOTP allocated through BOOTP IP Address View and modify the IP address of the interface Subnet Mask View and modify the subnet mask of the interface 136 Admin Status View and modify the Admin status Choose Disable to disable the interface s Layer 3 capabilities Interface Name View and modify the interface name Click Detail to display the following figure Detail Information Interface ID VLAN1 IP Address Mode Static IP
51. Displays the Advertise parameter and it can be modified Choose the menu Routing OSPF Virtual Link to load the following page 192 Virtual Link Creation Process ID Transit Area ID Neighbor Router ID Virtual Link Table Select Interface 0 4294967295 or a b c d TransitArealD Neighbor Router ID Format 1 1 1 1 Retransmit Authentication Key State Interval Hello Interval Dead Interval Transmit Delay aun peral y No entry in the table Apply Delete Help Figure10 51 Virtual Link The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Virtual Link Creation Process ID Transit Area ID Neighbor Router ID Virtual Link Table Select Interface Transit Area ID Neighbor Router ID Retransmit Interval Hello Interval Dead Interval Transmit Delay Select the desired OSPF process for configuration The ID of the transit area Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common non backbone area Here the common area is named Transit Area The router ID of the neighbor portion of a virtual link Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional Displays the virtual interface When you create a virtual link actually a virtual interface is created Displays the transit area ID of the virtual link Displays the neighbor router ID of the virtual link The r
52. Displays the IP address of the network Displays the wildcard mask of the network 185 Area ID 10 9 4 Interface Choose the menu Routing OSPF Interface to load the following page Select Interface Interface Table Vlan1 192 168 0 1 24 IP AddressiMask Process Area ID Router Priority Displays the area to which the network belongs Retransmit Interval 1 5 10 40 1 1 broadcast Hello Interval Dead Interval Transmit Delay Cost Network Type Passive Mode ai Eat Retresh Help Figure10 47 OSPF Interface The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Interface Table Select Interface IP Address Mask Process Area ID Router Priority Retransmit Interval Hello Interval Dead Interval Transmit Delay Cost Network Type Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured The IP address and subnet mask of the interface The process to which the interface belongs The area to which a router interface connects The router priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from O to 255 A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network The default is 1 The retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for
53. Displays the management VLAN ID of the switch e Foracommander switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Commander Cluster Name TP Cluster Management vlan VLAN ID 1 Cluster Config IP Pool 192 168 2 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 Hold Time 20sec Interval Time 20sec Member Info Device Name Device MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Hops No entry in the table Figure 17 10 Cluster Summary for Commander Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster Cluster Name Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to gt Cluster Management vlan VLAN ID Displays the management VLAN ID of the switch gt Cluster Config IP Pool amp Mask Displays the private IP range of the member switches in the cluster Hold Time Displays the time for the commander switch to keep the cluster information Interval Time Displays the interval to send handshake packets TFTP Server Displays the IP address of TFTP server 344 gt Member Info Device Name Displays the description of the member switch Device MAC Displays the MAC address of the member switch IP Address Displays the IP address of the member switch used in the cluster Status Displays the connection status of the member switch Role Disp
54. Group 2 corresponding to Virtual Router 2 Device B is the master router Device A and C are backup routers e Backup Group 3 corresponding to Virtual Router 3 Device C is the master router Device A and B are backup routers To realize the workload balancing among Device A B and C the default gateway of the hosts associated with the LAN should be set as Virtual Router 1 2 and 3 respectively When it comes to priority configuration it would be better that the VRRP priority values of the three virtual routers are different in order to prevent one router from being more than one master simultaneously gt VRRP Configuration Before configuring VRRP users should plan well to specify the role and function of the devices in backup groups Every switch in backup group should be configured which is the precondition to construct a backup group 10 10 1 Basic Config VRRP Virtual Routing Redundancy Protocol is a function on the Switch that dynamically assigns responsibility for a virtual router to one of the VRRP routers on a LAN The VRRP router that controls the IP address associated with a virtual router is called the Master and will forward packets sent to this IP address This will allow any Virtual Router IP address on the LAN to be used as the default first hop router by end hosts Choose the menu Routing gt VRRP Basic Config to load the following page VRRP Basic Config VRID 1 255 Interface VLAN v 1 4094 Virtua
55. Guide ooooooccccccinonococccccccoconcnnnnnncncnnnnncnonnnnnnncnnnncnnoncnnnnnncnnnncncicinannnnss 2 Chapter 2 Intro UCION xiii A A A A aa E 7 2 1 Overview of the Switch ooooccononnnnnncccccccccconnnnncnccnnnccconnnnnoncncnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnncncancnnannnnnnnno 7 2 2 Main Features uri A a ea rae e as erpe e toin bo eat 7 2 3 Appearance Description oooooccninnidinniiccnnnncnncnnnccnncnnncnnncnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnonenanennnnnnnnnnnnnnninnn 8 2 3 1 POMP ane lise cid a a eet 8 2 3 2 Rear Pel ni n AAA ide tents 10 Chapter 3 Login to the Within loa dhbatipadeneebve ett oteaddastanet 12 3 1 BOI A la 12 3 2 SCOMMGUPATION cri A ites 0 Dea Orde ts 12 Chapter 4 SyStemtassesde eickceleescabescpahehentustesktuctinnatad ae a aa it 14 AT System a ees 14 4 1 1 System SUMMA Yi A ested ted 14 4 1 2 Device DeScriptlOn a aii Ai 16 4 1 3 System Time c ccc ccccceeccecceee cee ee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeececeeaeaeeeeeeeesscccaeaeeeseeeeeseeseneaeeees 17 4 1 4 Daylight Saving Time cceeceeceeee cece cece eeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeseseseeaeeeteeeees 18 4 2 UseriManagement norem A ees ene eee as 19 4 2 1 User Table vient ahi Nee ee ee latte Mice al ui SRE aed 19 4 2 2 USer CONTIG Sin Ree ae eth areata Sania Rees 19 AS System TO vue oh Mew ae adie ry is eer een ety 21 4 3 1 Boot Contig ut eek beeen ian Meee ad ee a ae eels 21 4 3 2 Contig RESTO ii A AAA aha ae ais 22 4 3 3 Config BackUp ias sica rr n 22
56. Help Circuit ID Remote ID Note 1 Relay function is enabled when DHCP Server is enabled 2 Circuit ID or Remote ID can only use number or letters Figure 10 17 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Option 82 configuration Configure the Option 82 which can not be assigned by the switch Option 82 Support Enable or disable the Option 82 feature Existed Option 82 Select the operation for the existed Option 82 field of the Field DHCP request packets from the Host e Keep Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets e Replace Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one e Drop Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field Customization Enable or disable the switch to define the Option 82 field Circuit ID Enter the sub option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82 field Remote ID Enter the sub option Remote ID for the customized Option 82 field 10 5 2 DHCP Server This page enables you to configure DHCP Servers on the specified interface Choose the menu Routing DHCP Relay DHCP Server to load the following page 153 Add DHCP Server Address v 61 4094 Format 192 168 2 1 Interface ID VLAN Server Address DHCP Server List select Interface ID Note Server Address No entry in the table Each interface can add 10 DHCP Server IP address at most Figure 10
57. Holiday Start Date Specify the start date of the holiday End Date Specify the end date of the holiday Holiday Name Enter the name of the holiday gt Holiday Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday Index Displays the index of the holiday Holiday Name Displays the name of the holiday Start Date Displays the start date of the holiday End Date Displays the end date of the holiday 13 2 ACL Config An ACL may contain a number of rules and each rule specifies a different package range Packets are matched in match order Once a rule is matched the switch processes the matched packets taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rules which can enhance the performance of the switch Packets are classified based on match rules in order of the rules Once a rule is matched The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary ACL Create MAC ACL Standard IP ACL and Extend IP ACL pages 263 13 2 1 ACL Summary On this page you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config ACL Summary to load the following page Search Options Select a ACL ACL 2 v ACL Type MAC ACL Rule Order User Config Rule Table Select Index Rule ID S MAC Address D MAC Address Time Range Name Operation No entry in the table an Detete Help Figure 13 4 ACL Summary The following entries are displayed on this
58. ICMP request packets The default value is recommended gt Ping Result Here you can view the Ping result 18 4 2 Tracert Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the source to destination of the test data When malfunctions occur to the network you can locate trouble spot of the network with this tracert test Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnostics Tracert to load the following page Tracert Config Destination IP 192 168 0 100 Max Hop 4 hop 1 30 Tracert Result Figure18 10 Tracert The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Tracert Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination device Max Hop Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass through gt Tracert Result Here you can view the Tracert result Return to CONTENTS 363 Chapter 19 System Maintenance via FTP The firmware can be downloaded to the switch via FTP function FTP File Transfer Protocol a protocol in the application layer is mainly used to transfer files between the remote server and the local PCs It is a common protocol used in the IP network for files transfer If there is something wrong with the firmware of the switch and the switch can not be launched the firmware can be downloaded to the switch again via FTP function 1 Hardware Installation Console port PC Switch FTP Server Figure
59. ID as 10 owning Port 3 and Port 4 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 5 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 81 Step Operation Description 4 Create Protocol Required On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Template page Template configure the protocol template practically E g the Ether Type of IP network packets is 0800 and that of AppleTalk network packets is 809B 5 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group page create protocol VLAN 10 VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP Select and enable Port 3 Port 4 and Port 5 for Protocol VLAN feature 6 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group page create protocol VLAN 20 VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk Select and enable Port 3 Port 4 and Port 5 for Protocol VLAN feature 7 7 VLAN VPN With the increasing application of the Internet the VPN Virtual Private Network technology is developed and used to establish the private network through the operators backbone networks VLAN VPN Virtual Private Network function the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2 VPN technology allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider And
60. IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork IP Multicast Filtering It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group 383 Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash func
61. Interface VLAN v 1 4094 Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 Create Source IP Format 192 168 0 1 Forward Ports WHIT 1 ofa ele aaa MALS ILS RA KA KI KEKA EA tarea Unselected Selected Not Available for Port s Portis Selection Search Option Search Option All v Static Multicast Group List Select Interface Multicast IP Source IP Forward Ports No entry in the table Al Total static multicast groups O Figure 11 7 Static Multicast Group The following entries are displayed on this screen gt IGMP Static Multicast Group Interface Enter the ID of the interface corresponds to VLAN ID or routed port Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Source IP Displays the Source IP of the entry Forward Ports Select the forward ports UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack gt Search Option 220 Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly gt Static Multicast Group List All Displays all static multicast IP entries Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Interface VLAN Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Port Select the port the desired entry must carry Routed Port Select the routed port the desired entry must carry Interface Display the interface ID of the entry Multicast IP Displays the multicas
62. It is mainly used to central manage the scattered devices in the network A network administrator can manage and maintain the switches in the cluster via a management switch The management switch is the commander of the cluster and the others are member switches The typical topology is as follows Network administrator 10 90 90 100 Member switch Member switch Candidato switch Figure17 1 Cluster topology gt Cluster Role According to their functions and status in a cluster switches in the cluster play different roles You can specify the role a switch plays There are four roles Commander Switch Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster It discovers and determins the candidate switches by collecting NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol and NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol Member Switch Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster Candidate Switch Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster Individual Switch Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled The roles can be changed from one to anther following the specified rules e The current switch you create cluster is specified as the commander switch e The commander switch discovers and determines candidate switches by collecting related information e After being added to the cluster the candidate switch becomes to be the member switch e After bei
63. It ranges from 1 to 255 Select Enable or disable the preempt Mode from the pull down list If you select Enable a backup router will preempt the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router s priority The Preempt Mode is enabled by default Enter the delay time associated with the VRRP It ranges from 0 to 255 Select the type of Authentication for the Virtual Router from the pull down list The default is None e None No authentication will be performed e Simple Authentication will be performed using a text password e MD5 Authentication of MD5 will be performed using a text password If you select Simple or MD5 as authentication mode enter the key Click the button to submit the modified configuration 10 10 3 Virtual IP Config You can configure virtual IP for the virtual routers on this page A virtual IP which must be in the subnet ofan interface corresponding with the virtual router can be added deleted and modified for the special virtual router Choose the menu Routing VRRP Virtual IP Config to load the following page 205 Add Virtual IP Interface RID Virtual IP VRRP Virtual IP Table Select RID O Add Virtual IP VRID Interface Virtual IP Create VRRP Virtual IP Table Select VRID Interface Virtual IP Apply Delete 10 10 4 Track Config You can configure Track information for virtual routers on this page The state
64. Link Switch Switch Switch Switch 2 gt A Sed Sa Figure 5 5 Stack Split After stack partition occurs each newly established stack elects their own new master and use the MAC address of the master as its stack MAC address However stack partition probably brings about routing and forwarding problems on the network since the partitioned stacks keep operating with the previous IP address by default which results in same IP address being reused in the same LAN 2 Operation Procedure Stack management involves these four stages Connecting the stack members Topology collection Master election and Stack management and maintenance 35 1 Connecting the stack members To establish a stack please physically connect the stack ports of the member devices with cables The stack ports of T3700 28TQ can be used for stack connection or as normal Ethernet Gigabit port When you want to establish a stack the stack mode of the related ports should be configured as Enable If the stack mode of the port is Disable then the port will work as a normal Ethernet port Stack typically adopts a daisy chain topology or ring topology as shown in Figure 5 6 Slave Master Slave Slave Slave Slave Ring Topology Daisy Chain Topology Figure 5 6 Stack Connect Topology e The daisy chain topology is mainly used in a network where member devices are distributively located e The ring topology is more reliable than t
65. Message The host running IGMPv1 does not send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group as a result the switch can not get the leave information of the host momentarily However after leaving the multicast group the host does not send IGMP report message any more so the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast address table when its member port time times out The host running IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 sends IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group to inform the multicast router of its leaving When receiving IGMP leave message the querier will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast and reset the member port time to the leave time When the leave time times out the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast group If no other member is in the group after the port is removed the switch will send IGMP leave message to the router and remove the whole multicast group gt IGMP Snooping Fundamentals 1 Ports Router Port Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router Member Port Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member 2 Timers Router Port Time Within the time if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more The default value is 300 seconds Member Port Time Within the time if t
66. On Router Q Receiver Destination Mask RPF Neighbor Mask Router B 192 168 0 1 24 192 168 3 1 24 192 168 3 1 24 Source Vlan1 192 168 3 2 24 Receiver Router A Router C 192 168 0 1 24 Static multicast route _ Multicast packets Figure 11 26 Static Multicast Routing As shown in Figure 11 26 when no static multicast routing entry is configured the RPF neighbor of Router C to the multicast source is Router A The multicast packets sent from Source will be 242 transferred along the path Router A Router C which is the same as the unicast path When Router C is configured with static multicast routing and the RPF neighbor of Router C to Source is configured as Router B the multicast data sent from Source will travel along a different path Router A gt Router B Router C 11 5 1 Static Mroute Config Choose the menu Multicast Routing Static Mroute Static Mroute Config to load the following page Static Mroute Config Source Format 192 168 0 1 Source Mask Format 255 255 255 255 RPF Neighbor Format 192 168 0 2 Distance 0 255 Static Mroute Config Table Select Source Source Mask RPF Neighbor Distance No entry in the table Entry Count 0 Figure 11 27 Static Mroute Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Static Mroute Config Source Enter the IP address that identifies the multicast source o
67. Rate Limit Decline Protect LAG a a a v 1 0 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable A 1 0 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 3 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable 110 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 6 Disable Disable Disable Disable 41107 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 8 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 9 Disable Disable Disable Disable E 1 0 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 11 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 12 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable 1 0 15 Disable Disable Disable Disable wz E N N N N N N N Port Config Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify ar Avy He Figure 14 9 DHCP Snooping Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Select Enable Disable the port to be a Trusted Port Only the Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP servers Select Enable Disable the MAC Verify feature There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the Host The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different 284 Rate Limit Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP messages that can be forwarded by the switch of this port per second The excessive DHCP packets will be
68. Security Type for the port e Disable Select this option to disable the IP Source Guard feature for the port e SIP Only the packets with its source IP address and port number matched to the IP MAC binding rules can be processed e SIP MAC Only the packets with its source IP address source MAC address and port number matched to the IP MAC binding rules can be processed LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 292 14 5 DoS Defend DoS Denial of Service Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host which incurs an abnormal service or even breakdown of the network With DoS Defend function enabled the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets Upon detecting the packets the switch will discard the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal packets may incur a breakdown of the network The switch can defend several types of DoS attack listed in the following table DoS Attack Type Description Land Attack The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the Host the Host will be trapped in an endless circle for building the initial connection The performan
69. Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack VPN Up link ports Select the desired port as the VPN Up link port Anos If VPN mode is enabled please create VLAN Mapping entries on the VLAN Mapping function page 7 7 2 Port Enable On this page you can enable the port for the VLAN Mapping function Only the port is enabled can the configured VLAN Mapping function take effect 83 VPN Port Enable UNIT 1 121847861187 h10 62 44 ae 18 120 22 241 26 BRA ESJ EZAR RY RY RY RAR BYR 26 25 ES Unselected Port s Ey Selected Port s e Not Available for Selection gt VPN Port Enable UNIT Select your desired port for VLAN Mapping function All the ports are disabled for VLAN Mapping function by default Figure 7 13 Enable Port for VLAN Mapping Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 7 7 3 VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping function allows the VLAN TAG of the packets to be replaced with the new VLAN TAG according to the VLAN Mapping entries And these packets can be forwarded in the new VLAN If VLAN VPN function is enabled a received packet already carrying a VLAN tag will be tagged basing on the VLAN Mapping entries and becomes a double tagged packet to be forwarded in the new VLAN Choose the menu VLAN VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping to load the following page Global Config VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping Config Port C VLAN SP VLAN Name VLAN Mapping List Select Port
70. Sener nestins raa a nia 301 Chapter 15 SNMP ooococcccccononononccncnnnccnconnnnncncnnnn nn eee eaaeaeeeeeeeeesaceaaeeseeeeeeesesecneeaeeeseeeeeeeenieaeeeeeeeeees 303 15 1 SNMP CON A ON 305 151 1 Globa Config en ee e A ee ek ni edn EN die ign ees Won 305 1512 NAP WCW eyed e e 306 19 153 SNMP GOUD Make eee A A a et anaes 306 15 14 SNMP USET ia ida 308 15 1 5 SNMP COMMUNIY ee a a a e e K A ebia 310 15 20 Notifica NA ee A ifs 312 15 3 RMON os nd a ias 313 15 321 StatiStiCs iisen eo aed ntededetoecd vad dental raver ate ea 314 A ates EEE E tal debeeetd T 315 A E E 316 15 34 Alar sated A ei E a E 316 Chapter 16 LLDP anciana pest ae atarna aranais 319 161 Basic CONfiGintccnctee Al 322 161 1 Global Conti all il rial tienda Sheen 322 10 12 POCO da 323 16 2 DEVICE bc 324 10 2 Local MATO iaa A lid ia 324 16 2 2 Neighbor Intoi c nine dcp e Wan Gag ie eee IA 326 16 3 Device Statistics Nai ee a Baan tease a eels 327 TOA ELDP MED eta il Ae 328 16 41 Global Co atrio A ae oe EEE 329 164 2 Ponto Mitad et ee a he 330 1643 Local MO ii A ASS 332 16 4 4 Neighbor INO cion cir ri aer beta 333 Chapter TF ClUISte ica a e e Pendens 335 A A A octane E cath 336 1711 Neighbor Into irrien oirir aeea E EE EAA EEE EAA 336 17 12 NDP2SUMMARY iari ot e e ote aN on e a aaah 337 AAs A A Aaa 338 A ETA E E E E contend Set tas 339 17 2 1 DEVICE Table ica iia 339 10 22 22 INT DP SUMMARY svi cits e ne ee e E A eee ee S 341 172 3 SIN
71. Static Multicast IP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Enter static multicast IP address VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast IP Forward Port Select the forward port of the multicast group UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack gt Search Option Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly e All Displays all static multicast IP entries e Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry e Forward Port Enter the port number the desired entry must carry gt Static Multicast IP Table 130 Multicast IP Displays the multicast IP VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Forward Port Displays the forward port of the multicast group 9 4 Multicast Filter When IGMP Snooping is enabled you can specified the multicast IP range the ports can join so as to restrict users ordering multicast programs via configuring multicast filter rules When applying for a multicast group the host will send IGMP report message After receiving the report message the switch will firstly check the multicast filter rules configured for the receiving port If the port can be added to the multicast group it will be added to the multicast address table if the port can not be a
72. TX amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW D vo Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW Tr 4104 Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW m 110 5 Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY YP VA LA PS FS PW M 106 TX amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY YP VA LA PS FS PW D uo TX amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY YP VA LA PS FS PW m 1 08 TxRRX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY YP VA LA PS FS PW F 109 TX amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW m 1 0 10 TxGRx Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW Tr 11011 Tx amp RX Disable PD 5C SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW 1 0 12 Tx amp Rx Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW m 1 0413 Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW Tr 1 014 Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW m 110 15 Tx amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW Al TLY Abbreviation PD Port Description SC System Capabilities SD System Description SN System Name SA Management Address PY Port YLAN ID YP Port And Protocol VLAN ID YA VLAN Name LA Link Aggregation PS MACIPHY Configuration Status FS Max Frame Size Pwy Power Via MDI Figure 16 2 Port Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired entry for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number to be configured Admin Status Configure the ports L
73. The valid values are Static RIP and other OSPF processes This option enables or disables the redistribution for the selected source protocol Set the metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 and the default is equal to Default Metric configured on Basic page 194 Metric Type Tag NSSA Only Set the OSPF metric type of redistributed routes The default is External Type 2 Set the tag field in routes redistributed The valid value ranges from 0 to 4294967295 and the default is 0 Set whether or not to limit redistributed routes to NSSA areas The default is Disable 10 9 9 ASBR Aggregation You can configure address ranges for an ASBR on this page The address range is used to consolidate or summarize routes for external routes at an autonomous boundary The result is that a single summarized external route is redistributed to OSPF domain by the ASBR Choose the menu Routing OSPF ASBR Aggregation to load the following page ASBR Aggregation Config Process ID IP Address Subnet Mask Tag NSSA Only Advertise ASBR Aggregation Table Process Select IP Address O v Format 192 168 0 0 Format 255 255 0 0 Apply A Optional Range 0 4294967295 Disable vl Enable xj Subnet Mask Tag NSSA Only Advertise L ISi IAN a No entry in the table Figure10 53 ASBR Aggregation The following entries are
74. The Circuit ID is defined to be the number and VLAN of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Relay device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients Furthermore these two parameters also can be manually configured The format of Option 82 defined on the switch by default is given in the following figure The numbers in parentheses indicate the size of each field in octets By default sub option1 is Circuit ID option recording the VLAN and ethernet port information while sub option2 is Remote ID option recording the MAC address information of the client You can define the sub options manually option82 Length 1 soporto tena vean ron gt sub option1 1 Length 1 Hardware address 6 Figure10 16 Option 82 Anote The option 82 parameters configured on the switch should base on and meet the requirement of the network The DHCP Relay allowing the clients to get the IP address from the server in another subnet is implemented on the DHCP Relay page When the DHCP Server is enabled the DHCP Relay will be enabled too 10 5 1 Global Config This page allows you to enable the DHCP Relay function Choose the menu Routing DHCP Relay Global Config to load the following page 152 Option 82 Configuration Option 82 Support Enable Disable Existed Option 82 field Keep Customizati O E ES Disabl Zeek ustomization nabile isable
75. The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config LLDP gt Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Fast Start Count 16 1 2 Port Config Choose to enable disable LLDP This parameter indicates the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted on behalf of this LLDP agent This parameter is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL Time To Live value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval This parameter indicates the delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions This parameter indicates the amount of delay from LLDP becomes disable until re initialization will be attempted Configure the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local device to network management system When the port s LLDP state transforms from Disable or Rx_Only to Tx amp Rx or Tx_Only the fast start mechanism will be enabled that is the transmit interval will be shorten to a second and multiple LLDP frames will be sent out with the duration based on this parameter On this page you can configure all ports LLDP parameters Choose the menu LLDP gt Basic Config Port Config to load the following page 323 Port Config UNIT 1 Select Port Admin Status Notification Mode Included TL s Tr A JAJA ERAMANA m 10 1 TX amp RX Disable PD SC SD SN SA PY VP VA LA PS FS PW D vo
76. The neighbor numbers of this interface DR Address The designated router on the selected PIM interface 11 3 2 PIM DM Neighbor PIM DM neighbor is automatically learned by sending and receiving Hello Packets when PIM DM is enabled Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM DM PIM DM neighbor to load the following page Search Option Search Option ALL i PIM DM Neighbor Interface Neighbor Uptime Expires No entry in the table Total PIM DM neighbor 0 Figure 11 14 PIM DM neighbor The following entries are displayed on this screen gt PIM DM Interface Config The L3 interfaces can be configured as PIM DM mode by this page Search Option e ALL Displays all entries e Interface Vian Select Interface and enter the interface ID of your desired entry e Neighbor Select Neighbor and enter the neighbor address of your desired entry e Interface Routed Port Select the routed port the desired entry must carry gt PIM DM Neighbor Interface The physical interface on which PIM DM is enabled 230 Neighbor The IP address of the PIM neighbor for which this entry contains information Uptime The time since the PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local switch Expires The time remaining before the PIM neighbor will be aged out 11 4 PIM SM PIM DM uses the flood and prune mode to create the SPT for transferring multicast data Although SPT has the short path its building up process is of low ef
77. This module is used to configure spanning tree function of the switch Here mainly introduces e STP Config Configure and view the global settings of spanning tree function e Port Config Configure CIST parameters of ports e MSTP Instance Configure MSTP instances e STP Security Configure protection function to prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features Chapter 9 Multicast This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch Here mainly introduces e IGMP Snooping Configure global parameters of IGMP Snooping function port properties VLAN and multicast VLAN e Multicast IP Configure multicast IP table e Multicast Filter Configure multicast filter feature to restrict users ordering multicast programs e Packet Statistics View the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch which facilitates you to monitor the IGMP messages in the network e Querier Configure the switch to act as an IGMP Snooping Querier Chapter 10 Routing The module is used to configure several IPv4 unicast routing protocols Here mainly introduces e Interface Configure and view different types of interfaces VLAN loopback and routed port e Routing table Displays the routing information summary e Static Routing Configure and view static routes e DHCP Server Configure the DHCP feature to assign IP parameters to specified devices e DHCP Relay Configure the DHCP relay feature e Prox
78. Type of the MAC address Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address 1 If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct or the connected port or the device has been changed the switch can not be forward the packets correctly Please reset the static address entry appropriately 2 Ifthe MAC address of a device has been added to the Static Address Table connecting the device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch Therefore please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid 3 The MAC address in the Static Address Table can not be added to the Filtering Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 4 This static MAC address bound function is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled 6 4 3 Dynamic Address The dynamic address can be generated by the auto learning mechanism of the switch The Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto learning or the MAC address aging out mechanism To fully utilize the MAC address table which has a limited capacity the switch adopts an aging mechanism for updating the table That is the switch removes the MAC address entries related to a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time On this page you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address gt Dynamic Address to load the following page 62 Aging
79. UNIT 1 Select Port Port Mode Security Mode Member State LAG F v v dl 11011 Auto Disable Inactive s O 110 2 Auto Disable Inactive F 11073 Auto Disable Inactive dl 1 0 4 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 5 Auto Disable Inactive F 1 0 6 Auto Disable Inactive O 11017 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 8 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 9 Auto Disable Inactive E O 1 0 10 Auto Disable Inactive O 110 11 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 12 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 13 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 14 Auto Disable Inactive O 1 0 15 Auto Disable Inactive v Al Figure 12 13 Port Config Anote To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port please ensure its member state accords with its port mode If a port is a member port of voice VLAN changing its port mode to be Auto will make the port leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice streams The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch 258 Port Mode Security Mode Member State LAG 12 3 3 OUI Config Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN e Auto In this mode the switch automatically adds a port to the voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLAN by checking whether the po
80. VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Private VLANs configure the port type of Port5 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 and click the Apply button Configure the port type of Port6 and Port7 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 3 and click the Apply button 94 e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Create Private Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page VLANs enter the Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 select one type of secondary VLAN and then click the Create button 2 Add Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Promiscuous configure the port type of Port8 as Promiscuous enter Primary port to Private VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Apply button VLANs 3 Add Host port to Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Private VLANs configure the port type of Port9 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 and click the Apply button Configure the port type of Porti0 and Porti1 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Apply button Return to CONTENTS 95 Chapter 8 Spanning Tree STP Spanning Tree Protocol subject to IEEE 802 1D standard is to disbranch a ring network in the Data Link layer in a local network Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block ports by exchanging information in that way a ring netw
81. WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC7 is in the SP group TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6 is 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC7 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Equ Mode Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration including three submenus DiffServ Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN 247 12 1 DiffServ This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP and supports four queue scheduling algorithms The port priorities are labeled as CoSO CoS1 CoS7 The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority Schedule Mode 802 1P Priority and DSCP Priority pages 12 1 1 Port Priority On this page you can configure the port priority Choose the menu QoS DiffServ Port Priority to load the following page Port Priority Config UNIT 1 Select Port Priority LAG O v O 1 01 coso 4 O 110 2 coso O 1 0
82. With TC protect function enabled if the account number of the received TC BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field the switch will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle Such a mechanism prevents the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries gt BPDU Protect Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly transit their states When these ports receive BPDUs the system automatically configures these ports as non edge ports and regenerates spanning trees which may cause network topology jitter Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs but if a user maliciously attacks the switch by sending BPDUs network topology jitter occurs To prevent this attack MSTP provides BPDU protect function With this function enabled on the switch the switch shuts down the edge ports MTSP function and sets their status as blocking if they receive BPDU packets These edge ports will restore to their previous status if they do not receive BPDU packets for 60 seconds gt BPDU Filter BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network If a switch receives malicious BPDUs it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network which may result in spanning trees being continuously regenerated In this case the switch occupying too much CPU or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong With BPDU filter function enabled a port does no
83. a general multicast routing table 224 e The multicast forwarding table is used to control the forwarding of the multicast packets directly The multicast routing table consists of a group of S G entries and S G route represents routing information from source S to group G If the router supports multiple multicast routing protocols its multicast routing table will contain multicast routes generated from multiple protocols The router will chose the optimal multicast route according to multicast routing and forwarding strategy and send it to the multicast forwarding table The multicast routing protocol uses the RPF mechanism to establish the multicast routing entries thus to guarantee the multicast data being transferred in the correct path gt RPF Mechanism PIM uses the unicast routing table to perform the RPF check RPF mechanism ensures the multicast packets being forwarded correctly according to the multicast routing configuration and avoids loops causing by various reasons 1 RPF Check The RPF check relies on unicast route or static multicast route The unicast routing table aggregates the shortest paths to each destination network segments and the static multicast routing table lists specified static RPF routing entries configured by the user manually Instead of maintaining certain unicast routing independently the multicast routing protocol relies on the current unicast routing information or static multicast ro
84. access control devices With the 802 1X protocol enabled a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authentication whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN gt Architecture of 802 1X Authentication 802 1X adopts a client server architecture with three entities a supplicant system an authenticator system and an authentication server system as shown in the following figure 294 1 2 3 gt LAN WLAN Authenticator System Authentication Server System Figure 14 19 Architecture of 802 1X authentication Supplicant System The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the authenticator system The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer An 802 1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the supplicant system Note that the client program must support the 802 1X authentication protocol Authenticator System The authenticator system is usually an 802 1X supported network device such as this TP LINK switch lt provides the physical or logical port for the supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system Authentication Server System The authentication server system is an entity that provides authentication service to the authenticator system Normally in the form of a RADIUS server Authentication Server can store user information and serve to perform authentication
85. address for specific clients 10 5 DHCP Relay gt Application Environment of DHCP Relay In DHCP model DHCP clients broadcast its DHCP request so the DHCP sever and clients must be on the same subnet which require the DHCP server is available in every subnet It is costly to build so much DHCP Server DHCP relay agent solves the problem Via a relay agent DHCP clients request an IP address from the DHCP server in another subnet and DHCP clients in different subnets can share the same DHCP server in the internet 150 gt Details of DHCP Relay on T3700G 28TQ A typical application of T3700G 28TQ working at DHCP Relay function is shown below It can be altered to meet the network requirement Switch DHCP Server area T3700 28TQ DHCP Relay LAN1 Public LAN2 Figure 10 14 DHCP Relay Application To allow all clients in different VLAN request IP address from one server successfully the DHCP Relay function can transmit the DHCP packet between clients and server in different VLANs and all clients in different VLANs can share one DHCP Server e When receiving DHCP DISCOVER and DHCP REQUEST packets the switch will fill the giaddr field with the interface IP of the receiving port optionally insert the option 82 information and then forward the packet to the server e When receiving DHCP OFFER and DHCP REQUEST packets from the server the switch will delete the option 82 information and forward the p
86. administrative core in the PIM SM It collects the Advertisement Messages sent from the C RP Candidate RP in the network and selects certain C RP information to compose a RP Set which is the mapping relationship database between the multicast group and the RP The RP Set is published to the whole PIM SM domain and all the routers including DR can calculate the required RP location according to the information offered by the RP Set In a PIM SM domain or administrative domain there is only one BSR for more details about BSR administrative domain please refer to BSR Adminsitrative Domain and several C BSRs Candidate BSR Once the BSR fails a new BSR will be elected among the other C BSRs to avoid business disruption Similarly several C RPs can be configured in one PIM SM domain and each multicast group s corresponding RP can be calculated through the BSR mechanism The location of RP and BSR in the network is shown below weseeeeeenenee gt BSR message conan Advertisement message Figure 11 16 The Locations of C RP C BSR and BSR 233 gt RPT Building Source gt RPT Server earn Join message gt Multicast packets Ed HOST B Figure 11 17 RPT Topology in PIM SM As shown in Figure 11 17 the establishing process of RPT is illustrated below 1 When a receiver joins a multicast group G it informs the directly connected DR with IGMP message 2 After receiving the IGMP m
87. and authorization To ensure a stable authentication system an alternate authentication server can be specified If the main authentication server is in trouble the alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service The Mechanism of an 802 1X Authentication System IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol to exchange information between the supplicant system and the authentication server 1 2 3 gt EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR EAP over RADIUS packets or be terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with RADIUS servers through PAP Password Authentication Protocol or CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol protocol packets When a supplicant system passes the authentication the authentication server passes the information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system The authenticator system in turn determines the state authorized or unauthorized of the controlled port according to the instructions accept or reject received from the RADIUS server 802 1X Authentication Procedure An 802 1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant system or authenticator syst
88. attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default Disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets Default value is Disable MTU mismatch detection is enabled To prevent outgoing link state advertisements LSAs flooding out of an OSPF interface The default is Disable all outgoing LSAs are flooded out of the interface Displays the authentication type of the interface One of the following e default The authentication type is same with the associated area s authentication type e null No authentication e simple Use simple password e md5 Use md5 message digest algorithm Displays the active authentication key ID of the interface Displays the active authentication key of the interface Displays the current state of the selected router interface One of the following e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e Loopback In this state the router s interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic However it may still be desirable to gain information on the quality of this interface either through sending ICMP p
89. c d IP Address Format 192 168 0 0 Apply Subnet Mask Format 255 255 0 0 Cost j Optional Range 1 16777214 Advertise Enable Area Aggregation Table Process Select Area ID IP Address Subnet Mask Cost Advertise O No entry in the table Figure10 50 OSPF Area Aggregation The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Area Aggregation Config Process ID Area ID IP Address Subnet Mask Cost Advertise gt Area Aggregation Table Process Area ID Select IP Address Subnet Mask Cost Advertise 10 9 7 Virtual Link Select the desired OSPF process for configuration The 32 bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies the area It can be in decimal format or dotted decimal format The IP address of the address range The subnet mask of the address range Specify the path cost to the address range If not specified it will be dynamic calculated by OSPF The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 Set whether or not the area address range will be advertised outside the area via a Network Summary LSA The default is Enable Select one OSPF Process to display its address range list Displays the area to which the address range belongs Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional Displays the IP address of the address range Displays the subnet mask of the address range Displays the path cost to the address range and it can be modified
90. can view the current time ranges Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Time Range Summary to load the following page Time Range Table Select Index Time Range Name Slice 1 Slice 2 Slice 3 Slice 4 Mode Operation No entry in the table Can oetete _ Heip J Figure 13 1 Time Range Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Range Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time range Index Displays the index of the time range Time Range Name Displays the name of the time range Slice Displays the time slice of the time range Mode Displays the mode the time range adopts Operation Click the Edit button to modify the time range Click the Detail button to display the complete information of this time range 261 13 1 2 Time Range Create On this page you can create time ranges Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Time Range Create to load the following page Create Time Range Name i O Holiday O Absolute Start Date 2000 01 01 End Date 2000 01 01 O Week Mon Tue Wed L Thu Fri Sat L Sun Create Time Slice Start Time 00 vw 00 v End Time 24 W Time Slice Table Index Start Time End Time Delete Figure 13 2 Time Range Create Manote To successfully configure time ranges please firstly specify time slices and then time ranges The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Time Range Name Enter the
91. complete Layer 2 separation from all other ports within the same private VLAN except for the promiscuous ports Private VLANS block all traffic to isolated ports except traffic from promiscuous ports Traffic received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports e Community port Community ports communicate among themselves and with the promiscuous ports These interfaces are isolated at Layer 2 from all other interfaces in other communities or isolated ports within their private VLAN Primary VLAN A Private VLAN has one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN Primary VLAN is the user VLAN uplink device can identify but it is not the actual VLAN the end user is in Every port in a private VLAN is a member of the primary VLAN The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic downstream from the promiscuous ports to the host ports and to other promiscuous ports Secondary VLAN Secondary VLAN is the actual VLAN the end user is in Secondary VLANs are associated with a primary VLAN and are used to carry traffic from hosts to uplink devices There are two types of secondary VLANS e Isolated VLAN The VLAN that an isolated port is associated with is called isolated VLAN Each isolated VLAN must bind to a primary VLAN e Community VLAN The VLAN that a community port is associated with is called community VLAN Each community VLAN must bind to a primary VLAN gt Features of Private VLAN 1 A Private VLAN contains one Pri
92. different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority levels Non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode if 8021 1P Priority mode is enabled the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode gt Schedule Mode When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch implements eight scheduling queues ranging from TCO to TC7 TCO has the lowest priority while TC7 has the highest priority The switch provides four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ 1 SP Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty The switch has eight egress queues labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 TC7 In SP mode their priorities increase in order TC7 has the highest priority The disadvantage of SP queue is that if there are packets in the queues with higher priority for a long time in congestion the packets in the queues with lower priority will be starved to death because they are not served 246 Packets are mapped to different priority queues cor wo SOSA preferentially Packets sent via this interface i i forwarded Pi a Colataf of od yes NN N Egress interface Saa e U E i NS Gia TOCA 3 co o i Pa
93. displayed on this screen gt ASBR Aggregation Config Process ID IP Address Subnet Mask Tag NSSA Only Advertise Select the desired OSPF process for configuration The IP address of the address range The subnet mask of the address range Set the tag field in redistributed address range The valid value ranges from 0 to 4294967295 and the default is O Set whether or not to limit redistributed address range to NSSA areas The default is Disable Set whether or not the address range will be redistributed to OSPF domain via an AS External LSA The default is Enable 195 gt ASBR Aggregation Table Process Select one OSPF Process to display its address range list Select Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional IP Address Displays the IP address of the address range Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the address range Tag Displays the tag value in redistributed address range and it can be modified NSSA Only Displays the NSSA Only parameter and it can be modified Advertise Displays the Advertise parameter and it can be modified 10 9 10Neighbor Table Choose the menu Routing OSPF Neighbor Table to load the following page Neighbor Table Router State Events Retransmission Interface Neighbor IP Address Router ID Area ID Options Priority Queue lenath Dead Time No entry in the table Figure10 54 Neighbor Table The following entries are displayed on this scr
94. duplicating process only takes place at the branching point of the distributing tree and this process automatically repeats until the packets arrives at the final receivers The work process of PIM SM can be generalized below Neighbor Discovering DR Electing RP Discovering RPT Building Multicast Source Registering Switching from RPT to SPT 231 e Asserting gt Neighbor Discovering The neighbor discovering mechanism of PIM SM and PIM DM is the same for more details refer to Neighbor Discovering gt DR Electing The DR Designated Router in the shared network is elected through the Hello message and works as the exclusive router to forward multicast data in this shared network Whether the network connects to the multicast source or the network connects to the receivers the DR must be elected if the network is a shared one The DR is responsible for sending join message to the RP in the receiver side and sending register message to the RP in the multicast source side Mote e The DR is elected between the multiple routers of the network segment by comparing the priorities and IP addresses carried in Hello packets The elected DR has practical meaning in PIM SM with PIM DM operation the DR has meaning only if IGMPv1 is in use the elected DR functions as the IGMP querier on account that IGMPv1 does not have an IGMP querier election process e The device working as DR should be enabled with the IGMP function otherwise
95. entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted Status Select Enable Disable the Port Security feature for the port Ans 1 The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member Only the port is removed from the LAG will the Port Security function be available for the port 2 The Port Security function is disabled when the 802 1X function is enabled 6 1 4 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist Choose the menu Switching Port Port Isolation to load the following page Port Isolation List UNIT 3 Port Forward Portlist 3 0 1 3 0 1 26 A 3 0 2 3 0 1 26 3 0 3 3 0 1 26 3 0 4 3 0 1 26 3 0 5 3 0 1 26 3 3 0 6 3 0 1 26 3 0 7 3 0 1 26 3 0 8 3 0 1 26 3 0 9 3 0 1 26 3 0 10 3 0 1 26 3 0 11 3 0 1 26 y ME Figure 6 5 Port Isolation Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Isolation List UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Port Display the port number Forward Portlist Display the forward list Click the Edit button to configure the port isolation list in the following page 49 gt Port Isolation Config Port UNIT 3 291018 Fo 42 64 he 18 20 122 24 28 kaJ baJ SJ CZJ 62 RY RARI RARA e 25 Forward Portlist UNIT 3 9111012 Ao 62 644 6 48 20
96. fake ARP packets of Host B with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host A 2 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host B Attacker IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 14 13 Man In The Middle Attack Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another through a switch Host A IP address is 192 168 0 101 MAC address is 00 00 00 11 11 11 Host B IP address is 192 168 0 102 MAC address is 00 00 00 22 22 22 Attacker IP address is 192 168 0 103 MAC address is 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 First the attacker sends the false ARP response packets 2 Upon receiving the ARP response packets Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their own 3 When Host A communicates with Host B it will send the packets to the false destination MAC address i e to the attacker according to the updated ARP table 4 After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B the attacker processes and forwards the packets to the correct destination MAC address which makes Host A and Host B keep a normal appearing communication 5 The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table In the view of Host A and Host B their packets are directly sent to each other But in fact there is a Man In The Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure T
97. feature is enabled for one or more ports you are suggested to disable the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally 12 2 2 Storm Control Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth the packets will be automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwidth Control Storm Control to load the following page Storm Control Config UNIT 1 Select Port Broadcast 1 10000000Kbps Multicast 1 10000000Kbps UL Frame 1 10000000Kbps LAG 1 041 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 11017 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 01 0 1 0 11 1 0 12 OOOOOO0O0000000 Note a a Es Al For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rate control atthe same time Figure 12 11 Storm Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Storm Control Config UNIT Select Port Broadcast Rate Multicast Rate Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for Storm Control configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Select the bandwidth for receiving broadcast packets on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the broadcast control function for the port Select the bandwidth for receiving m
98. format of port number should be Unit Number Slot Number Port Number Among them 1 Unit Number The default unit number of the switch is 1 If a device has joined stack system the unit number which the device possesses in the stack system will be kept using as its unit number after the device leaves the stack system 2 Slot Number Indicates the number of the slot the interface card is in For T3700G 28TQ the front panel ports belong to slot 0 Slot number starting from 1 each represents an interface card slot 3 Physical Port Number The physical port number on the switch which can be obtained through the front panel of the switch For instance Port number 2 0 3 indicates the physical port3 on the switch whose unit number is 2 Configuration Files Application Rules It includes global configuration and interface configuration two parts 1 The global configurations of all stack members are the same Besides each member device keeps pace with the global configuration of the master device which enables the stack system to work just like a single entity in the network The stack system adopts the following methods to ensure the synchronization of global configuration files When the stack initializes the master device will compare the configuration files of each stack member and reconfigure the device whose global configuration is different from its own so as to ensure the global configuration of the stack members are exactly th
99. group is increased When the router interface connecting the uplink fails the backup group cannot recognize uplink breakdown If this router is in Master state hosts in the LAN cannot visit external network This problem can be solved with the help of interface tracking function When the interface connecting the uplink is down the router will automatically lower its priority making priority of other routers in the backup group higher than its priority value As a result the backup router with the highest priority becomes master Load Balancing One router can work in more than one backup group which makes it possible that a router can be master router in one backup group and backup router in other backup groups Load balancing means multiple routers undertake workloads simultaneously Therefore two or more backup groups are needed to realize load balancing Each backup group consists of one master router and several backup routers Master router can vary from one backup group to the others Virtual router 1 Virtual router 2 Virtual router 3 Backup Master Device C Backup Figure 10 57 VRRP Load Balancing 201 A router owns different priority in different backup groups when it participates in multiple VRRP backup groups simultaneously In Figure 10 57 there exist three backup groups e Backup Group 1 corresponding to Virtual Router 1 Device A is the master router Device B and C are backup routers e Backup
100. information of the corresponding VLAN VLAN of Port 1 0 1 VLAN ID 1 Name Operation System VLAN Remove Back Figure 7 6 View the Current VLAN of Port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN of Port VLAN ID VLAN Name Operation Configuration Procedure Displays the ID number of VLAN Displays the user defined description of VLAN Allows you to remove the port from the current VLAN Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Edit Detail button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN 71 Step Operation Description Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 7 2 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch Ais connecting to PC A and Server B e Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A e PCA and Server Ais in the same VLAN e PCB an
101. is enabled Figure 9 6 VLAN Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Router Ports UNIT VLAN Table Select VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP Snooping for the desired VLAN Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more Specify the aging time of the member port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups Enter the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration It is multi optional Displays the VLAN ID Displays the router port time of the VLAN Displays the member port time of the VLAN 122 Leave Time Displays the leave time of the VLAN Static Router Ports Displays the static router ports of the VLAN Dynamic Router Displays the dynamic router ports of the VLAN Ports Anote The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabl
102. less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Return to CONTENTS 385
103. location of the DHCP server 0 DHCP server the location of the network element believed to be closest to the client 1 Switch or the location of the client 2 LLDP MED Endpoint Option 2 should be used but may not be known Options 0 and 1 should not be used unless it is known that the DHCP client is in close physical proximity to the server or network element 331 e Country Code The two letters ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters e g CN or US e Language Province State etc a part of civic address 16 4 3 Local Info On this page you can see all ports LLDP MED configuration Choose the menu LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Local Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 LLDP MED Local Info UNIT 1 ara Fro aa aa Fs 0 Ba a 26 RRS RARAN fet 23 125 la Unselected Port s E Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Port 1 0 1 Local Interface 1 0 11 Device Type Network Connectivity Application Type Reserved Unknown Policy Flag Yes VLAN tagged No Media Policy VLAN ID 0 Media Policy Layer 2 Priority Media Policy DSCP 0 Figure 16 9 LLDP MED Local Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Specify the auto refresh rate gt Local MED Local Info Select the desired port to disp
104. monitoring and troubleshooting the network Choose the menu Switching Port Port Mirror to load the following page Mirror Session List Session Destination Mode Ingress Only 1 Egress Only Both Ingress Only 2 Egress Only Both Ingress Only 3 Egress Only Both Ingress Only 4 Egress Only Both Figure 6 2 Mirror Session List 45 Source Operation Edit Clear Edit Clear Edit Clear Edit Clear The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Mirror Session List Session This column displays the mirror session number Destination This column displays the mirroring port Mode This column displays the mirror mode Source This column displays the mirrored ports Operation You can configure the mirror session by clicking the Edit or clear the mirror session configuration by clicking the Clear Click Edit button to modify the settings of the corresponding session in the following page Click Clear button to clear the configuration of the corresponding session Mirror Session Session Destination Port Destination Port Format 1 0 1 UNIT 3 eaea e LUES IPS IL Ls JE als loka Es ES Unselected Port s C Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Source Port UNIT 3 Select Port Ingress Egress LAG O v v O 3 04 Disable Disable A O 302 Disable Disable O 3 0 3 Disable Disable O 3 0 4 Disable Disab
105. of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Displays the port medium 44 E Description Give a description to the port for identification Status Allows you to Enable Disable the port When Enable is selected the port can forward the packets normally Speed Select the Speed mode for the port The device connected to the switch should be in the same Speed and Duplex mode with the switch When Auto is selected the Speed mode will be determined by auto negotiation Duplex Select the Duplex mode for the port When Auto is selected the Duplex mode will be determined by auto negotiation Flow Control Allows you to Enable Disable the Flow Control feature When Flow Control is enabled the switch can synchronize the speed with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Ano 1 The switch can not be managed through the disabled port Please enable the port which is used to manage the switch 2 The parameters of the port members in a LAG should be set as the same 6 1 2 Port Mirror Port Mirror the packets obtaining technology functions to forward copies of packets from one multiple ports mirrored port to a specific port mirroring port Usually the mirroring port is connected to a data diagnose device which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for
106. port s LLDP MED status e Enable Enable the port s LLDP MED status and the port s Admin Status will be changed to Tx amp Rx e Disable Disable the port s LLDP MED status Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU Click the Detail button to display the included TLVs and select the desired TLVs 330 Included TL s M Network Policy Location Identification M Extended Power Via MDI Inventory M all Location Identification Parameters Emergency Number Chars 10 25 M Civic Address What Switch y Country Code CNChina Defaul Language Province State CountyParishiDistrict CidiTownship Street House Number Name Postal Zip Code Room Number Post Office Box Additional Information Figure 16 8 Configure TLVs of LLDP MED Port Included TLVs Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU Location Identification Parameters Configure the Location Identification TLV s content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port Emergency Emergency number is Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier Number which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP Civic Address The Civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub fields of the DHCP option for Civic Address based Location Configuration Information as specified by IETF e What This element describes which location the DHCP entry refers to Currently three options are defined the
107. requirement DHCP Server T3700G 28TQ DHCP Client 1 DHCP Client 2 DHCP Client 3 Figure 10 8 DHCP Server Application To guarantee the process of assigning IP address fluency and in safety and to keep the network run steadily the DHCP Server function on T3700G 28TQ performs the following tasks e Create different IP pool for every VLAN The device in different VLAN can get the IP address in different subnet e When receiving a DHCP DISCOVER packet from the client the switch judges the VLAN which the ingress port belong to and chooses the IP in the same subnet with the VLAN interface to assign to the client 144 e With a DHCP Relay running between the client and the server when receiving a DHCP DISCOVER packet transmitting from the Relay the switch will choose the IP from the IP pool in the same subnet with the Relay s IP to assign to the client If the IP pool is not configured on the switch or the configured IP pool doesn t match the Relay s network segment the client may not get network parameters successfully e The switch can detect the IP address automatically before assigning it to avoid conflict gt IP Detection To avoid IP conflict the switch will detect the IP address to be assigned in LAN through Ping test The DHCP server will send the Ping test packet with the destination IP being the IP address to be assigned If the server receives the Reply packet from the destination host in the ping time it means tha
108. screen gt Search Option Select ACL Select the ACL you have created ACL Type Displays the type of the ACL you select Rule Order Displays the rule order of the ACL you select gt Rule Table Here you can view the information about the ACL rule you select 13 2 2 ACL Create On this page you can create ACLs Choose the menu ACL ACL Config ACL Create to load the following page Create ACL ACLID 0 499 MAC ACL 500 1499 Standard IP ACL 1500 2499 Extend IP ACL Rule Order User Config Figure 13 5 ACL Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create ACL ACL ID Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create Rule Order User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL 264 13 2 3 MAC ACL MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source MAC addresses destination MAC addresses and EtherType carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config MAC ACL to load the following page Create MAC Rule ACL ID MAC ACL v Rule ID 0 999 Operation Permit v O s mac Mask Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 O D MAC Mask O EtherType 4 hex number User Priority No Limit y Time Range No Limit x Figure 13 6 Create MAC Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create MAC Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation S MAC D MAC MASK EtherTy
109. select a schedule mode 12 1 2 Schedule Mode On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set On this switch the priority levels are labeled as TCO TC1 TC3 Choose the menu QoS DiffServ Schedule Mode to load the following page Schedule Mode Config Schedule Mode Equ Mode v Figure 12 7 Schedule Mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Schedule Mode Config SP Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty WRR Mode Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue The weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 to TC7 is 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 249 SP WRR Mode Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling groups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC7 is in the SP group TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6
110. standard and then establish a uniform routing table 2 Virtual Link Table 10 2 Router Types In practice some physical restrictions might keep ABR of some areas from directly connecting to the backbone area which can be solved by configuring an OSPF virtual link Virtual link sketch is shown as below 172 Figure 10 35 Virtual Link Sketch As in Figure 10 35 ABR of Area 2 has no physical link to connect directly with the backbone area in which case Area 2 could not communicate with others without configuring a virtual link Then a virtual link between ABR1 and ABR2 passing through Area 1 could provide a logical link for Area 2 to connect with the backbone area A virtual link is a point to point connection between two ABRs Hence simply configuring the virtual link parameters on two ordinary router interfaces makes two ends of the virtual link Two ABR directly forward the OSPF packets to each other s interface IP address while the OSPF routers between them transmit these packets as regular IP packets In general configuring a virtual link is a temporary means to fix the problems of network topology which usually would to certain degree complicate the network Therefore when networking in reality a virtual link should be avoided if possible 3 Route Types OSPF prioritize routes into four levels 1 Intra area route 2 Inter area route 3 Type 1 external route It has high credibility and its cost is c
111. such as DHCP Server VRRP and ARP Proxy which enable your network to meet the more extended applications e Physical Stacking Technology True Physical Stacking technology supports up to 8 units physical stacking Whole stacking system can provides up to 8 128Gbps Switching Capacity Supports distributed Link Aggregation for active active connections e Removable Power Supply Module and RPS Removable design Power Supply Module enables easily power change when it encounters failure Hot swappable Redundant Power Supply RPS minimizes downtime letting your system really enjoy the uninterrupted operation e Resiliency and Availability Link aggregation LACP increases aggregated bandwidth optimizing the transport of business critical data IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree provides high link availability in multiple VLAN environments Multicast snooping automatically prevents flooding of IP multicast traffic Root Guard protects root bridge from malicious attack or configuration mistakes Stack technology provides redundant links across the switch stack e Layer 2 Switching GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol allows automatic learning and dynamic assignment of VLANs Supports up to 4K VLANs simultaneously out of 4K VLAN IDs e Quality of Service Supports L2 L3 granular CoS with 8 priority queues per port Rate limiting confines the traffic flow accurately according to the preset value e Se
112. that the Radius server is being searched 379 Connecting Searching the RADIUS server Figure C 14 Authentication Dialog 4 When passing the authentication the following screen will appear Connecting Successfully authenticated Network is connected Figure C 15 Successfully Authenticated 5 Double click the icon on the right corner of desktop and then the following connection status screen will pop up Connection status Connection Status Connected Duration 00 00 26 Activities Received Ta Sent 5 4 closeco_ Figure C 16 Connection Status 1 4 FAQ Q1 Why does this error dialog box pop up when starting up the TP LINK 802 1X Client Software TpSupplicant English exe Unable To Locate Component 7 x x This application has Failed to start because wpcap dll was not found Re installing the application may Fix this problem 380 A1 It s because the supported DLL file is missing You are suggested to go to http Awww winpcap org to download WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version for installation and run the client software again Q2 Is this TP LINK 802 1X Client Software compliable with the switches of the other manufacturers A2 No This TP LINK 802 1X Client Software is customized for TP LINK switches Q3 Is it safe to set the password being automatically saved A3 Yes The password saved in the configuration files is encrypted Return to CONTENTS 381
113. the CD For the installation guide please refer to Appendix C 802 1X Client Software 3 Configure the 802 1X Required By default the global 802 1X function is disabled globally On the Network Security gt 802 1X Global Config page configure the 802 1X function globally 4 Configure the parameters of Required On the Network Security 802 1X Radius the authentication server Server page configure the parameters of the server 5 Configure the 802 1X for the Required On the Network Security 802 1X Port port Config page configure the 802 1X feature for the port of the switch basing on the actual network Return to CONTENTS 302 Chapter 15 SNMP gt SNMP Overview SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol has gained the most extensive application on the UDP IP networks SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical differences of the devices Currently the most network management systems are based on SNMP SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures and too much network resources With SNMP function enabled network administrators can easily monitor the network performance detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices In the meantime they can locate faults promptly and implement the fault diagnosis capacity planning a
114. the bootutil in the hyper terminal please press CTRL B key to enter into bootutil menu shown as Figure 19 6 And PHY Regi gt And PHY R j 2014 TPLINK Jan 17 2014 11 24 43 Boot Menu Print this boot menu and ignore the configuration file addr nop Whe 00 a ation file Download a image file configuration file a the Backup Image file bootutil Enter your choice 0 14 TPLINK Figure 19 6 bootutil Menu As the prompt is displayed for a short time you are suggested not to release the CTRL B key until you enter into bootutil menu after powering on the switch 3 After entering into bootutil menu please firstly configure the IP parameters of the switch Enter 5 and specify the IP address IP mask and gateway in turn 367 For example Configure the IP address as 10 10 70 22 mask as 255 255 255 0 and gateway as10 10 70 1 The detailed steps are shown as the figure below Init network done 4 Configure the parameters of the FTP server which keeps the upgrade firmware and download the firmware to the switch from the FTP server Store the downloaded firmware in the switch with the name of image1 bin or image2 bin and specify its attribute as startup image or backup image Here take the following parameters of the FTP server as an example IP address is 10 10 70 146 the user name for login to the FTP server is 3700 and the password is 123 the name of the upgrade firmware is image bin Store
115. the corresponding group It s multi optional Displays the Group Name here Displays the Security Model of the group Displays the Security Level of the group Displays the Read View name in the entry Displays the Write View name in the entry Displays the Notify View name in the entry Click the Edit button to modify the Views in the entry and click the Modify button to apply Every Group should contain a Read View The default Read View is viewDefault 15 1 4 SNMP User The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software The User and its Group have the same security level and access right You can configure the SNMP User on this page Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP User to load the following page User Config User Name User Type Security Model Auth Mode Privacy Mode User Table Select Note User Name 16 characters maximum Local User vl Group Name v vt v Security Level N 7 Auth Password las characters maximum Privacy Password la 6 characters maximum User Type Group Name Ton Security Level Auth Mode oe Operation No entry in the table al The security model and security level of the user should be the same with that of its group Figure15 6 SNMP User The following entries are displayed on this screen 308 User Config User Name User Type Group Name Security Model Security Level
116. the firmware as image1 bin in the switch The detailed steps are shown as the following figure TPLINK 9 1 get the image file by ftp 2 get the image file hy 0 return xmoderi Enter your choice 0 2 1 wnload file 5361248 bytes O cancel and return Enter your choice 0 2 Specify the attribute of the downloaded image1 bin as startup image tify the attribute of the image file imagel b startup Leite ss done artup Image 368 5 Enter 1 and y the switch will reboot with the startup image TPLINK 1 u sure to OST Te T T T T Lee T T T T Es T R T T N tutil rtup Image g image 1s c to init Fl T3700 2014 01 15 img in imagel bin 6 Please 3 to start the switch shown as the following figure After the switch is started you can login to the CLI command window and manage the switch via CLI command TPLINK 3 2014 01 15 img in imagel bin When you forget the login user name and password you can enter 2 after entering into bootutil menu to reset the system The system will be restored to the factory default settings and the default user name and password for login the web page are both admin 369 Appendix A Specifications Ethernet 10Mbps HD 20Mbps FD Fast Ethernet 100Mbps HD 200Mbps FD Transmission Rate Gigabit Ethernet 2000Mbps FD Ten Gigabit Ethernet 20000Mbps FD 10Base T UTP STP of Cat 3 or above 100Base TX UTP ST
117. the links between the stack system and external devices load distribution and backup can be realized to increase the reliability of the stack system and to simplify dramatically the network topology as Figure 5 1 shows Router Router Link Aggregation Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Figure 5 1 Distributed LACP 33 In a ring connected stack it can still operate normally by transforming into a daisy chained stack when link failure occurs which further ensures the normal operation of load distribution and backup across devices and links as Figure 5 2 shows Switch Switch Switch Switch Load Distribution Backup Across Devices Figure 5 2 Load Distribution and Backup across Devices 3 Network scalability Each member device in the stack system is able to process protocol packets and forward data individually which enables you to increase the port number and bandwidth of the stack system by adding new member devices The users are free to add or remove stack members without affecting the normal running of the stack which enables them to protect the existed resources furthest during network upgrades gt Application Diagram Server Server Server Server Server Server Figure 5 3 Application Diagram 34 gt 1 Stack Introduction Stack Elements 1 Stack Role Each device in the stack system is called stack member Each stack member processes services packe
118. the port on Port Protect page the TC threshold and TC protect cycle need to be configured on this page Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for port protect configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by the role change of the current legal root bridge TC Protect is to prevent the decrease of the performance and stability of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDUs in the STP network BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from being attacked by maliciously created BPDUs BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 111 Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security TC Protect to load the following page TC Protect TC Threshold 20 packet 1 100 Apply TC Protect Cycle 5 sec 1 10 Help Figure 8 11 TC Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt TC Protect TC Threshold Enter a number from 1 to 100 It is the maximum number of the TC BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle The default value is 20 TC Protect Cycle Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cycle The default value is
119. the receivers connected to it would be unable to join the multicast group via this DR Receiver Source in Hello message A Register message A Join message Figure 11 15 DR Elect As shown in Figure 11 15 the DR election process is illustrated below 1 Routers in the shared network sends Hello message carrying DR election priority to each other and the router with the highest priority will be elected as the DR 2 If the routers have the same priorities or at least one route in the network doesn t support carrying the DR election priority in the Hello packet the routers with the highest IP address will be elected as the DR 232 When the DR fails a new DR election process will be triggered if the other routers haven t received the hello packet from the DR before they time out gt RP Discovering RP is the core device in the PIM SM domain In a small network with simple structure the multicast data is so little that merely one RP is enough to forward it In this network an RP can be statically designated among the routers in the PIM SM domain in more circumstances the PIM SM domain is of large scale and the forwarding data for the RP is huge To release the burden of the RP and optimize the RPT topology each multicast group should have its own RP Thus the bootstrapping mechanism is needed to elect the RP dynamically The BSR BootStrap Router should be configured in this mechanism BSR is the
120. the switch Displays the NDP status enabled or disabled for the current port Displays the count of currently sent NDP packets Displays the count of currently received NDP packets Displays the count of currently received error NDP packets Displays the count of the connected neighbors Displays the LAG to which the port belongs Click the Detail button to view the complete information collected for the port Clear NDP packets statistics The button on the bottom can clear all statistics and the clear button in each line can clear the statistics of the port which this line stands for 17 1 3 NDP Config On this page you can configure the NDP function for the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Config to load the following page Global Config NDP Enable Disable Aging Time 180 sec 5 255 default 180 Hello Time 60 _ sec 5 254 default 60 Port Config UNIT 1 E Unselected Port s C Selected Portis ES Not Available for Selection Figure 17 4 NDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 338 gt Global Config NDP Select Enable Disable NDP function globally Aging Time Enter the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch Hello Time Enter the interval to send NDP packets gt Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Selected Port s Select a port will enable NDP function of the port Unselect
121. to Installation Guide gt RPS Input Connector Provides an interface to connect the RPS Redundant Power Supply You can select an RPS RPS150 of TP LINK for example for your switch if needed gt Power Supply Module Slot Provides an interface to install the Power Supply Module An AC Power Supply Module PSM150 AC is provided with the switch With all the protective covers removed and the Interface Card TX432 amp Power Supply Module PSM150 AC inserted the rear panel of T3700G 28TQ is shown as the following figure ee ut Conn O Power Oooo nea De 12 Ore OOOOO 0000000000000000 O Fan COCOON Ta o e 6 P E a 1 o o Elo Como o Tx432 E GLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT psmiso ac OOOO 100 2400 BODE ZSA Figure 2 3 Rear Panel 2 Return to CONTENTS 11 Chapter 3 Login to the Switch 3 1 Login 1 To access the configuration utility open a web browser and type in the default address http 192 168 0 1 in the address field of the browser then press the Enter key Earr Figure 3 1 Web browser Tips To log in to the switch the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of the switch The IP address is 192 168 0 x x is any number from 2 to 254 Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 For the detailed instructions as to how to do this please refer to Appendix B 2 After a moment a login window will appear as shown in Figur
122. to a device or no SFP transceiver is connected An SFP transceiver cable is connected to the On corresponding port and it is connected to a 10Gbps device but no activity A 10Gbps device is connected to the corresponding port 25 26 Flashing 7 and transmitting data An SFP transceiver cable is connected to the Off corresponding port but it is not connected to a device or no SFP transceiver cable is connected LED Status Indication An SFP _ transceiver cable is connected to the On corresponding port of the Interface Card and it is connected to a 10Gbps device but no activity A 10Gbps device is connected to the corresponding port of Pasning the Interface Card and transferring data M1 M2 An SFP transceiver cable is connected to the corresponding port of the Interface Card but it is not Off connected to a device or no SFP transceiver cable is connected to the Interface Card or no Interface Card is connected gt 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 Ports Port 1 24 designed to connect to a device with the bandwidth of 10Mbps 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Each has a corresponding 10 100 1000Mbps LED gt SFP Ports Por 21F 24F designed to install the SFP transceiver These four SFP transceiver slots are shared with the associated RJ45 ports The associated two ports are referred as a Combo port which means they cannot be used simultaneously otherwise only RJ45 port works gt SFP Ports Port
123. to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch The 802 1X client program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the authentication process 2 Upon receiving the authentication request packet the switch sends an EAP Request Identity packet to ask the 802 1X client program for the user name 3 The 802 1X client program responds by sending an EAP Response Identity packet to the switch with the user name included The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS Access Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server 4 Upon receiving the user name from the switch the RADIUS server retrieves the user name finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database encrypts the password using a randomly generated key and sends the key to the switch through an RADIUS Access Challenge packet The switch then sends the key to the 802 1X client program 5 Upon receiving the key encapsulated in an EAP Request MD5 Challenge packet from the switch the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and sends the encrypted password contained in an EAP Response MD5 Challenge packet to the RADIUS server through the switch The encryption is irreversible 296 6 The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password contained in a RADIUS Access Request packet with the locally encrypted password If the two match it will then send feedback
124. versa Return to CONTENTS 318 Chapter 16 LLDP LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area network The advertised information including details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings is represented in TLV Type Length Value format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB Management Information Base making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP An IETF Standard MIB as well as a number of vendor specific MIBs have been created to describe a network s physical topology and associated systems within that topology However there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among stations on the IEEE 802 LAN LLDP protocol specifies a set The device running LLDP can automatically discover and learn about the neighbors allowing for interoperability between the network devices of different vendors This protocol allows two systems running different network layer protocols to learn about each other The LLDP information can be used by SNMP ap
125. you will not be prompted to enter a key If you choose simple or MD5 the key may be up to 16 octets long Split Horizon Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned If you enable split horizon a route will not be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned Poison Reverse If you enable poison reverse a route will be included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned but the metric will be set to infinity 10 8 3 RIP Database On this page you can view the RIP Route Table RIP routing table is independently maintained by RIP It records the routing information generated by RIP which is displayed on this page Choose the menu Routing RIP RIP Database to load the following page 163 RIP Route Table IP Address Mask Entry count 0 Gateway Metric Interface Timer s No entry in the table Figure 10 28 RIP Database The following entries are displayed on this screen gt RIP Route Table IP Address Mask Gateway Metric Interface Timer The destination IP address and subnet mask The gateway interface to send the data packet The metric to reach the destination IP address The gateway interface name The time of the route entry If the timeout timer reach the route entry metric will be set to infinity and the destination would be unreachable 1
126. 0 0 0 1 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Figure 16 5 Device Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Configure the auto refresh rate 327 gt Global Statistics Last Update Display latest update time of the statistics Total Inserts Display the number of neighbors during latest update time Total Deletes Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device Total Drops Displays the number of neighbors dropped by local device Total Ageouts Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device gt Neighbors Statistics UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Port Display local device s port number Transmit Total Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port Receive Total Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port Discards Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port Errors Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port Ageouts Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port TLV Discards Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port TLV Unknowns Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port 16 4 LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power via MDI inventory m
127. 0 8 4 Application Example for RIP gt Network Requirements e IP addresses of Switch A s three interfaces are 1 1 1 1 24 2 1 1 1 24 3 1 1 1 24 respectively IP addresses of Switch B s three interfaces are 1 1 1 2 24 10 1 1 1 24 11 1 1 1 24 respectively e RIP is required to be enabled in all interfaces of Switch A and B Network shall be interconnected between Switch A and B with the use of RIPv2 v Network Diagram Gi 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 24 Gi 1 0 3 3 1 1 1 24 Gi 1 0 3 11 1 1 1 24 Switch B Gi 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 24 Gi 1 0 1 1 1 1 2 24 Gi 1 0 2 10 1 1 2 24 gt Configuration Procedure e Configure Switch A Steps Operation Note 1 Enable RIP Required On page Routing RIP Basic Config enable RIP select RIPv2 as RIP version 2 Enable the network Required On page Routing gt RIP Basic Config Network segments where the interfaces are located Enable part add network segments 1 1 1 0 2 1 1 0 3 1 1 0 and enable RIP in these network segments These network segments will be displayed in RIP Network List after they are successfully added 164 e Configure Switch B Steps Operation Note 1 Enable RIP Required On page Routing RIP Basic Config enable RIP select RIPv2 as RIP version 2 Enable the network Required On page Routing RIP Basic Config Network segments where Enable part add network segments 1 1 1 0 10 1
128. 01 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 114 e The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D gt The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable e For Instance 1 VLAN 101 103 and 105 the red paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links Switch A Switch C Switch D Switch E Switch F e For Instance 2 VLAN 102 104 and 106 the blue paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links Switch A Switch D Switch E Switch F gt Suggestion for Configuration e Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches e Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges e Enab
129. 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 0 Dynamic Disable 5 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable E 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable 0 Dynamic Disable y The maximum number of MAC addresses learned from individual port can be set to 1024 Figure 6 4 Port Security The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Security UNIT Select Port Max Learned MAC Learned Num Learn Mode Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for Port Security configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned on the port Select the Learn Mode for the port Dynamic When Dynamic mode is selected the learned MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging time Static When Static mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is rebooted Permanent When Permanent mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the 48 aging time and can only be deleted manually The learned
130. 12 34 56 Figure 14 12 ARP Attack Cheating Terminal Hosts As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B and then Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When Host B tries to communicate with Host A it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Man In The Middle Attack 286 The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another they will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table Thus the attacker can get and process the packets before forwarding them During the procedure the communication packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of the attack That is called Man In The Middle Attack The Man In The Middle Attack is illustrated in the following figure Host A Host B IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 102 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 3 Host A updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host B 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 22 22 22 is updated to 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 33 33 33 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 4 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 Attacker sends the
131. 18 DHCP Server The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Add DHCP Server Address Interface ID Server Address gt DHCP Server List Select Interface ID Server Address Configuration Procedure Select the interface type and enter the interface ID Enter the DHCP server IP address Select the desire DHCP server item Displays the interface ID Displays the DHCP server address Step Operation Description 1 Enable DHCP Relay Required On the Routing gt DHCP Server Global Config page enable the DHCP Server function and the DHCP Relay function will be enabled at the same time 2 Configure Option 82 Optional On the Routing DHCP Relay gt Global Config support page configure the Option 82 parameters 3 Configure DHCP Server Required On the Routing gt DHCP Relay DHCP Server page specify the DHCP Server with IP address 10 6 Proxy ARP Proxy ARP functions to realize the Layer 3 connectivity between the hosts within the same network segment but isolated at Layer 2 When an ARP request of a host is to be forwarded to another host in the same network segment but isolated at Layer 2 to realize the connectivity the device connecting the two virtual networks should be able to respond to this request This can be achieved by the device running proxy ARP 154 Within the same network segment hosts connecting with different VLAN interfaces can communicate wit
132. 19 1 Hardware Installation 1 Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 2 Connect the Console port of the PC to the switch 3 Save the firmware of the switch in the shared file of FTP server Please write down the user name password and the firmware name 2 Configure the Hyper Terminal After the hardware installation please take the following steps to configure the hyper terminal of the management PC to manage the switch 1 Select Start All Programs Accessories Communications Hyper Terminal to open hyper terminal 364 Set Program Access and Defaults W Windows Catalog Windows Update El Program Updates D Accessbity cames a8 Communications Startup f Entertainment 6 Network Connections e ere plorer Internet Explorer E System Tools 92 Network Setup Wizard Bea Ww msn Q Address Book E New Connection Wizard B Microsoft Office Outi A Outlook Express 15 Calculator Y Remote Desktop Connection s Remote Assistance GI Command Prompt Y Wireless Network Setup Wizard Windows Media Player 3 Windows Messenger 8 Windows Movie Maker id FA Activate Windows E IxChariot E Asmax gt ET LogMeTT Tera Term Microsoft Office Macrovision TP LINK Ovistink Bi ff og E Notepad Y Paint 49 Program Compatibility Wizard amp Synchronize Tour Windows XP E Windows Explorer A WordPad
133. 2 ASA O SSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Anote 1 The key length is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits 2 During the key generation randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key generation 2 After the key is successfully generated please save the public key and private key to the computer g PulIY Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file ssh 1sa SASAB3NzaC1 po2EASSABIOAAAIBo2a0Y siF W sJaScst h nySwoU 3 m c4C2y 215 34 R4yevi8FvfR4GzxaE CiMMI35wCIhDwDb056b749 lt im ZYIFL wMWw naJOH49Nokrp EmzQSADSHJW8TCx1n3Wnax dpu2ePe595UK6euEaTerwi0lvweR2e5TCTDxwb lt e NQ rsa key 201 00120 Key fingerprint ssh tsa 1023 38 cd 9e 14 da b1 6a 9e 2b ff 43 69 e5 47 14 60 Key comment rsa key 20140127 Key passphrase Confirm passphrase Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate Load an existing private key file Load Save the generated key Save public key Save private key Parameters Type of key to generate SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA OSSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 30 3 On the Web management page of the switch download the public key file saved in the computer to the switch Key Download Choose the SSH public key file to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSAIDSA vw Key File ate 1 The key type should acco
134. 2 report packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port received Displays the number of leave packets the port received Displays the number of error packets the port received Return to CONTENTS 134 Chapter 10 Routing Routing is the method by which the host or gateway decides where to send the datagram Routing is the task of finding a path from a sender to a desired destination It may be able to send the datagram directly to the destination if that destination is on one of the networks that are directly connected to the host or gateway However what if the destination is not directly reachable The host or gateway will attempt to send the datagram to a gateway that is nearer to the destination The goal of a routing protocol is very simple It is to supply the information that is needed to do routing This chapter describes how to configure the IPv4 unicast routing on the T3700G 28TQ 10 1 Interface Interface is a virtual interface in Layer 3 mode and mainly used for realizing the Layer 3 connectivity between VLANs or routed ports Each VLAN interface is corresponding to one VLAN Each routed port is corresponding to one port Loopback Interface is purely software implemented Interface has its own IP address and subnet mask to identify the subnet it belongs to and it works as the gateway of the subnet to forward Layer 3 IP packets Choose the menu Routing Interface Interface Config to load the
135. 28 Port Gigabit L3 Managed Switch Device Name T37006 28TQ Device Location SHENZHEN Contact Information http Mw tp link corn Hardware Version T3700G 28TQ 1 0 Firmware Version 1 0 0 Build 20140120 Rel 78992 Mac Address 00 04 EB 13 12 B5 System Time 2006 01 01 08 01 51 Running Time 0 Day 0 Hour 2 Min 17 Sec subSlotl Status Not Present System Temperature 29 5 Degree Celsius Fan Speed Mode Slow Fan Status Ok Power Supply Module Present amp Good Redundant Power Supply Present amp Good Figure 4 1 System Summary gt Port Status UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 14 3 Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 10000Mbps Oe et gog Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps When the cursor moves on the port the detailed information of the port will be displayed Port 1 0 14 Type 1000M RJ45 Speed 1000M FullDuplex Status Link Up Figure 4 2 Port Information gt Port Info Port Displays the port number of the switch Type Displays the type of the port Rate Displays the maximum transmission rate of the
136. 3 Interface 3 with its IP address as 192 168 3 1 subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 VLAN ID as 3 and interface name as VLAN3 3 Enable Proxy Required On Routing Proxy ARP Proxy ARP page enable Proxy ARP ARP feature for interface 2 and interface 3 10 7 ARP This page displays the ARP table information Choose the menu Routing gt ARP ARP Table to load the following page 156 ARP Table Interface IP Address MAC Address Type Age Time min WLAN1 192 168 0 5 94 de 80 b4 d0 51 Dynamic 17 10 ARP count 1 Figure 10 22 ARP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Table Interface Displays the network interface of arp entry IP Address Enter the DHCP server IP address MAC Address Displays the MAC address of ARP entry Type Displays the type of ARP entry e g Static Dynamic Age Time min Displays the live time left before arp entry be deleted 10 8 RIP Ghote Router mentioned in this chapter refers to the traditional router or the switch running routing protocols RIP Routing Information Protocol is intended for use within the IP based Internet This protocol is most useful as an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP RIP was designed to work with moderate size networks using reasonably homogeneous technology Thus it is suitable as an IGP for many campuses and for regional networks using serial lines whose speeds do not vary widely It is not intended for use in more complex environments RIP
137. 51 Step Operation Description 3 Manually collect NTDP Optional On Cluster NTDP Device Table page click the information Collect Topology button to manually collect NTDP information Or On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page click the Collect Topology button to manually collect NTDP information 4 View the detailed Optional On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page information of other double click the icon of the switch to view its detailed switches in the cluster information 17 4 Application Example for Cluster Function gt Network Requirements Three switches form cluster one commander switch and two member switches The administrator manages all the switches in the cluster via the commander switch e Port 1 of the commander switch is connecting to the external network port 2 is connecting to member switch 1 and port 3 is connecting to member switch 2 e IP pool 175 128 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Network Diagram Network Network administrator Cluster 175 128 0 1 ae Port 3 255 255 255 0 Commander switch 00 00 00 11 11 11 Port 1 Member switch 1 Member switch 2 00 00 00 22 22 22 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure17 19 Network diagram gt Configuration Procedure e Configure the member switch Step Operation Description 1 Enable NDP function on the On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable NDP switch and for port 1 func
138. 6 Generally speaking the packet forwarding tree in the dense mode is Source Tree a forwarding tree with multicast source as the root and multicast members as the branches As the Source Tree is a forwarding tree with the shortest path from the multicast source to the receivers it is also called Shortest Path Tree SPT The working process of PIM DM can be summarized as follows e Neighbor Discovering SPT Building Grafting gt Neighbor Discovering n PIM domain routers periodically sends PIM Hello packets to all the PIM routers with the multicast address 224 0 0 13 to discover PIM neighbors maintain the PIM neighboring relationships between the routers thus to build and maintain the SPT gt SPT Building The SPT building process is also the flood and prune process 1 When the multicast source S is sending multicast packets to multicast group G in PIM DM domain the multicast packets will firstly be flooded After the multicast packet passes the routers RPF check the router will create a corresponding S G entry and forward this packet to all the nodes downstream in the network All the routers in the PIM DM domain will create the S G entry after this flooding process 2 Then branches without receivers downstream are pruned The downstream branches with no receivers will send prune message to the upstream node to delete the corresponding interface in the output interface list of the multicast forwarding ent
139. 8 A A eee a ee A ee A ia 239 WAALS URPE MAPPING es a ee oca 000 240 114 6 RP Oia a at 241 11 5 Sato MIU iii A A A ti AA 242 11 5 1 Static Mroute CONfIJ ccoocnccoccccnncccinconcnnccconcnnonconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnncncnncanininnnnnnes 243 11 5 2 Static Mroute Table ooooonmnconnccnnnnnninnonconcccnncononconennnnnnoconnnnonannnnncncnnnanininnnnnnes 244 Chapter 12 MOS iii a pda 245 T21 DI SN ta Ai 248 PZT AA 248 12 1 2 Schedule Mode civic adenda 249 1213 BOL IPPO oo tr A in A ii 250 121 4 DSCP Prior Viana nto a a rae ise eaten 251 12 2 Bandwidth Control ooconinccccccconicicocononocccnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnnnnnenranannnnnnes 253 122 1 Rate iMac A iaa 253 122527 SOT COMO A A ate e 254 123 Voice WIGAN a iia pe 255 12 31 Global Contig evisos 257 12 32 POE COMA A ADA 258 12 33 QULCONMG aida ia 259 Chapter 13 ACK ias Ra lan alada LAR 261 13 TIMSRANOOO esca a a 261 13 1 1 Time Range SUMMARNY ccccococonooccccnnononncononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnnnencanannnnnces 261 13 1 2 Time Range Create ooccccnonococccccnncncinconcnnccconcnconcnnennncnnnnnnnnnonannnnncncnncnninannnnnees 262 13 13 Holiday CONTIG huida ib 263 A A A O Tee mn E Tee aN 263 13 24 ACE SUMMA tists in A dh ie aie amet athe 264 13 2 2 ACE Create iio misa alaban 264 za MACAEL O AU E 265 135 24 standard ACI odaia Sadat sae lc techs A a at 265 19 20 Extend IP AC Linde dal das 266 13 3 Rolly CONi g
140. Alternate DNS server i i Cancel Figure B 3 6 Select Use the following IP address And the following items will be available If the switch s IP address is 192 168 0 1 specify IP address as 192 168 0 x x is from 2 to 254 and the Subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 Now Click OK to save your settings Return to CONTENTS 373 Appendix C 802 1X Client Software In 802 1X mechanism the supplicant Client should be equipped with the corresponding client software complied with 802 1X protocol standard for 802 1X authentication When the switch works as the authenticator system please take the following instructions to install the TpSupplicant provided on the attached CD for the supplicant Client 1 1 Installation Guide 1 Insert the provided CD into your CD ROM drive Open the file folder and double click the icon LINK i to load the following figure Choose the proper language and click Next to continue TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Choose Setup Language Select the language for the installation from the choices below Chinese Sages Figure C 1 Choose Setup Language 2 Please wait for the InstallShield Wizard preparing the setup shown as the following screen TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the se
141. Auto Disable Auto A Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto _ Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto v Can Apply Refresh Help Ifthe Path Cost of a portis set to 0 it will alter automatically according to the port s link speed Figure 8 6 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select Port Status Priority Ext Path Cost Int Path Cost Edge Port P2P Link MCheck Port Mode Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for STP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Select Enable Disable STP function for the desired port Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16 Port priority is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port The lower value has the higher priority ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Select Enable Disable Edge Port
142. Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0 8 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized 13 O 1 0 9 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 10n0 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0 11 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 11012 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0413 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 01 4 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized F 11015 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized v Lan Refresh Lappy Help Note 802 1X can not be enabled for LAG member Figure 14 23 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Status Select Enable Disable the 802 1X authentication feature for the port Guest VLAN Select Enable Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port Control Mode Specify the Control Mode for the port e Auto In this mode the port will normally work only after passing the 802 1X Authentication 300 e Force Authorized In this mode the port can work normally without passing the 802 1X Authentication e Force Unauthorized In this mode the port is forbidden working for its fixed unauthorized status Control Type Specify the Control Type for the port e MAC Based Any client connected to the port should pass the 802 1X Authentication for access e Port Based All t
143. COTA hehe iat os 342 A A RS gt Pee ee ee 343 17 3 1 Cl ster S mmMmary recostada stats 343 17 3 2 Cluster Config ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeecccneaaeeeeeeeesecenccieeeeeeeeteeeeneases 346 17 3 3 Member Contig civic soria aria iria 349 11 34 Cluster TOPCO GY ivi RAN aint A Avene eed ate iggy tes Ma 350 17 4 Application Example for Cluster Function 0 cccccccesceceeceeeeeeeceeneneeeeeeeeeeseseeneaees 352 Chapter 18 EE A 354 18 1 System MonNitOF nor a ideada 354 181 1 CRUIMO O a a a a a NS 354 18 1 2 Memory Monitor sna ien a e a a E a E aae 355 WB O CO 356 18 24 Log Talent tn 357 18 2 2 Local Lo hn ed ceececty tibet ante cu bel llo eri acond des coco end Debe diagonal 358 18 23 Remote Log ccccccccnccnnccnnnenonenonennnononononononnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnenaninnns 359 18 2 4 Backup LOG tada te 359 18 3 Device DIAGNOSUCS ies tl 360 EAN CS 360 18 32 ELOOpbaCk idiota 361 198 4 Network DIagnosticS viii A A ee a EL ea 362 TELA PM es o de tes ta e e do a da dea a E 362 19 4 2 TRACE eoin n hid wtedkian Sanh iia wai hee aaean ss 363 Chapter 19 System Maintenance via FTP ooooonoccccnnocaccncnonancnonononnnnnonancnnonnnnonnnnnnnn nn nc naar nncnnnnnne 364 Appendix A Specification Sissin aa a i oa aaa aaiae aaa Eaa a AEE 370 Appendix B Configuring the PCS 0ooooocococccccnocononccocococnnnonnnnconononconcnnn nro nnnnnnnennanannnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnes 372 Appe
144. CP Sven 139 10 421 DACP Soares 145 10 4 2 Pool SettiMQ conoonococicnnnicicnnononccnnnnocnoncnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnennnnannnnnnnnnnennanannnnnne 147 10 4 3 M nual BINdINO iii 148 1044 Binding Table ud dades 148 10 4 5 Packet StatiStiCS ooooocoonnonicin noocccnnnoncncononanncnnonannnncnnnnn ono ncnnnnnnc nano nn ncnnannnncnnnns 149 10 5 DHCP REY srta tad da aa 150 10 51 Global Contos toi a A A Gee 152 105 2 DACP SAVE O Ate etc 153 106 APROX ARPA AA A A A AAA 154 TON ARPA AAA A bd 156 O O esl eee ie 157 10 81 Basi CON A A Aa a didas 160 10 8 2 Interface Conf merci pedante 162 10 3 3 RIP Database uti nadie ea eters 163 10 8 4 Application Example for RIP oooococooniccccccnccccococononncnnononnnncnnnnncnnnnnnninnnnnnnccnno 164 A O teins candida senate ned 165 10 91 PrOCESS aiie dian ok nly ee ieee ate e a p 182 10 92 BASIC A e aaae a aa ana aeaaea aeaa ea nents Senet 182 109 3 NetWork aa a e aaa 185 10 94 Ut it a Ae 186 A A a A en 189 10 9 6 Area Aggregation ccooccccccnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnonanenicinininos 191 A A E 192 10 9 8 Route Redistribution siei eerie ae iiei i oi i i E E nano 194 10 9 9 ASBR Aggregation cccccccccceeeeeceeececeeeeeeeeecenaeeaeeceeeeeseseneaeeeneeseetesseeeaaes 195 10 9 10 Neighbor Table cio tata 196 10 9 11 Link State Database nsiro inie e e i a a nono nnnnn nan A a 197 aKO KONAA R mi mA ORAE EE a ined el N T A E E E E 198
145. Config Auto Aging O Enable Disable Apply Aging Time 300 secs 10 630 default 300 Search Option Search Option All Ji Dynamic Address Table UNIT 1 Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status O 58 66 BA DF 7B 05 1 1 0 2 Dynamic Aging O 94 DE 80 B4 CF 96 1 1 0 10 Dynamic Aging O D4 3D 7E BF 61 5F 1 1 0 2 Dynamic Aging Unit 1 Address Num Displayed 3 Total Address Num of All Unit 3 Note The maximum of the displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 6 15 Dynamic Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Aging Config Auto Aging Allows you to Enable Disable the Auto Aging feature Aging Time Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number or link aggregation number of your desired entry gt Dynamic Address Table UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC address to the corresponding port statically It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the dynamic MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding V
146. Device A Network Figure 10 56 Typical Networking Application Diagram gt VRRP Operating Principle 1 Working Process VRRP backup group or virtual router consists of a group of physical routers with the same VRID virtual route identifier A virtual router owns one or more virtual IP addresses and one virtual MAC address in the format 00 00 5E 00 01 VRID The IP address of the virtual router is assigned as the default gateway for the hosts within the LAN Communication with external network can be realized via the virtual router Master router is selected from the physical routers in the virtual router group according to VRRP priority The elected master router provides routing service to the hosts in LAN and sends VRRP messages periodically to publicize its configuration information like priority and operating condition to other routers in backup group Other physical routers in the backup group work as backup routers They monitor the VRRP packets sent by the master router A 199 new master router will be elected among them to take the role of the master router if master router fails 2 Master Election Initially created routers work in Backup state and learn other members priorities in the virtual router via VRRP packets The one with the highest priority is elected as master router If the priority values are the same the router with the highest interface IP address is selected as the master e In preemptible mode when
147. Ethernet network the destination MAC address is the MAC address of the receiver When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network the destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members so a multicast MAC address a logical MAC address is needed to be used as the destination address As stipulated by IANA the high order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01 00 5E while the low order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low order 23 bits of the multicast IP address The mapping relationship is described as the following figure 0 15 23 31 RR IP Address 1110 5bits The low order 23 bits of the multicast IP are mapped to the low order 23 bits of the multicast MAC address MAC Address 00000001 00000000 0101 1110 o 01 00 5E Figure 9 2 Mapping relationship between multicast IP address and multicast MAC address The high order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110 identifying the multicast group Only 23 bits of the remaining low order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address In that way 5 bits of the IP multicast address is not utilized As a result 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same MAC address gt Multicast Address Table The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table As the transmission of multicast packets can not span the VLAN the first part of the multicast address table is VLAN ID ba
148. I The Initial bit During the synchronization of link state database between two routers it may require multiple DD packets to be forwarded among which the first DD packet will set its initial bit to 1 while the others 0 M The More bit When the forwarded DD packet is not the last one database it will set its More Bit to 1 while the last DD packet will set the M Bit to be O MS The Master Slave bit Before the synchronization of the link state database between two routers master slave router needs to be elected which in general is decided by such parameters as the router priority router ID and etc After the election the master router will dominate the process of database synchronization The DD packet forwarded by the master router would set its MS bit to 1 while that by the slave router would set the MS bit to 0 DD Sequence Number After the master slave router having been elected the master router randomly determines the sequence number of the first DD packet and then the sequence number of the following DD packets increments by one In this way the whole synchronization process will carry on in good order LSA header The LSA header of the whole or partial link state database of the advertising router whose uniqueness identifies a LSA 178 4 LSR Packet During the synchronization of the link state database between two routers if one router finds an updated LSA or an LSA it doesn t have in the DD packet forwarded it c
149. ID Port Type Operation No entry in the table Figure 7 18 Create and View Protocol Template The following entries are displayed on this screen 92 gt Port Config Port selected Port Type Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN UNIT Select the desired port for configuration You can input one or select from the port table down the blank gt Private VLAN Port Table UNIT Port ID Port Type Mote 1 A Host Port can only join to one Private VLAN 2 A Promiscuous Port can only join to one Primary VLAN 3 If you want to add a Promiscuous port to different Private VLANs with the same Primary VLAN you need to add the Promiscuous port to any one of these Private VLANs Configuration Procedure Select the Port Type from the pull down list for the port Specify the Primary VLAN the port belongs to Specify the Secondary VLAN the port belongs to Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Displays the port number Displays the corresponding Port Type Step Operation Description 1 Create Private VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN PVLAN Config page Enter the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN select one type of secondary VLAN and then click the Create button Add ports to Private VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page select the desired ports and configure the port types and click t
150. IP Virtual MAC Track Information Tracked Interface 1 1 VRRP 1 192 168 0 1 Master 100 g0 1 0 Enable None 192 168 0 10 00 00 5 00 01 01 VLAN 2 Reduced Priority 10 Figure 10 59 Detailed Specified VRRP Information 203 Details of the Specified VRRP VRID Interface Description Interface IP Status Configure Priority Priority Advertise Timer Preempt Timer Delay Preempt Mode Authentication Type Key Virtual IP Virtual MAC Track Information Tracked Interface Reduced Priority Back Refresh Displays the VRID associated with the VRRP Displays the Interface ID associated with the VRRP Displays the description associated with the VRRP Displays the IP Address associated with the selected interface Displays the status associated with the VRRP Displays the configured priority associated with the VRRP It ranges from 1 to 255 Displays the running priority associated with the VRRP It ranges from 1 to 255 Displays the advertise timer associated with the VRRP It ranges from 1 to 255 Displays the preempt delay timer associated with the VRRP It ranges from 0 to 255 Displays the preempt mode associated with the VRRP Displays the authentication type associated with the VRRP Displays the key associated with authentication type If the authentication type is normal it will display Displays all the virtual IP associa
151. Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure WLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch B as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 0 6 Configure switch B as the On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance designated bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 4096 113
152. LAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding port number or link aggregation number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address 63 Bind Click the Bind button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry to the corresponding port statically Tips Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging The aging time that is too long or too short results decreases the performance of the switch If the aging time is too long excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address table This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time If the aging time is too short the switch may remove valid MAC address entries This decreases the forwarding performance of the switch It is recommended to keep the default value 6 4 4 Filtering Address The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded The filtering address can be added or removed manually independent of the aging time The filtering MAC address allows the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or destination address so as to guarantee the network security The filtering MAC address entries act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN Choose the menu Switching MAC Address Filtering Address to load the following page Create Filter
153. LDP state Notification Mode Enable Disable the ports SNMP notification Included TLVs Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU 16 2 Device Info You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and Neighbor Info pages respectively 16 2 1 Local Info On this page you can see all ports configuration and system information 324 Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Local Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Local Info UNIT 1 11911860 421 64 6 48 20 221124 28 MAARA kE 17 19 21 23 125 ES Unselected Port s ES Selected Port s 5 Not Available for Selection Port 1 0 41 Local Interface 1 0 11 Chassis ID Subtype MAC address Chassis ID 00 0A EB 13 12 B5 Port ID Subtype Interface name Port ID GigabitEthernet1 0 1 TTL 120 Port Description GigabitEthernet1 0 1 Interface System Name T3700G 28TQ System Description 28 Port Gigabit L3 Managed Switch in od Bridge Router era aaa Bridge Router Management Address 192 168 0 1 Figure 16 3 Local Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Local Info Enable Disable the auto refresh function Configure the auto refresh rate Select the desired port to display the information of the corresponding port UNIT Local Interface C
154. Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router and the streams are transmitted to user A and user B through the switch Router Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source its LAN port is connected to the switch The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3 Switch Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3 port 4 is connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4 port 5 is connected to user B and the packets are transmitted in VLAN5 User A Connected to Port 4 of the switch User B Connected to port 5 of the switch Configure a multicast VLAN and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast VLAN 127 gt Network Diagram gt Configuration Procedure Multicast Source User A Router Port 3 Switch Port 4 Port 5 VLANS User B Step Operation Description 1 Create VLANs Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3 4 and 5 respectively and specify the description of VLAN3 as Multicast VLAN on VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN function pages For port 3 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as TAG and add it to VLAN3 VLAN4 and VLAN5 For port 4 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 4 For port 5 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 an
155. N tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound port for the packet and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for transmission In this User Guide the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag and the priority tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0 gt Link Types of ports When creating the 802 1Q VLAN you should set the link type for the port according to its connected device The link types of port including the following three types 1 ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the ACCESS port is added to another VLAN it will be removed from the current VLAN automatically 2 TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs The egress rule of the port is UNTAG if the arriving packet s VLAN tag is the same as the port s PVID otherwise the egress rule is TAG The TRUNK port is generally used to connect the cascaded network devices for it can receive and forward the packets of multiple VLANs 67 3 GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any valid VLAN gt PVID PVID Port Vlan ID is the default VID of the port When the switch receiv
156. O x dl 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 WLAN1 Enable Figure 10 20 Proxy ARP The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Proxy ARP Config Here you can configure the Proxy ARP function Search Default Route If enabled default route is included when searching arp proxy gt Proxy ARP Information Select Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional 155 IP Address Subnet Mask Interface Interface Name Status Example Application Displays the interface s IP address Displays the interface s subnet mask Displays the interface Displays the name of the interface Enable Disable the items selected gt Network Requirements 1 PC A and PC B are in the same network segment but belong to VLAN2 and VLAN3 respectively 2 PCA and PC B can interconnect with each other by using Proxy ARP function gt Network Diagram 192 168 2 1 24 Interface 3 192 168 3 1 24 Interface 2 Switch PCA PCB 192 168 2 10 16 192 168 3 11 16 Figure 10 21 ARP Application gt Configuration Procedure Configure the Switch Step Operation Description 1 Create Interface 2 Required On Routing Interface lInterface Config page create Interface 2 with its IP address as 192 168 2 1 subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 VLAN ID as 2 and interface name as VLAN2 2 Create Interface Required On Routing lInterface Interface Config page create
157. P Introduces how to download firmware of the switch via FTP function Appendix A Specifications Lists the glossary used in this manual Appendix B Configure the PCs Introduces how to configure the PCs Appendix C 802 1X Client Software Introduces how to use 802 1X Client Software provided for authentication Appendix D Glossary Lists the glossary used in this manual Return to CONTENTS Chapter 2 Introduction Thanks for choosing the T3700G 28TQ JetStream 28 Port Gigabit Stackable L3 Managed Switch 2 1 Overview of the Switch T3700G 28TQ is TP LINK s JetStream layer 3 stackable switch supporting up to 4 SFP slots T3700G 28TQ is ideal for large enterprises campuses or SMB networks requiring an outstanding reliable and affordable 10 Gigabit solution T3700G 28TQ supports stacking of up to 8 units thus providing flexible scalability and protective redundancy for your networks Moreover aiming to better protect your network T3700G 28TQ s main power is removable with the help of TP LINK s RPS administrators can easily change its main power if it encounters some problems without shutting down the switch This feature enables your network to really enjoy the benefit of uninterrupted operation 2 2 Main Features e Advanced Layer 3 Features Supports abundant Layer 3 routing protocols such as Static Routing RIP v1 v2 OSPF v2 and PIM SM PIM DM Provides many useful Layer 3 features
158. P adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP The GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in GARP Applications GARP Participants to register and de register attribute values with other GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN The definition of the attribute types the values that they can carry and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered are specific to the operation of the GARP Application concerned 382 Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations co
159. P Address VLAN ID Scanning Result UNIT 1 Select Host Name O Entry Count 0 Note 1 4094 MAC Address VLANID Port Protect Type Source Collision l 1 No entry in the table i All Apply Delete Refresh l Help 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect Figure 14 4 ARP Scanning The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Scanning Option Start IP Address End IP Address VLAN ID Scan Scanning Result UNIT Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision Specify the Start IP Address Specify the End IP Address Enter the VLAN ID Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired entry to be deleted or bound It is multi optional Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Displays the Protect Type of the entry Displays the source of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries 14 2 DHCP Snooping Nowadays the network is getting larger and more comp
160. P Snooping Select Enable Disable IGMP Snooping function globally on the switch Unknown Multicast Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast Forward or Discard gt IGMP Snooping Status Description Displays IGMP Snooping status Member Displays the member of the corresponding status 9 1 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the IGMP feature for ports of the switch Choose the menu Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Port Config to load the following page 120 Port Config UNIT 1 Select Port IGMP Snooping Fast Leave LAG v v O 1 0 1 Disable Disable A O 1 0 2 Disable Disable O 1 0 3 Disable Disable O 1 0 4 Disable Disable O 4 0 5 Disable Disable O 1 0 6 Disable Disable O 1 0 17 Disable Disable O 1 0 8 Disable Disable O 1 0 9 Disable Disable gt O 1 0 10 Disable Disable O 1 0 11 Disable Disable O 1 0 12 Disable Disable O 1 0 13 Disable Disable O 1 0 14 Disable Disable O 1 0 15 Disable Disable v Figure 9 5 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port of the switch IGMP Snooping Select Enable Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port Fast Leave Select Enable Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port
161. P of Cat 5 100Base FX MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional Transmission Medium 1000Base T 4 pair UTP lt 100m of Cat 5 or above 1000Base X MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional 10Gbase X MMF or SMF SFP Module or SFP Direct Attach Cable DAC Optional Power System RPS FAN Master Module M1 M2 10 100 1000Mbps Unit ID LED Transmission Method Store and Forward 10BASE T 14881 pps port 100BASE TX 148810pps port 1000Base T 1488095pps port 10Gbase X 14880950pps port Packets Forwarding Rate 370 Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C Storage Temperature 40 C 70 C Operating Environment Operating Humidity 10 90 RH Non condensing Storage Humidity 5 90 RH Non condensing Return to CONTENTS 371 Appendix B Configuring the PCs In this section we ll introduce how to install and configure the TCP IP correctly in Windows 2000 First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working refer to the adapter s manual if necessary 1 Configure TCP IP component 4 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window Right click the icon that showed below select Properties on the prompt page LAN or High Speed Internet Ai ocal Area Connection Connected Firewalled TEIGA Dis able Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Sh
162. Port 3 0 1 UNIT 3 Parar to td 1481201122 11241 ERA E EE A EEE E Unselected Port s C Selected Port s E Not Available for Selection Statistics Received Sent Broadcast 0 Broadcast 0 Multicast 0 Multicast 0 Unicast 0 Unicast 0 Alignment Errors 0 Collisions 0 UndersizePkts 0 Pkts64Octets 0 Pkts65to127Octets 0 Pkts128to2550ctets 0 Pkts256to511Octets 0 Pkts512to10230ctets 0 PktsOver10230ctets 0 Figure6 12 Traffic Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically 57 Refresh Rate Port Select UNIT Port Select Statistics Port Received Sent Broadcast Multicast Unicast Alignment Errors UndersizePkts Pkts64Octets Pkts65to127Octets Pkts128to255Octets Pkts256to511Octets Pkts512to1023Octets PktsOver10230ctets Collisions Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Enter a port number and click the Select button to view the traffic statistics of the corresponding port Displays the details of the packets received on the port Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port Displays the number of good broadcast packets received or transmitted on the port The error fra
163. RP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Leave message And when receiving the Leave message from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically the device also sends out a Leave message 86 e LeaveAll Message Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer After the timer times out the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message LeaveAll message is to deregister all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re register attribute information of their own Through message exchange all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all the switches in the same switched network The interval of GARP messages is controlled by timers GARP defines the following timers e Hold Timer When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information it does not send out a Join message immediately Instead to save the bandwidth resources it starts the Hold timer puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join message and sends out the message after the timer times out e Join Timer To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities a GARP entity sends each Join message two times The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message e Leave Timer When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute informatio
164. Reset Anote After the system is reset the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared 4 4 Access Security Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the configuration management security It can be implemented on Access Control SSL Config and SSH Config pages 4 4 1 Access Control On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the configuration management security The definitions of Admin and Guest refer to 4 2 User Management This function only applies to Web SNMP Telnet SSL and SSH 24 Choose the menu System Access Security Access Control to load the following page Access Control Config Control Mode Disable IP Address Mask MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 Session Config Session Timeout 110 min 5 30 Access User Number Number Control Enable Disable Admin Number 1 16 Guest Number 0 15 Figure 4 15 Access Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Access Control Config Control Mode Select the control mode for users to log on to the Web management page e IP based Select this option to limit the IP range of the users for login e MAC based Select this option to limit the MAC Address of the users for login e Port based Select this option to limit the ports for login IP Address amp
165. Statistics On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch which facilitates you to monitor the IGMP messages in the network Choose the menu Multicast Packet Statistics to load the following page 133 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Period sec 3 300 IGMP Statistics UNIT 1 Port Query Packet 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 1 0 11 110 12 1 0 13 1 0 14 1 0 15 oio ici ioioioioi io io io oi coico ic co Report Packet V1 Report Packet V2 Report Packet V3 Leave Packet Error Packet o eicioioio i eoico ic io ico o o co o 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Figure 9 13 Packet Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Period IGMP Statistics UNIT Port Query Packet Report Packet V1 Report Packet V2 Report Packet V3 Leave Packet Error Packet Select Enable Disable auto refresh feature Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh period Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Displays the port number of the switch Displays the number of query packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv
166. Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold Enter the rising counter value that triggers the rising threshold alarm ranging from 1 to 2147483647 Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the rising Threshold Enter the falling counter value that triggers the falling threshold alarm ranging from 1 to 2147483647 Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold Specify the type of the alarm e Rising When the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold an alarm event is triggered e Falling When the sampled value is under the Falling Threshold an alarm event is triggered e All The alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold 317 Interval Enter the alarm interval time in seconds ranging from 10 to 3600 Owner Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Status Select Enable Disable the corresponding alarm entry Ante When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times an alarm event will only be generated on the first time that is the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and vice
167. TP LINK User Guide T3700G 28TQ JetStream 28 Port Gigabit Stackable L3 Managed Switch REV1 0 0 1910010948 COPYRIGHT amp TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice TIP LINIK is a registered trademark of TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Copyright O 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD All rights reserved http www tp link com FCC STATEMENT HE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy ana if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two condition
168. The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets and its VLAN number The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients gt DHCP Cheating Attack During the working process of DHCP generally there is no authentication mechanism between Server and Client If there are several DHCP servers in the network network confusion and security problem will happen The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the following two 1 Its common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake 2 Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients For example hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords The following figure illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure Switch with DHCP Snooping Function disabled Illegal DHCP Response Packets DHCP Client lllegal DHCP Server DHCP Server Figure 14 7 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP Server as the trusted port to forward all types of DHCP packet
169. VLAN Port Config h hh hb ee gt ee ee ee ee dd dh dh dh dh ch Al The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Port Config UNIT Select Port Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number 70 VLAN Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Ri lt Link Type PVID LAG VLAN Select the Link Type from the pull down list for the port e ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the current VLAN is deleted the PVID will be set to 1 by default e TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs The egress rule of the port is UNTAG if the arriving packet s VLAN tag is the same as the ports PVID otherwise the egress rule is TAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any valid VLAN e GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any valid VLAN Enter the PVID number of the port Displays the LAG to which the port belongs Click the Detail button to view the information of the VLAN to which the port belongs Click the Detail button to view the
170. VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status O No entry in the table Unit 1 Address Num Displayed O Total Address Num of All Unit 0 Note The maximum of the displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 6 14 Static Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Address MAC Address Enter the static MAC Address to be bound VLAN ID Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 61 Port gt Search Option Search Option gt Static Address Table UNIT Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status Mote Select a port to be bound Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number of your desired entry Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the entry to delete or modify the corresponding port number It is multi optional Displays the static MAC Address Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address Here you can modify the port number to which the MAC address is bound The new port should be in the same VLAN Displays the
171. able Garbage collect timer defines the interval from when the metric of a route becomes 16 to when it is deleted from the routing table During the garbage collect timer length RIP advertises the route with the routing metric set to 16 If no update is announced for that route after the garbage collect timer expires the route will be deleted from the routing table gt Routing loops prevention RIP is a distance vector D V routing protocol Since an RIP router advertises its own routing table to neighbors routing loops may occur RIP uses the following mechanisms to prevent routing loops Counting to infinity The metric value of 16 is defined as unreachable When a routing loop occurs the metric value of the route will increment to 16 Split horizon A router does not send the routing information learned from a neighbor to this neighbor to prevent routing loops and save bandwidth Poison reverse A router sets the metric of routes received from a neighbor to 16 and sends back these routes to the neighbor to help delete such information from the neighbor s routing table Triggered updates A router advertises updates once the metric of a route is changed rather than after the update period expires to speed up network convergence gt Operation of RIP The following procedure describes how RIP works 1 After RIP is enabled the router sends request messages to neighboring routers Neighboring routers return Response messag
172. acket to the interface which receives the request The process will be shown as follows DHCP Client DHCP Relay DHCP Server 1 OHCP DISCOVER 1 DHCP DISCOVER U 3 DHCP REQUEST U 4 DHCP ACK Figure 10 15 DHCP Relay Process 151 2 DHCP OFFER 3 DHCP REQUEST 4 DHCP ACK B gt DHCP Relay Configuration 1 Configure the Option 82 parameters to record the information of the clients You are suggested to configure the option82 on the nearest Relay of the client 2 Specify the DHCP Server which assigns IP addresses actually gt Option 82 On this switch Option 82 is used to record the location of the DHCP Client the ethernet port and the VLAN etc Upon receiving the DHCP REQUEST packet the switch adds the Option 82 field to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server The Server can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate the DHCP Client and assign the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters for fulfilling the security control and account management of the client Option 82 can contain 255 sub options at most If Option 82 is defined at least one sub option should be defined This Switch supports two sub options Circuit ID and Remote ID Since there is no universal standard about the content of Option 82 different manufacturers define the sub options of Option 82 to their need For this Switch the sub options are defined as follows
173. ackets the Server responds with SYN ACK packets Since the IP address is fake no response will be returned The Server will keep on sending SYN ACK packets If the attacker sends overflowing fake request packets the network resource will be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied Table 14 1 Defendable DoS Attack Types 293 14 5 1 DoS Defend On this page you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need Choose the menu Network Security gt DoS Defend DoS Defend to load the following page Configure DoS Protection Enable Disable Defend Table Select Defend Type Land Attack Scan SYNFIN Xmascan NULL Scan SYN sPortless 1024 Blat Attack Ping Flooding SYN SYN ACK Flooding m Figure 14 18 DoS Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Defend Config DoS Defend Allows you to Enable Disable DoS Defend function gt Defend Table Select Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type Defend Type Displays the Defend Type name 14 6 802 1X The 802 1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN WAN committee to deal with the security issues of wireless LANs It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems 802 1X is a port based network access control protocol It authenticates and controls devices requesting for access in terms of the ports of LAN
174. ad the following page Routing Information Summary Protocol Destination Mask Next Hop Distance Metric Interface name connected 192 168 0 0 24 192 168 0 1 0 0 Route Count 1 Figure 10 2 Routing Table gt Routing Information Summary Protocol Displays the protocol of the route Destination Mask Displays the destination and subnet of the route Next Hop Displays the IP address to which the packet should be sent next Distance Displays the management distance of the route The smaller the distance is the higher the priority is Metric Displays the metric of the route Interface name Displays the description of the egress interface 10 3 Static Routing Static routes are special routes manually configured by the administrator and cannot change automatically with the network topology accordingly Hence static routes are commonly used in a relative simple and stable network Proper configuration of static routes can greatly improve network performance Choose the menu Routing gt Static Routing Static Routing Config to load the following page Static Routing Config Destination Format 10 10 10 0 Subnet Mask Format 255 255 255 0 NextHop Format 192 168 0 2 Distance Optional range 1 255 Static Route Table Select Destination Subnet Mask Next Hop Distance Metric Interface name O No entry in the table Static routing count 0 Figure 10 3 Static Routing Config The following entries are displ
175. ader Clear the statistics displayed on the web Refreshes the web page to show the latest VRRP information Return to CONTENTS 209 Chapter 11 Multicast Routing gt Overview of Multicast Routing Protocols Note The router and router icon mentioned in this chapter represent the router in general or the switch that runs the layer 3 multicast routing protocols The multicast routing protocols run in layer 3 multicast devices and they create and maintain multicast routes to forward the multicast packets correctly and efficiently The multicast routing protocols establish routes for the point to multipoint transmissions known as the multicast distributing tree The multicast routing table consists of a group of S G entries and S G route represents routing information from source S to group G If no multicast source is specified the entry will be described as G with representing any multicast source If the router supports multiple multicast routing protocols its multicast routing table will contain multicast routes generated from multiple protocols Multicast routing protocols include protocols as IGMP PIM MSDP DVMRP and static multicast routing The domain mentioned in this guide refers to Autonomous System which contains a group of routers exchanging routing information with the same routing protocol IGMP stands for Internet Group Management Protocol It is responsible for members management of IP multicas
176. adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 5 seconds The hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 10 seconds The dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 40 The Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 1 second The link cost OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 The OSPF network type on the interface The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast 186 Passive Mode MTU Ignore Database Filter Authentication Type Authentication Key ID Authentication Key State Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface OSPF advertises networks
177. age toward the RP hop by hop The RP will forward the received prune message toward the multicast source The switching process from RPT to SPT is then accomplished After the switching from RPT to SPT the multicast data will be sent from multicast source to the receivers directly Through this switching process from RPT to SPT PIM SM constructs the SPT in a more economical way than PIM DM does 235 gt Asserting The assert mechanism of PIM SM and PIM DM is the same For more details refer to Assert Mechanism gt BSR Administrative Domain BSR is the administrative core in the PIM SM domain The BSR is exclusive in one PIM SM domain and it advertises the RP Set information in the whole PIM SM domain All the multicast group information is forwarded inside the BSR s administrative network scope When the PIM SM domain is relatively large you can consider dividing the PIM SM domain into multiple BSR administrative domains thus sharing the administrative pressure of single BSR and providing specialized services for specific multicast groups In geographical space the BSR administrative domains are separated with each other and one router cannot belong to more than one BSR domain In other words the routers contained by the BSR domains are different from each other In multicast address each BSR administrative domain provides services for specific multicast groups These multicast group addresses usually have no intersection with
178. ages 1 Enhancement of the Hosts IGMPv3 adds the filtering mode INCLUDE EXCLUDE for the multicast source basing on the group specific query This mode allows the hosts to accept or reject multicast traffic from specified multicast sources when joining a multicast group When a host joins a multicast group AS If it expects only the multicast data from specified multicast sources such as S1 S2 Its report message can be marked with INCLUDE Sources S1 S2 If it doesn t expect any multicast data from the specified multicast sources such as S2 S2 Its report message can be marked with EXLUDE Sources S1 S2 shown in Figure 11 4 there are two multicast sources Source 1 S1 and Source 2 S2 sending multicast data to multicast group G Host B is only expecting the multicast data sending from Source 1 to G 215 S 1 osea Source 2 Receiver gt Packets S1 G Packets S2 G Figure 11 4 IGMPv3 Multicast Source Filtering If the IGMP protocol running between the hosts and the multicast routers is IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 Host B will be unable to select its expecting sources when it joins the multicast group G Thus whether needed or not the multicast data from Source 1 and Source 2 will be transferred to Host B When IGMPv3 is running between the hosts and the multicast routers Host B will only expect the multicast data sending from Source 1 to G referred as S1 G or refuse to receive t
179. ailable for Selection Port 1 0 1 Neighbor s Info System Name Chassis ID System Description Neighbor Pot Information No entry in the table Figure 16 4 Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Configure the auto refresh rate 326 gt Neighbor s Info Select the desired port to display the information of the corresponding port UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack System Name Displays the system name of the neighbor device Chassis ID Displays the Chassis ID of the neighbor device System Description Displays the system description of the neighbor Neighbor Port Displays the port number of the neighbor linking to local port Information Click to display the detail information of the neighbor 16 3 Device Statistics You can view the LLDP statistics of local device through this feature Choose the menu LLDP Device Statistics Statistic Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable i Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Global Statistics Last Update Total Inserts Total Deletes Total Drops Total Ageouts 0 days 00h 00m 00s 0 0 0 0 Neighbors Statistics UNIT 1 11011 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 10 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 o if 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11017 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 8 0 0 0 0
180. al passive mode settings for all OSPF interfaces Configuring this field will overwrite any present interface level passive mode settings OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces but does advertise attached networks as stub networks The default value is Disable fall into the networks will be imported to the associated area Choose the menu Routing OSPF Network to load the following page Network Config Process ID IP Address Wildcard Mask Area ID Network Table Process Select IP Address O v Format 100 100 0 0 S Apply Format 0 0 255 255 0 4294967295 or a b c d wildcard Mask Area ID No entry in the table Figure 10 46 OSPF Network The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Network Config Process ID IP Address Wildcard Mask Area ID gt Network Table Process Select IP Address Wildcard Mask Select the desired OSPF process for configuration The IP address of the network The wildcard mask of the network Normal subnet mask is also supported The 32 bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects If you assign an Area ID which does not exist the area will be created with default values It can be in decimal format or dotted decimal format Select one OSPF Process to display its network list Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional
181. alia First Sunday in October 02 00 First Sunday in April 03 00 Europe Last Sunday in March 01 00 Last Sunday in October 01 00 New Zealand Last Sunday in September 02 00 First Sunday in April 03 00 18 Recurring Mode Specify the DST configuration in recurring mode This configuration is recurring in use e Offset Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight Saving Time comes e Start End Time Select starting time and ending time of Daylight Saving Time Date Mode Specify the DST configuration in Date mode This configuration is one off in use e Offset Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight Saving Time comes e Start End Time Select starting time and ending time of Daylight Saving Time Anote 1 When the DST is disabled the predefined mode recurring mode and date mode cannot be configured 2 When the DST is enabled the default daylight saving time is of Europe in predefined mode 4 2 User Management User Management functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed The User Management function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages 4 2 1 User Table On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch Choose the menu System User Management User Table to load the following page
182. alid values are 0 to 15 he timer interval to generate a complete response to every neighboring gateway Upon expiration of the timeout the route is no longer valid and set to unreachable Upon expiration of the garbage collection timer the route is finally removed from the tables You could add the network to enable RIP protocol here so the interface in the network would enable RIP protocol gt RIP Network List Display the network enabled in the list You could choose to delete the network here 10 8 2 Interface Config On this page you can configure advanced parameters for the RIP Choose the menu Routing RIP Interface Config to load the following page Interface Config Select IP AddressiMask Status Note Ifyou choose MDS the key ID may be in range from 1 to 255 Send Version Receive Version BS paiia Broadcast Mod Y v Y Y Y Y Y Authen Mode Key ID Key Split Horizon Poison Reverse No entry in the table Can Lappy Help Figure 10 27 RIP Interface Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Interface Config Select IP Address Mask Status Select the interface for which data is to be configured The interface IP address and subnet mask You can t change it here The interface RIP status up or down is decided by the network status You can t change it here 162 Send Version Select the version of RIP control packets the in
183. alue 22 in the Port field select SSH as the Connection type X PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Terminal 1 W d Host Name or IP address Port Bell 192 168 0 1 22 Features Connection type Window ORaw O Telnet ORlogin SSH Serial Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Specify the destination you want to connect to Load save or delete a stored session Selection Colours Connection Data Proxy Telnet Delete Rlogin SSH Kex Auth TTY x11 2 Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch Enter the login user name and password and then you can continue to configure the switch Default Settings Load Save Close window on exit OAlwas ONever Only on clean exit 192 168 0 1 PulT ogin the CLI by Application Example 2 for SSH gt Network Requirements 1 Log on to the switch via key authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch 2 PuTTY client software is recommended 29 gt Configuration Procedure 1 Select the key type and key length and generate SSH key g Pull Y Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key No key Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate a key Generate Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Save public key Save pri Parameters Type of key to generate Key type SSH 1 RSA 2 SSH
184. alue has the higher priority Figure18 4 Local Log The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Local Log Config Log Buffer Indicates the RAM for saving system log The inforamtion in the log buffer is displayed on the Log Table page It will be lost when the switch is restarted Log File Indicates the flash sector for saving system log The inforamtion in the log file will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be exported on the Backup Log page Severity Specify the severity level of the log information output to each channel Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output Status Enable Disable the channel 358 Sync Periodic Specify how frequent the log information would be synchronized to the log file 18 2 3 Remote Log Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server Log Server is to centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the whole network Choose the menu Maintenance Log Remote Log to load the following page Log Host Select Index Host IP UDP Port Severity Status O Y y O 1 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 2 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 3 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 4 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable Apply Note 1 Up to 4 log hosts are supported 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority Figure18 5 Log Host The fo
185. ame Password M Save password Language English Network Atheros AR8151 PCI E Gigabit Ether Connectie Properties P Exit Figure C 12 TP LINK 802 1X Client Enter the Name and the Password specified in the Authentication Server The length of Name and Password should be less than 16 characters 2 Click the Properties button on Figure D 12 to load the following screen for configuring the connection properties Connection properties 802 1 network connection Obtain an IP address automatically General Auto reconnect after timeout Default P OK 0 Cancel C Figure C 13 Connection Properties Send 802 1X protocol packets by Unicast When this option is selected the Client will send the EAPOL Start packets to the switch via multicast and send the 802 1X authentication packets via unicast Obtain an IP address automatically Select this option if the Client automatically obtains the IP address from DHCP server After passing the authentication the Client can be assigned the IP address by DHCP server The Client can access the network after getting the new IP address Auto reconnect after timeout Select this option to allow the Client to automatically start the connection again when it does not receive the handshake reply packets from the switch within a period 3 To continue click Connect button after entering the Name and Password on Figure D 12 Then the following screen will appear to prompt
186. ame Config Backup Config Input the backup config filename Restore Set the boot parameter to default 4 3 2 Config Restore On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous configuration Choose the menu System System Tools Config Restore to load the following page Config Restore Restore the config from the saved config file Select a backup config file and click the Import button and then you can restore to the previous config Target Unit Unit1 Configtile Browse Note After restored the startup configuration file the device must be rebootin order for the new configuration to take effect Figure 4 10 Config Restore The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Config Restore Target Unit Select the desired unit in the stack to restore it to a backup configuration Import Click the Import button to restore the backup configuration file It will take effect after the switch automatically reboots Anote 1 It will take a few minutes to restore the configuration Please wait without any operation 2 To avoid any damage please don t power down the switch while being restored 3 After being restored the current settings of the switch will be lost Wrong uploaded configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged 4 3 3 Config Backup On this page you can download the current configuration of the specified unit in the stack
187. anagement and device location details gt Elements LLDP MED Device Refers to any device which implements this Standard LLDP MED Device Type LLDP MED devices are comprised of two primary device types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices Network Connectivity Device Refers to an LLDP MED Device that provides access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device Endpoint Device Refers to an LLDP MED Device at the network edge providing some aspects of IP communications service based on IEEE 802 LAN technology Endpoint Devices may be a member of any of the Endpoint Device Classes Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes Class I Class II and Class Ill Generic Endpoint Device Class I The most basic class of Endpoint Device Media Endpoint Device Class Il The class of Endpoint Device that supports media stream capabilities Communication Device Endpoint Class III The class of Endpoint Device that directly supports end users of the IP communication system 328 Network Policy TLV The Network Policy TLV allows both Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints to advertise VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set of specific applications on that port Location Identification TLV The Location Identification TLV provides for advertisement of location identifier information to Commu
188. and port 4 is the designated port of switch B port 6 is the blocked port of switch C Port 1 Switch A XN l Port 5 Switch B Switch C Figure 8 1 Basic STP diagram gt STP Timers Hello Time Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links Max Age Max Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure Forward Delay Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds It specifies the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs the STP structure will get some corresponding change However as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the whole network at once the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately Therefore STP adopts a state transit mechanism that is the new root port and the designated port begins to forward data after twice forward delay which ensures the new configuration BPDUs are spread in the whole network gt BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode Assuming two BPDUs BPDU X and BPDU Y If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID and the root
189. and save it as a file to your computer for your future configuration restore Choose the menu System System Tools Config Backup to load the following page 22 Config Backup Export current startup configuration file Click the button Export you can save the config to your computer Target Unit Unit3 v El Note It will take a long time to export the config file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 11 Config Backup The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Config Backup Export Click the Export button to save the current configuration as a file to your computer You are suggested to take this measure before upgrading ate It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration Please wait without any operation 4 3 4 Firmware Upgrade The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page To upgrade the system is to get more functions and better performance Go to http www tp link com to download the updated firmware Choose the menu System System Tools Firmware Upgrade to load the following page Firmware Upgrade You will get the new function after upgrading the firmware Firmware File Upgrade Firmware Version 1 0 0 Build 20140122 Rel 63113 Hardware Version T3700G 28TQ 1 0 Note 1 You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading 2 Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade 3 To avoi
190. ard enable Ethernet ports to transit their states rapidly The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly are as follows 98 e The condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly The old root port of the switch stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward data e The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly The designated port is an edge port or connecting to a point to point link If the designated port is an edge port it can directly transit to forwarding state if the designated port is connecting to a point to point link it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the downstream switch through handshake gt RSTP Elements Edge Port Indicates the port connected directly to terminals P2P Link Indicates the link between two switches directly connected MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE 802 1s standard not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly but also enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links with a better load balancing mechanism Features of MSTP e MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN to instance mapping table It binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources e MSTP divides a spanning tree network into severa
191. as No Limit On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 2 configure operation as Permit configure S IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as work_time On ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 3 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named limit On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 100 to Policy limit On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy limit1 to bind to port 1 0 16 Configure requirement and 4 for 3 On ACL ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 101 On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 4 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 50 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 5 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 50 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as work_time On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named l
192. as OxFFFF to identify authentication information See Figure 6 3 Figure 10 25 RIPv2 Authentication Message e Authentication Type A value of 2 represents plain text authentication while a value of 3 indicates MD5 authentication e Authentication Authentication data including password information when plain text authentication is adopted or including key ID MD5 authentication data length and sequence number when MD5 authentication is adopted RFC 1723 only defines plain text authentication For more information about MD5 authentication please see RFC 2453 RIP Version 2 This function includes three submenus Basic Config Interface Config and RIP Database 10 8 1 Basic Config RIP Routing Information Protocol is a dynamic router protocol with Distance Vector Algorithms You could config the protocol below to active as you like Choose the menu Routing RIP Basic Config to load the following page 160 RIP Enable RIP Protocol Enable Disable Apply Global Config RIP Version RIP Distance Auto Summary Default Metric Redistribute Static Redistribute OSPF Redistribute Static Metric Redistribute OSPF Metric Update Timer Timeout Timer Garbage Timer Network Enable RIP Yy1 120 1 255 Enable Disable 12 1 15 Enable Disable Enable Disable 0 0 15 0 0 15 30 sec 1 100 default 30 180 sec 1 300 default 180
193. ase time continued for ever 3 Dynamic Assignment A network administrator assigns a range of IP addresses to DHCP server and each client computer on the LAN is configured to request an IP address from the DHCP server with a fixed period of time e g 2 hours allowing the DHCP server to reclaim and then reallocate IP addresses that are not renewed gt The Process of DHCP DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol DHCP messages from a client to a server are sent to the DHCP server port 67 and DHCP messages from a server to a client are sent to the DHCP client port 68 DHCP clients and servers both construct DHCP messages by filling in fields in the fixed format section of the message and appending tagged data items in the variable length option area The process is shown as follows 140 DHCP Client DHCP Server 1 DHCP DISCOVER 2 DHCP OFFER 3 DHCP REQUEST 4 DHCP ACK Figure 10 5 The Process of DHCP DHCP discover the client broadcasts messages on the physical subnet to discover available DHCP servers in the LAN Network administrators can configure a local router e g a relay agent to forward DHCP DISCOVER messages to a DHCP server in a different subnet DHCP offer Each server who received the DHCP DISCOVER message may respond a DHCP OFFER message that includes configuration parameters in the example below IP address to the client The server unicast the DHCP OFFER message to the client using t
194. at the IGMP router via multicast routing the multicast forwarding entries G1 and G2 in the IGMP router will guide the multicast packets to the local network and the receiver hosts can receive them IGMPv1 doesn t specially define the leave group message When a host running IGMPv1 leaves one multicast group it wouldn t send the report message to this multicast group If no member exists in the multicast group the IGMP router will not receive any report message to this multicast group thus it will delete this multicast group s corresponding multicast forwarding entries after a period of time gt IGMPv2 Work Process IGMPv2 adds the querier election mechanism and leave group mechanism based on IGMPv1 1 Querier Election Mechanism The querier election mechanism in IGMPv2 is illustrated as below 1 Every IGMP router will assume itself as the querier at its initialization and send IGMP general query message to all the hosts and routers with the multicast address 224 0 0 1 in the local network 2 After the other IGMPv2 routers in the local network receive this IGMP general query message it will compare the message s source IP address with its interface address Through the comparison the router with the smallest IP address will be elected as the querier and the other routers as the non querier 3 All the non queriers will start up a timer known as the Other Querier Present Timer This timer will be reset if th
195. ata traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction In addition RMON MIB records network statistics information of network performance and malfunction periodically based on which the management station can monitor network at any time effectively RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large scale network since it reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent gt RMON Group 313 This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard RFC1757 History Group Event Group Statistic Group and Alarm Group RMON Group Function History Group After a history group is configured the switch collects and records network statistics information periodically based on which the management station can monitor network effectively Event Group Event Group is used to define RMON events Alarms occur when an event is detected Statistic Group Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific ports Alarm Group Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold an alarm event is generated which triggers the switch to act in the set way The RMON Groups can be configured on the Statistics History Event and Alarm pa
196. ates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network The default is 1 188 Retransmit Interval Hello Interval Dead Interval Transmit Delay Cost Network Type Passive Mode MTU Ignore Database Filter Authentication Type Authentication Key ID Authentication Key The retransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 5 seconds The hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 10 seconds The dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 40 seconds The Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 1 s
197. ation e OSPF protocol supports multiple equal cost routes to one destination for load balance thus to perform more efficient data forwarding e OSPF supports VLSM route addressing by variable length subnet mask e OSPF supports the message authentication based on interfaces thus to guarantee the security of message interaction and routing calculation e OSPF supports using the reserved multicast address in the link of specific network type to reduce the influence on the other irrelevant routers 2 OSPF Common Scenario OSPF protocol is usually applied in the large complex network environment Shown as below is the instance diagram of a large company where the large network is divided by department OSPF protocol works as the fundamental routing protocol among routers which could guarantee not only the message interaction but also the network independence among departments 165 Marketing Dept Backbone Network Product Dept R amp D Dept Figure 10 29 Common Scenario for OSPF routing protocol The network topology is more prone to changes in an autonomous system of larger size The network adjustment of any one router could destabilize the whole network and cause massive OSPF packets to be forward repeatedly and all the routers need to recalculate the routes which would waste lots of network resources In this case area partition would be an effective solution The routers only need to maintain the same link stat
198. ation Method Guest VLAN and various Timers Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Global Config to load the following page 298 Global Config 802 1 enable O Auth Method EAP MD5 v Guest VLAN enable Guest VLAN ID rae Authentication Config Quiet enable O Quiet Period Retry Times 3 Supplicant 3 Timeout Server Timeout 3 disable Apply disable 2 4094 disable sec 1 999 o sec 1 9 sec 1 9 Figure 14 22 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Global Config 802 1X Auth Method Guest VLAN Guest VLAN ID Authentication Config Quiet Quiet Period Enable Disable the 802 1X function Select the Authentication Method from the pull down list EAP MD5 IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The EAP protocol packets with authentication data can be encapsulated in the advanced protocol such as RADIUS packets to be transmitted to the authentication server PAP IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The transmission of EAP packets is terminated at the switch and the EAP packets are converted to the other protocol such as RADIUS packets for transmission Enable Disable the Guest VLAN fea
199. ay address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to the normal Host 2 Host updates its ARP table The original ARP entry 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 12 34 56 Attacker Host IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 14 10 ARP Attack Imitating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway address to the normal Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway the Host will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Gateway The attacker sends the wrong IP address to MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the Gateway which causes that the Gateway can not communicate with the legal terminal Hosts normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure 285 IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 2 Gateway updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 12 34 56 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Gateway 3 Gateway tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken
200. ayed on this screen 138 Static Routing Config Destination Subnet Mask Next Hop Distance Static Route Table Select Destination Address Subnet Mask Next Hop Distance Metric Specify the destination IP address of the packets Specify the subnet mask of the destination IP address Enter the IP address to which the packet should be sent next Enter the distance metric of route The smaller the distance is the higher the priority is Specify the static route entries to modify Displays the destination IP address of the packets Displays the subnet mask of the destination IP address Displays the IP address to which the packet should be sent next Displays the distance metric of route The smaller the distance is the higher the priority is Displays the metric of the route Interface Name 10 4 DHCP Server DHCP module is used to configure the DHCP functions of the switch including two submenus DHCP Server and DHCP Relay Displays the name of the VLAN interface gt Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a network configuration protocol for hosts on TCP IP networks and it provides a framework for distributing configuration information to hosts DHCP is adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options DHCP captures the behavior of DHCP participants so the administrator can manage the parameters of the host in
201. backup router receives VRRP packet it will compare its priority with that of the advertisement packet If of higher priority the backup router will become the master router otherwise it will maintain Backup state e In non preemptible mode physical routers in the backup group will maintain Master or Backup state as long as the master router functions normally Even if backup router is given higher priority it cannot become a master router in non preempt mode The VRRP priority ranges from 0 to 255 the bigger the number is the higher the priority is Configurable range is 1 254 The priority value O is reserved for the current master when it gives up its role as master router For example when master router receives shutdown message it would send VRRP packet with priority 0 to the backup group which the interface belongs to The priority of the IP address owner must be 255 Therefore if there exists an IP address owner in the backup group and it works normally it must be the master router 3 State Transition VRRP defines three state modes Initialize Master and Backup Only in Master state can master router provide service for forwarding request via virtual IP address and forward VRRP packet When the system just starts it comes to Initialize state If the virtual router is not given a virtual IP address the system would maintain Initialize state If the virtual IP address is configured properly when the system receives startup mes
202. belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6 is 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC7 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 TC2 to TC6 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Equ Mode Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 1 3 802 1P Priority On this page you can configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority tag id CoS id and the TC id 802 1P gives the Pri field in 802 1Q tag a recommended definition This field ranging from 0 7 is used to divide packets into 8 priorities 802 1P Priority is enabled by default so the packets with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode but the untagged packets are mapped based on port priority mode With the same value the 802 1P priority tag and the CoS will be mapped to the same TC Choose the menu QoS DiffServ 802 1P Priority to load the following page Priority and CoS mapping Config Select Tag id Co8 id Queue TC id E TC2 TCO TC1 TC3 TC4 TC5 TC6 TC OOOOOO0000 Al Note Among the Queue TC id TCO TC1 TC the bigger value the higher priority Figure 12 8 802 1P Priority The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 802 1P Priority Config 802 1P Priority Selec
203. c type of the default route Two types are supported External Type 1 and External Type 2 The default value is External Type 2 183 OSPF Config ASBR Mode ABR Status Distance RFC 1583 Compatibility SPF Delay Time SPF Hold Time External LSA Count External LSA Checksum LSAs Originated LSAs Received Default Metric Maximum Paths Auto Cost Reference Bandwidth The router is an Autonomous System Boundary Router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol or if it is configured to originate an AS External LSA advertising the default route The router is an Area Border Router if it has active non virtual interfaces in two or more OSPF areas Specify OSPF route distance When more than two protocols have routes to the same destination only the route which have smallest distance will be inserted to IP routing table The valid value ranges from 0 to 255 and the default is 110 Select the preference rules that will be used when choosing among multiple AS external LSAs advertising the same destination If you select Enable the preference rules will be those defined by RFC 1583 Else the preference rules will be those defined in RFC 2328 which will prevent routing loops when AS external LSAs for the same destination have been originated from different areas All routers in the OSPF domain must be configured the same The default value is Enable The number of seconds fr
204. ce in a MAC VLAN if its MAC address is bound to VLAN the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current MAC VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it If no MAC VLAN is matched the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission 2 When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it basing on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded 3 Ifthe MAC address of a Host is classified into 802 1Q VLAN please set its connected port of switch to be a member of this 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally 7 3 1 MAC VLAN On this page you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table Choose the menu VLAN MAC VLAN to load the following page Create MAC VLAN MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 Description 8 characters maximum VLAN ID MAC VLAN Table Select Total MAC VLAN 0 MAC Address 1 4094 Description VLAN ID Operati
205. ce of the network will be reduced extremely Scan SYNFIN The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1 The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is used to request disconnection Therefore the packet of this type is illegal The switch can defend this type of illegal packet Xmascan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index FIN URG and PSH field set to 1 NULL Scan Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control fields set to 0 During the TCP connection and data transmission the packets with all the control fields set to O are considered as the illegal packets SYN packet with its source port less than 1024 The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and source port less than 1024 Blat Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and destination port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1 Similar to the Land Attack the system performance of the attacked Host is reduced since the Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker Ping Flooding The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication SYN SYN ACK Flooding The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the Server Upon receiving the request p
206. ch including four submenus STP Config Port Config MSTP Instance and STP Security 8 1 STP Config The STP Config function for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch can be implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages 8 1 1 STP Config Before configuring spanning trees you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each spanning tree instance Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance On this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Config to load the following page Global Config Spanning Tree Enable Disable Mode STP v Parameters Config CIST Priority 32768 0 61440 in increments of 4096 Hello Time 2 sec 1 10 Max Age 120 sec 6 40 nn Apply Forward Delay 15 sec 4 30 TxHoldCount 5 pps 1 20 Max Hops 20 hop 1 40 Figure 8 4 STP Config 101 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Spanning Tree Select Enable Disable STP function globally on the switch Mode Select the desired STP version on the switch e STP Spanning Tree Protocol e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Parameters Config CIST Priority Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch for comparison in the CIST CIST priority is an important criterion on determining the
207. ches that packets pass through The root path cost of the root bridge is 0 Bridge Priority The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0 61440 The lower value priority has the higher priority The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root bridge Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Port Priority The port priority can be set to an integral multiple of 16 in the range of 0 240 The lower value priority has the higher priority The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root port Path Cost Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP By calculating the path cost STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring network to form a tree topological ring free network The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree Switch A B and C are connected together in order After STP generation switch A is chosen as root bridge the path from port 2 to port 6 is blocked e Bridge Switch A is the root bridge in the whole network switch B is the designated bridge of switch C 96 e Port Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C port 1 and 2 are the designated ports of switch A
208. ckets y classification SP Mode Figure 12 4 SP Mode WRR Mode Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain service time The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource WRR queue overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority can not get service for a long time In WRR mode though the queues are scheduled in order the service time for each queue is not fixed that is to say if a queue is empty the next queue will be scheduled In this way the bandwidth resources are made full use of The default weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 TC3 TC4 TC5 TC6 and TC7 is 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Packets are mapped to different priority queues A it N amp it gt feel Packets in TCO TC7 are it forwarded following the ratio 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 es Gila 107 Wa E Packets sent via this interface Egress interface aa a a ID le LS Gaas ci 1 Sa a NS Moa coo w WRR Mode 4 2 Weight value Packets classification TC0 TC1 TC2 TC3 TC4 TC5 TC6 TC7 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Figure 12 5 WRR Mode SP WRR Mode Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling groups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside
209. continuous Network Segment gt Link State Database When the routers in the network completely synchronize the link state database through LSA exchanges they can calculate the shortest path tree by basing themselves as the root node The OSPF protocol routing calculation is simply presented as below 1 Each OSPF router would generate LSA according to its own link state or routing information and then send it through the update packets to the other OSPF routers in the network LSA is to describe the network topology and the routing information For instance Router LSA describes the link state of routers Summary LSA describes the inter area route and so on 2 Each OSPF router collects LSA advertised by the other routers to form an LSDB All the Router LSA and Network LSA in the LSDB describe the entire intra area network topology while the other types of LSA describe the route to a certain destination in other areas or external AS 3 When all the routers in the network completely synchronize their LSDB each OSPF router will calculate a loop free topology by SPF algorithm to describe the shortest path to every destination in the network as it knows This loop free topology is so called the SPF algorithm tree 4 Each router will establish its own routing table according to the SPF algorithm tree gt OSPF Protocol Packet Type During the entire learning process OSPF routing protocol uses five types of packet all of which are IP pac
210. ct Destination Port C QoS Remark DSCP Local Priority Create Action Select Policy Select ACL S Mirror Select Policy Select ACL v Kbps 1 10000000 Figure 13 11 Action Create Select the name of the policy Select the ACL for configuration in the policy Select S Mirror to mirror the data packets in the policy to the specific port 269 S Condition Redirect QoS Remark Select S Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in the policy e Rate Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets those match the corresponding ACL e Out of Band Specify the disposal way of the data packets those are transmitted beyond the rate Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets in the policy e Destination Port Forward the data packets those match the corresponding ACL to the specific port Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS settings e DSCP Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL e Local Priority Specify the local priority for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL 13 4 Policy Binding Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port VLAN The policy will take effect only when it is bound to a port VLAN In the same way the port VLAN will receive the data packets and process them based on the
211. ct QoS Remark Operation No entry in the table al Figure 13 9 Policy Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Options Select Policy Select name of the desired policy for view If you want to delete the desired policy please click the Delete button gt Action Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy Index Enter the index of the policy ACL ID Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy S Mirror Displays the source mirror port of the policy S Condition Displays the source condition added to the policy Redirect Displays the redirect added to the policy QoS Remark Displays the QoS remark added to the policy Operation Edit the information of this action 13 3 2 Policy Create On this page you can create the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create to load the following page 268 Create Policy Policy Name Create Policy Policy Name Figure 13 10 Create Policy The following entries are displayed on this screen Enter the name of the policy 13 3 3 Action Create On this page you can add ACLs and create corresponding actions for the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Action Create to load the following page The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Action Select Policy Select ACL CO S Mirror Port O Condition Rate Out of Band O Redire
212. cted device which is the base of the packet forwarding The capacity of MAC Address Table is fixed MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the network information illegally The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and quickly occupy the MAC Address Table When the MAC Address Table is full the switch will broadcast the packets to all the ports At this moment the attacker can obtain the network information via various sniffers and attacks When the MAC Address Table is full the packets traffic will flood to all the ports which results in overload lower speed packets drop and even breakdown of the system Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port The port with Port Security feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum the port will stop learning Thereafter the other devices with the MAC address unlearned can not access to the network via this port Choose the menu Switching Port Port Security to load the following page 47 Port Security UNIT 3 Select Port 3 0 1 3 0 2 3 0 3 3 0 4 3 0 5 3 0 6 3 0 7 3 0 8 3 0 9 3 0 10 3 0 11 3 0 12 3 0 13 3 0 14 3 0 15 E n o CN o CN CN A Note Max Learned MAC Learned Num Learn Mode Status 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
213. cted to an NTP Server e Time Zone Select your local time e Primary Secondary NTP Server Enter the IP address for the NTP Server e Update Rate Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server When this option is selected the administrator PC s clock is utilized 17 Anote 1 The system time will be restored to the default when the switch is restarted and you need to reconfigure the system time of the switch 2 When Get Time from NTP Server is selected and no time server is configured the switch will get time from the time server of the Internet if it has connected to the Internet 4 1 4 Daylight Saving Time Here you can configure the Daylight Saving Time of the switch Choose the menu System System Info Daylight Saving Time to load the following page DST Config DST Status Disable vw Predefined Mode USA Recurring Mode Offset Start Time End Time Date Mode Offset Start Time End Time Australia Europe New Zealand bo minutes Week Day Month 01 00 Week E Day Month 01 00 150 minutes 00 00 YYIMM DD HH MM 00 00 YYiMM DD HH MM Figure 4 6 Daylight Saving Time The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DST Config DST Status Predefined Mode Enable or Disable DST Select a predefined DST configuration USA Second Sunday in March 02 00 First Sunday in November 02 00 Austr
214. cted to the company LAN via Port12 of switch A e Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host e P host in VLAN10 is served by IP server while Apple Talk host is served by AppleTalk server e Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server 80 gt Network Diagram Y IP Server AppleTalk Server Switch B Switch A Port 1 11 E AppleTalk IP host host gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 5 Configure the Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS and configure the link type ports of Port 12 as GENERAL 6 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 12 and Port 13 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag 7 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS and configure the link type of ports Port 3 as GENERAL 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN
215. ction globally Global Rate Limit Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP messages that can be forwarded by the switch per second The excessive massages will be discarded Decline Rate Threshold Select the value to specify the minimum transmission rate of the Decline packets to trigger the Decline protection for the specific port Decline Rate Limit Select the value to specify the maximum amount of Decline packets The traffic flow of the corresponding port will be limited to be this value if the transmission rate of the Decline packets exceeds the Decline Rate Threshold gt Option 82 Config Option 82 Support Existed Option 82 field Enable Disable the Option 82 feature Select the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host Keep Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets 283 14 2 2 Port Config Customization Circuit ID Remote ID Replace Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one Drop Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field Enable Disable the switch to define the Option 82 Enter the sub option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82 Enter the sub option Remote ID for the customized Option 82 Choose the menu Network Security gt DHCP Snooping Port Config to load the following page DHCP Snooping Port Configuration UNIT 1 Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify
216. curity Supports multiple industry standard user authentication methods such as 802 1x RADIUS IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Dynamic ARP Inspection blocks ARP packets from unauthorized hosts preventing man in the middle attacks L2 L3 L4 Access Control Lists restrict untrusted access to the protected resource Provides SSHv1 v2 SSL 2 0 3 0 and TLS v1 for access encryption e Manageability IP Clustering provides high scalability and easy Single IP Management Supports Telnet CLI SNMP v1 v2c v3 RMON and web access Port Mirroring enables monitoring selected ingress egress traffic DHCP relay for forwarding User Datagram Protocol UDP broadcasts DHCP server for automatic assignment of IP addresses and other DHCP options to IP hosts 2 3 Appearance Description 2 3 1 Front Panel a bbc OA A We I Console Port LEDs 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 Port SFP Port SFP Port Unit ID LED Figure 2 1 Front Panel The following parts are located on the front panel of the switch gt Console Port Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch gt LEDs LED Status Indication On The switch is powered on PWR Off The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal Flashing Power supply is abnormal
217. curity insurance is provided In a safe network no authentication can be set as authentication method e Simple text password in a network where security is possible to be threatened simple text password is recommended The router which forwards the VRRP packets fills the 200 gt authentication data in the VRRP packets The router which has received the VRRP packets compares the data with that in local configuration If they are the same the VRRP packet received is considered legitimate If not it would be considered as illegitimacy MD5 authentication in a highly unsecured network MD5 authentication is recommended The router which sends the VRRP packets conducts digest operation on VRRP packets using authentication data and MD5 algorithm The result is saved in Authentication Header The router which has received the VRRP packet conducts the same digest operation and compares the result with the content in Authentication Header If they match the VRRP packet received is considered legitimate If not it would be considered as illegitimacy Interface Tracking This function enhances the backup function If interface tracking is enabled when the master router s other interfaces which are not in this backup group for example the uplink interface fail it would lower its priority value automatically Therefore router with more available interfaces and better performance can be elected as master router and the stability of backup
218. d Server B is in the same VLAN e PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other gt Network Diagram Switch A Server B Server A Port7 Switch B PCA gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectively 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 2 and Port 3 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 4 72 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 7 Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectively 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 6 and Port 8 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 6 and Port 7 7 3 MAC VLAN MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts A MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID For the devi
219. d VLAN 5 Enable IGMP Snooping function Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page Enable IGMP Snooping function for port 3 port4 and port 5 on Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Port Config page Enable Multicast VLAN Enable Multicast VLAN configure the VLAN ID of a multicast VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page Check Multicast VLAN Port 3 5 and Multicast VLAN 3 will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page 128 9 3 Multicast IP In a network receivers can join different multicast groups appropriate to their needs The switch forwards multicast streams based on multicast address table The Multicast IP can be implemented on Multicast IP Table and Static Multicast IP page 9 3 1 Multicast IP Table On this page you can view the multicast IP table on the switch Choose the menu Multicast Multicast IP Multicast IP Table to load the following page Search Option Search Option All il Multicast IP Table Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port Type No entry in the table The number of multicast groups is 0 Figure 9 9 Multicast IP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly e All Dis
220. d damage please dont turn off the device while upgrading 4 After upgrading the device will reboot automatically Ave 1 Don t interrupt the upgrade Figure 4 12 Firmware Upgrade 2 Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade 3 To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while upgrading 23 4 After upgrading the device will reboot automatically 5 You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading 4 3 5 System Reboot On this page you can reboot the specified unit switch in the stack and return to the login page Please save the current configuration before rebooting to avoid losing the configuration unsaved Choose the menu System System Tools System Reboot to load the following page System Reboot Target Unit All Unit Save Config O Reboot Note To avoid damage please dont turn off the device while rebooting Figure 4 13 System Reboot Anote To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while rebooting 4 3 6 System Reset On this page you can reset the specified unit in the stack to the default All the settings will be cleared after the switch is reset Choose the menu System System Tools gt System Reset to load the following page System Reset Target Unit All Unit Reset Note The System Reset option will restore the configuration to default and your current settings will be lost Figure 4 14 System
221. d is used to establish and maintain the multicast member relationships between the IP host and its directly neighboring multicast routers So far there are three IGMP versions e IGMPv1 defined in RFC 1112 e IGMPv2 defined in RFC 2236 e IGMPv3 defined in RFC 3376 All IGMP versions support ASM model and IGMPv3 can be directly applied in SSM model gt IGMPv1 Work Mechanism IGMPv1 is mainly based on the query and response mechanism to manage the multicast group members When there are multiple multicast routers in the subnet all of them can receive IGMP membership report message A specific router needs to be chosen from these routers through the querier election mechanism and it will works as the querier to send IGMP query message In IGMPv1 the DR Designated Router is elected according to the multicast routing protocol such as PIM as the exclusive IGMP querier to forward the multicast information Router A Ethernet Host A Host B Host C G2 G1 G1 Figure 11 3 IGMP Query and Response As shown in Figure 11 3 Suppose Host B and Host C expect to receive the multicast traffic sending to multicast group G1 and Host A expects to receive the multicast traffic sending to multicast group G2 The basic process of the host joining the multicast group and the IGMP querier Router B maintaining the multicast group membership is as below 1 Instead of waiting for the IGMP query message from the IGMP querier the host w
222. d on the destination MAC address of the packets Address Table contains the port based MAC address information which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly The entries in the Address Table can be updated by auto learning or configured manually Most the entries are generated and updated by auto learning In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably The address filtering feature allows the switch to filter the undesired packets and forbid its forwarding so as to improve the network security The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following Being kept after reboot Relationship between Type Configuration Way Aging out if the configuration is the bound MAC saved address and the port Static Manually configuring No Yes The bound MAC Address Table address can not be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Dynamic Automatically Yes No The bound MAC Address Table learning address can be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Filtering Manually configuring No Yes Address Table Table 6 1 Types and features of Address Table This function includes four submenus Address Table Static Address Dynamic Address and Filtering Address 6 4 1 Address Table On this page you can view all the information of the Address Table Choose
223. dded to the multicast group the switch will drop the IGMP report message In that way the multicast streams will not be transmitted to this port which allows you to control hosts joining the multicast group The profile and binding relationship configurations are shared between this page and 11 2 5 Profile Binding 9 4 1 Profile Config On this page you can configure an IGMP profile Choose the menu Multicast Multicast Filter Profile Config to load the following page Profile Creation Profile ID 1 999 create Mode O Permit Deny Search Option Search Option All ba IGMP Profile Info Select Profile ID Mode Bind Ports Operation No entry in the table Al Figure 9 11 Multicast Filter The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Profile Creation Profile ID Specify the Profile ID you want to create and it should be a number between 1 and 999 Mode The attributes of the profile e Permit Only permit the IP address within the IP range and deny others e Deny Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit others 131 gt Search Option Profile ID gt IGMP Profile Info Select Profile ID Mode Bind Ports Operation Enter the profile ID the desired entry must carry Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the profile ID Displays the attribute of the profile e Permit Only permit the IP address within the IP range and deny o
224. ddress The following table shows the OUI addresses of several manufacturers The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by default The OUI Address entries below can be modified manually Number OUI Address Vendor 1 00 01 E3 00 00 00 Siemens phone 2 00 03 6B 00 00 00 Cisco phone 3 00 04 0D 00 00 00 Avaya phone 4 00 60 B9 00 00 00 Philips NEC phone 5 00 DO 1E 00 00 00 Pingtel phone 6 00 E0 75 00 00 00 Polycom phone 7 00 E0 BB 00 00 00 3com phone Table 12 1 OUI addresses on the switch gt Port Voice VLAN Mode A voice VLAN can operate in two modes automatic mode and manual mode Automatic Mode In this mode the switch automatically adds a port which receives voice packets to voice VLAN and determines the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC of the UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on The aging time of voice VLAN can be configured on the switch If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress port within 255 the aging time the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN Voice ports are automatically added into or removed from voice VLAN Manual Mode You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN and then the switch will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC address of packets and matching OUI address In practice the port voice VLAN mode is con
225. ddress entries only UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack gt Address Table UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack MAC Address Displays the MAC address learned by the switch 60 VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding port number or link aggregation number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging status of the MAC address 6 4 2 Static Address The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed manually independent of the aging time In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding without learning the address The static MAC address learned by the port with Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table Choose the menu Switching MAC Address Static Address to load the following page Create Static Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID 1 4094 Port UNIT 1 Ee AEA 28 LAJE34 E51 EZI RARA 8 19 17 RY 21 23 25 E Unselected Port s cy Selected Port s ES Not Available for Selection Search Option Search Option AN J Static Address Table UNIT 1 Select MAC Address
226. different functions e Guest Guest only can view the settings without the right to edit and modify Select Enable Disable the user configuration Type a password for users login Retype the password Select password display mode e Admin Displays the password with plaintext in configure file e Cipher Displays the password with ciphertext Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user information It is multi optional The current user information can t be deleted Displays the current user ID user name access level and user status 20 Operation Click the Edit button of the desired entry and you can edit the corresponding user information After modifying the settings please click the Modify button to make the modification effective Access level and user status of the current user information can t be modified 4 3 System Tools The System Tools function allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch can be implemented on Boot Config Config Restore Config Backup Firmware Upgrade System Reboot and System Reset pages 4 3 1 Boot Config On this page you can configure the boot file and the configuration file of the switch When the switch is powered on it will start up with the startup image If it fails it will try to start up with the backup image If this fails too you will enter into the bootutil menu of the switch When the startup process is finished the switch will read
227. ding Option Host Name Po 20 characters maximum IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID Po 1 4094 Protect Type None Bo Port UNIT 1 Aea Es Lbs ISI 60 79 BS on d o E Unselected Selected ES Not Available Port s Port s for Selection Manual Binding Table UNIT 1 Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision No entry in the table All Delete Help Entry Count0 Note 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect Figure 14 2 Manual Binding The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Manual Binding Option Host Name Enter the Host Name IP Address Enter the IP Address of the Host MAC Address Enter the MAC Address of the Host VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID Protect Type Select the Protect Type for the entry Port Select the number of port connected to the Host UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack gt Manual Binding Table UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired entry to be deleted It is multi optional Host Name Displays the Host Name here IP Address Displays the IP Address of the Host MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the Host VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID here Port Displays the n
228. discarded Decline Protect Select Enable Disable the Decline Protect feature LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 14 3 ARP Inspection According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 11 1 3 ARP Scanning it can be found that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one another or access to external network via Gateway However since ARP protocol is implemented with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted there are high security risks during ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network Thus the cheating attacks against ARP such as imitating Gateway cheating Gateway cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding Attack frequently occur to the network especially to the large network such as campus network and so on The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks gt Imitating Gateway The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response packets which causes that the Host can not access the network normally The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 3 Host tries to communicate with Gateway via the MAC Address 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gatew
229. e By default all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN i e Guest VLAN Users belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being authenticated But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources After passing the authentication the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to access the other resources With the Guest VLAN function enabled users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802 1X client program or upgrade their 802 1x clients without being authenticated If there is no supplicant past the authentication on the port in a certain time the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN With 802 1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured after the maximum number retries have been made to send the EAP Request Identity packets and there are still ports that have not sent any response back the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to their link types Only when the corresponding user passes the 802 1X authentication the port will be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN In addition the port will back to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off The 802 1X function is implemented on the Global Config Port Config and Radius Server pages 14 6 1 Global Config On this page you can enable the 802 1X authentication function globally and control the authentication process by specifying the Authentic
230. e transmitted to the correct users and servers 2 Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted 3 Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology SSL uses key pair to encrypt decrypt information A key pair refers to a public key contained in the certificate and its corresponding private key By default the switch has a certificate self signed certificate and a corresponding private key The Certificate Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair After SSL is effective you can log on to the Web management page via https 192 168 0 1 For the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate you will be prompted that The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority or Certificate Errors Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or continue to this website On this page you can configure the SSL function Choose the menu System lt Access Security SSL Config to load the following page Global Config SSL Enable Disable Help Certificate Download Certificate File Browse Key Download Key File Browse Note 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work 2 The SSL certif
231. e 3 2 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the Login button or press the Enter key TP LINK UserName admin Password eones Figure 3 2 Login 3 2 Configuration After a successful login the main page will appear as Figure 3 3 and you can configure the function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen 12 TP LINK T3700G 28TQ System Summary Device Description em Time Daylight Port Info System UNIT 1 System Info AE CA areal ES OS E 19 16 18 00 22 24 22 CaF 28 User Management A DO DO DM ED A DD DD System Tools CE Md Dl at Dl Dl al E Access Security Sap gee aoe a da 18 1 198 2 23 CIES 5 Stack Switching itchi System Info witching e 7 VLAN M System Description 28 Port Gigabit L3 Managed Switch Spanning Tree i S Device Name T37006 28TQ Multicast R Device Location SHENZHEN Routing m CREAD Se Contact Information http Mww tp link corn Multicast Routing TE Hardware Version T37006 28TQ 1 0 ACL Firmware Version 1 0 0 Build 20140120 Rel 78992 iS Mac Address D0 04 EB 13 12 B5 Network Security SNMP SS System Time 2006 01 01 08 01 51 LLDP Running Time 0 Day 0 Hour 2 Min 17 Sec SubSloti Status Not Present Cluster Sine System Temperature 29 5 Degree Celsius Fan Speed Mode Slow Save Config Fan Status Ok Index Power Supply Module Present amp Good Logourt Redundant Power Supply Present
232. e Type Rising Threshold Rising Event a Falling Event Alarm Type Interval sec Owner Status v v v Y v v v 1 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 2 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 3 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 4 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 5 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 6 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 7 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable O 8 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 9 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 10 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 11 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable 12 RecBytes Absolute 100 100 All 1800 monitor Disable Lan Lappy J Her Figure 15 12 Alarm Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Alarm Table Select Index Variable Statistics Sample Type Rising Threshold Rising Event Falling Threshold Falling Event Alarm Type Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Select the alarm variables from the pull down list Select the RMON statistics entry from which we get the value of the selected alarm variable Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds e Absolute Compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval e Delta
233. e VLAN interface of the candidate RP Priority Displays the priority of the candidate RP Interval Displays the interval of the candidate RP Next advertisement Displays the remaining time to send the next RP time advertisement packet 11 4 5 RP Mapping Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM RP Mapping to load the following page 240 Search Option Search Option ALL A Group to RP Mappings Information Group RP Info Source Priority Holdtime Expires No entry in the table Figure 11 24 RP Mapping The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Search Option e ALL Select All to display all entries e Group Select Group and enter the group IP address of desired entry e RP Select RP and enter the RP IP address of desired entry gt Group to RP Mappings Information Group Displays the group address RP Displays the RP address Info Source Displays the BSR address which announce the RP information Priority Displays the priority of the RP Holdtime Displays the holdtime of the RP Expires Displays the expiry time of the RP If RP is static the expiry time will be Never 11 4 6 RP Info Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM gt RP Info to load the following page Search Option Search Option ALL g RP Information Group RP No entry in the table Figure 11 25 RP Info The following entries are displayed on this screen 241 gt Search Option S
234. e connection and Ring indicates ring type connection Displays the authentication mode used in stack creation Displays the unit number of the member switch 39 Role MAC Address Priority Version Status gt Stack Port Info Stack Port Status Neighbor 5 1 2 Stack Config Displays the stack role of the member switch in the stack There are two options Master and Slave Displays the MAC address of the member switch Displays the member priority of the member switch The higher the value is the more likely the member will be elected as the master Displays the current firmware version of the member switch Displays the stack status of the member switch Displays the stack port number Displays the stack port status Displays the MAC address of the switch which is directly connecting to the stack port On this page you can configure the basic parameters of the stack function Choose the menu Stack Management Stack Config to load the following page Stack Config Stack Name Stack 1 30 characters Stack Auth Mode None w Stack Auth Key 1 16 characters 1 16 characters Input Again Stack Priority Config Select Switch O O 3 Stack Port Config UNIT 3 Select Stack Port O O 3 0 25 O 3 0 26 Note Role Master Mac Address Priority E 00 0A EB 00 13 57 5 Status Disable Disable The Stack Name and Auth Key can contain digits Eng
235. e database in their own area and then the ABR would collect the routing information from different areas and advertise to other areas For more details about area partition please refer to the following chapters gt OSPF Principles This section would introduce in details the working principles of OSPF protocol First of all let s get to know some basic concepts about the OSPF routing protocol 1 Autonomous System Autonomous System short for AS is a set of routers using the same routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF working within an AS is an internal gateway protocol 2 Router ID A router running OSPF protocol identifies its uniqueness by its router ID a 32 bit unsigned integer which could be manually assigned by the administrator or automatically selected by the router itself In case different routers might obtain the same ID in automatic selection you are recommended to configure router ID manually In RFC protocol two means of automatically electing router ID are recommended e If the loopback interfaces are configured the highest IP address among them will be selected as the router ID e If no loopback interface is configured the highest IP address among those of active router interfaces will be selected as the router ID The good stability of loopback interfaces always in active state as long as the router boots ensures that every time the router boots it would automatically elect the loopbac
236. e following section briefly introduces the concepts and rules involved in stack management stage Unit Number When the stack is running unit number is used to identify and manage member devices Unit number is unique in a stack system The factory default unit number of switch is 1 In order to keep its uniqueness before establishing stack you are kindly recommended to prepare a unit number assignment scheme and then manually configure it on each member device During unit number assignment process the master prioritizes the member devices already carrying manually assigned unit number If the unit number has not been used by other stack members the member device will keep it Otherwise the unit number is configured based on the following rules and in the order listed 1 The device which was managed by the current master before the configuration will resume its unit number 2 The device with manually assigned unit number is prior to the device whose unit number assignment mode is Auto 3 The device with the highest stack member priority value The device with the lowest MAC address As ote You can get the current unit number of the switch from the unit number LED on the front panel of the switch 2 When the stack is running if you want to change the unit number manually only the unit numbers which have not been occupied by the other member devices are available for you to choose from 37 Port Number Format The
237. e information in log file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off Log Table displays the system log information in log buffer Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Log Table to load the following page Log Info UNIT 1 Index Time Module Severity Content All Modules All Level v 4 2006 01 01 08 02 22 Log level_6 TERN a status enabled by admin on web aj 2 2006 01 01 08 02 22 Log level_6 ero status enabled by admin on web 3 3 2006 01 01 08 02 07 Log level_6 pers a status enabled by admin on web 4 2006 01 01 08 02 07 Log level_6 EP status enabled by admin on web 5 2006 01 01 08 02 00 Log level_6 py ld fa status enabled by admin on web 6 2006 01 01 08 02 00 Log level_6 e status enabled by admin on web 7 2006 01 01 08 01 43 Log level_6 PE da status enabled by admin on web 8 2006 01 01 08 01 43 Log level_6 ao status enabled by admin on web 9 2006 01 01 08 01 06 User level_3 Login the web by admin on web 192 168 0 1 46 10 2006 01 01 08 01 05 Log level_6 Setlog buffer level 7 status enabled by console 11 2006 01 01 08 01 04 Log level_6 Setlog buffer level 7 status enabled by console y Note 1 There are 8 severity levels marked with value 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority 2 This page displays logs in the log buffer and at most 511 logs are displayed Figure18 3 Log Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Info UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in th
238. e interval between two cable tests for one port must be more than 3 seconds The result is more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status The test result is just for your reference If the port is 100Mbps and its connection status is normal cable test can t get the length of the cable 18 3 2 Loopback Loopback test function looping the sender and the receiver of the signal is used to test whether the port of the switch is available as well as to check and analyze the physical connection status of the port to help you locate and solve network malfunctions Choose the menu Maintenance gt Device Diagnostics Loopback to load the following page Loopback Type Loopback Type Internal External Loopback Part UNIT 1 torta 0d Fre 018 201 627 a Es RARA RIRA 21 23 ES Unselected Portis C Selected Portis E Not Available for Selection Loopback Result Port NA Type N A Result N A Figure18 8 Loopback The following entries are displayed on this screen 361 gt Loopback Type Internal External gt Loopback Port UNIT Loopback Port gt Loopback Result Select Internal to test whether the port is available Select External to test whether the device connected to the port of the switch is available Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired port for loopback test Here you can view the loop back result 18 4 Network Diagnostics
239. e non querier receives the IGMP query message before the timer runs out otherwise the former querier will be assumed as invalid and a new querier election will be initiated 214 2 Leave Group Mechanism When a host leaves a multicast group in IGMPv2 1 2 gt The host will send leave group message to all the multicast routers in the local network with the multicast address 224 0 0 2 After receiving this leave group message the querier will send group specific query message to the multicast group that the host announces to leave The querying multicast group address is filled in the destination address field and the group address field of this group specific query message When there are other members of this multicast group in the local network these members will send their membership report messages after receiving the group specific query message within the max response time set in the query message If the querier receives the other member s membership report message of this multicast group within the max response time the querier will continue to maintain the memberships of this multicast group otherwise the querier will assume that there is no member in this multicast group and will no longer maintain its memberships IGMPv3 Work Process Compatible of and Inherited from IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 IGMPv3 further enhances the control capacity of the hosts and broaden the functions of the query and report mess
240. e port and then configure NDP parameters Optional On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable the NDP function on the switch 2 Enable the NTDP function Optional On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable globally and for the port the NTDP function on the switch and then configure NTDP parameters 3 Establish a cluster and Optional On Cluster Cluster Cluster Config page configure the related establish a cluster and configure the related parameters parameters 4 Manage the device in the Optional On Cluster Cluster gt Member Config page cluster select the desired member switches and click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page for configuration Or On Cluster Cluster Collect Topology page double click the icon of the switch to view its detailed information click the icon and then click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page for configuration gt Toconfigure the switch to be a member switch in the cluster please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable the NDP function Optional On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable the globally and for the port NDP function on the switch and then configure NDP parameters 2 Enable the NTDP function Optional On Cluster NTDP NTDP Config page enable globally and for the port and then configure NTDP parameters the NTDP function on the switch 3
241. e port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In this status the port is not participating in the STP LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Anote 1 Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU protection function as well This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state rapidly but also secures your network 2 All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point to point links 3 When the link of a port is configured as a point to point link the spanning tree instances owning this port are configured as point to point links If the physical link of a port is not a point to point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point to point link temporary loops may be incurred 8 3 MSTP Instance MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN to instance mapping table VLAN to spanning tree mapping By adding MSTP instances it binds several VLANs to an instance to realize the load balance based on instances Only when the switches have the same MST region name MST region revision and VLAN to Instance mapping table the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config Instance Config and Instance Port Config pages 8 3 1 Region Config On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region
242. e router in a network segment rather than the features of the router on the network Every network segment needs to elect a DR and a BDR to synchronize the routing information The configuration of router interface parameters needs to be done on the basis of network planning gt OSPF Working Process In the following we would take the example of two routers initiating interface OSPF protocol to introduce the working process of OSPF routing protocol in the Ethernet model 1 The router interface initiates the OSPF protocol and then the interfaces in the same network segment would discover neighbors by sending Hello packets If the interfaces are connected on the same public data link and the area IDs authentication information network subnet Hello data interval and neighbor router dead interval are all matched the two routers would put each other in its neighbor table 2 f the receiver discovers its own ID on the neighbor table of the Hello packet a successful mutual communication would be established And then they will elect DR and BDR according to such parameters as the interface priority and the router ID while if DR and BDR already exist in the network they will be accepted 3 After DR and BDR are determined the master and slave one will be elected between the DR BDR and the other routers on the network and then the link state database synchronization will start 4 On the network the routers and DR BDR will mutually unicast
243. e same When the stack is work normally any global configuration of users will be recorded to the current configuration files of master and then be synchronized to the other members in the stack 2 WY Each stack member only saves the configuration of its own ports Even when user sets the configuration for all ports the configuration will also be saved and implemented only on the related stack member which the ports belong to Stack Maintenance Stack maintenance mainly functions to monitor the join and leave of member devices collect the new topology at any times and maintain the current topology When the stack is operating normally packets are transmitted constantly between stack members The switch can quickly judge the link status of the stack port via monitoring the response of the packets When the switch detects the link status changes it will recollect system topology and update topology database to ensure the normal operation of the stack The events that will change the link status of the stack port which thus affecting the system topology include stack member failure or leave new member s coming link failure or failure recovery etc When the master switch fails the stack system elects a new master from the remaining members to succeed the previous master 38 5 1 Stack Management Before configuring the stack we highly recommend you to prepare the configuration planning with a Clear set of the role and func
244. e stack Index Displays the index of the log information Time Displays the time when the log event occurs The log can get the correct time after you configure on the System gt System Info gt System Time Web management page 357 Module Displays the module which the log information belongs to You can select a module from the drop down list to display the corresponding log information Severity Displays the severity level of the log information You can select a severity level to display the log information whose severity level value is the same or smaller Content Displays the content of the log information More 1 The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity The higher the information severity is the lower the corresponding level is 2 This page displays logs in the log buffer and at most 511 logs are displayed 18 2 2 Local Log Local Log is the log information saved in switch By default all system logs are saved in log buffer and the function of saving logs to the log file in the flash is disabled On this page you can set the output channel for logs Choose the menu Maintenance Log Local Log to load the following page Local Log Config Select Channel Severity Status Sync Periodic O y y O buffer level_7 Enable O flash level_2 Disable 24 hour s Note 1 Local log includes 2 channels log buffer and log file 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller v
245. e subnet mask of the IP Pool Lease Time Displays the lease time of the IP Pool 147 Operation Allows you to view or modify the information of the corresponding IP Pool e Edit Click to modify the settings of the Pool e Detail Click to get the information of the Pool 10 4 3 Manual Binding In this page you can specify the IP address for specific clients and then the switch will supply these specified parameters to them only for ever Choose the menu Routing DHCP Server Manual Binding to load the following page Manual Binding Pool Name v IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 Binding Mode Client ld v Client Id 200 letters maximum in Hexadecimal Hardware Address Format 00 11 22 33 44 55 Hardware Type 7 Manual Binding Table Select Pool Name Client ld Hardware Address IP Address Hardware Type Operation No entry in the table Al Figure 10 11 Manual Binding The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Manual Binding Pool Name IP Address Binding Mode Client ID Hardware Address Hardware Type Select the IP Pool containing the IP address to be bound Specify the IP address to be bound Select the binding mode of the manual binding Specify the identifier of the client Specify the hardware address to be bound Select the hardware protocol of the client gt Manual Binding Table Displays the list of the configured binding entrie
246. e switch 16 System Contact Enter your contact information 4 1 3 System Time System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running On this page you can configure the system time and the settings here will be used for other time based functions like ACL You can manually set the system time get UTC automatically if it has connected to an NTP server or synchronize with PC s clock as the system time Choose the menu System System Info System Time to load the following page Time Info Current System Time Current Time Source Time Config O Manual Date Time 2006 01 01 08 36 19 Sunday Manual GetTime from NTP Server Time Zone Primary Sever Secondary Sever Update Rate UTC 08 00 Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi Singapore v 13310092 139 78 100 163 he hour s O Synchronize with PC s Clock Figure 4 5 System Time The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Info Current System Time Current Time Source Displays the current time source of the switch gt Time Config Manual Get Time from NTP Server Synchronize with PC S Clock Displays the current date and time of the switch When this option is selected you can set the date and time manually When this option is selected you can configure the time zone and the IP Address for the NTP Server The switch will get UTC automatically if it has conne
247. e value of the length octet does not include the Code and Length octets The common options are illustrated as below 1 option 1 Subnet Mask option The subnet mask option is option1 which identifies the assigned IP address with network and its length is 4 octets 2 option 3 Router option The router option is option 3 which specifies an IP address for routers on the client s subnet 3 option 6 DNS option The DNS option is option 6 and it assigns the IP address of domain name server to the client which allows the client can use the web service in the internet 4 option 12 Host Name option The option12 is used to specify the name of the client which may be requested by the DHCP server for authentication 5 option 50 Requested IP Address option The option 50 is used in a DHCP REQUEST message to allow the client to request the particular IP address 6 option 51 Lease Time option In DHCP OFFER and DHCP ACK message the DHCP server uses this option to specify the lease time in which the clients can use the IP address legally 7 option 53 Message Type option This option is used to convey the type of the DHCP message Legal values for this option show in Table 10 1 Value Message Type 1 DHCP DISCOVER DHCP OFFER DHCP REQUEST DHCP DECLINE DHCP ACK DHCP NAK DHCP RELEASE DHCP INFORM Table 10 1 Option 53 CO N Or AJOJN 8 option 54 Server Identifier option DHCP servers
248. each other but they may also have crossings and overlaps as shown in Figure 11 19 PIM SM BSR 3 3 address Figure 11 19 BSR Domain Divided by Multicast Address Features of BSR administrative domain e Divide the BSR administrative domains by setting BSR border Each BSR administrative domain has its own border C RP and BSR devices These devices are only valid in their belonged domains which means that the BSR mechanism and RP election are separated between their administrative domains e BSR messages cannot pass through the BSR border The multicast messages such as C RP Hello Message and BSR BootStrap Message of each BSR administrative domain can t pass through the domain border 11 4 1 PIM SM Interface Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM PIM SM Interface to load the following page 236 PIM SM Interface Config Join Prune Yer Neighbor Select Interface Menos Mi Hee mowal interval lunes tiie eal IP Address eer DR Address a C a E 3 x O Vlan1 Disable 30 60 1 Disable 192 168 0 1 Figure11 20 PIM SM Interface The following entries are displayed on this screen gt PIM SM Interface Config The L3 interfaces can be configured as PIM SM mode by this page Select Select the desired interface to configure Interface Displays the VLAN interface which you can configure Status Select to enable or disable PIM SM function on the interface Hello Interval Specify the rate time in seconds at which PIM hello
249. earch Option e ALL Select All to display all entries e Group Select Group and enter the group IP address of desired entry e RP Select RP and enter the RP IP address of desired entry gt RP Information Group Displays the group address RP Displays the RP address 11 5 Static Mroute When the multicast network topology is the same as that of the unicast network receivers can receive the multicast data through the unicast route But in some circumstances the multicast network topology differs from that of unicast network or some routers in the network supports unicast only Then you can configure static multicast routes to offer different transferring paths for multicast and unicast data separately Notice the following two considerations e The static multicast routing functions only to affect the RPF check but not to direct the forwarding of the multicast data so it is also called RPF static routing e The static multicast routing only functions in the configured multicast router It won t be broadcasted or imported into other routers in any way The static multicast routing is an important foundation for the RPF check In the RPF check process with static multicast routing configured the router will choose one as the RPF route after comparing the optimal unicast route and the static multicast route selected respectively from the unicast routing table and the static multicast routing table Static Multicast Routing Table
250. econd The link cost OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 Sets the OSPF network type The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks Interfaces are not passive by default Disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets Default value is Disable MTU mismatch detection is enabled To prevent outgoing link state advertisements LSAs flooding out of an OSPF interface The default is Disable all outgoing LSAs are flooded out of the interface The authentication type of interface The choices are e default The authentication type is same with the associated area s authentication type e null No authentication e simple Use simple password e md5 Use md5 message digest algorithm When you select md5 the key ID should be entered The valid value ranges from 1 to 255 Specify the authentication key The length of simple key is no more than 8 characters and md5 key is no more than 16 characters 10 9 5 Area Choose the menu Routing OSPF Area to load the following page 189 Area Config Process ID Area ID Area Description Area Type Normal Authentication Type null Default Cost Summary Redistribution Default Route Advertise Area Table Proce
251. ect the defined protocol template VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the Protocol VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to gt Protocol Group Member UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack 78 7 5 3 Protocol Template The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN By default the switch has defined the IP Template ARP Template RARP Template etc You can add more Protocol Template on this page Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Template to load the following page Create Protocol Template Protocol Name 8 characters maximum Frame Type Etherneti vw Ether Type i 4 Hex integers 0600 FFFF Protocol Template Table Select ID Protocol Name Protocol type O 1 IP Ethernet ll ether type 0800 O 2 ARP Ethernet Il ether type 0806 O 3 RARP Ethernet Il ether type 8035 O 4 IPX SNAP ether type 8137 O 5 SNAP ether type 809B AT Figure 7 11 Create and View Protocol Template The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Protocol Template Protocol Name Give a name for the Protocol Template Frame Type Select a Frame Type for the Protocol Template Ether Type Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template DSAP Enter the DSAP field when selected LLC SSAP Enter the SSAP field when selected LLC gt Protocol Template Table Select Select the desired entry It is m
252. ectively ports 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 4 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 10 the MAC address as 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 5 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 20 the MAC address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 6 Port Enable Required On the VLAN MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select and enable Port 21 and Port 22 for MAC VLAN feature e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL and configure the link type ports of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 5 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 76 7 5 Protocol VLAN Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs basing on network protocol Protoco
253. ed Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 Enable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page 2 Configure the multicast Optional Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on parameters for VLANs Multicast IGMP Snooping VLAN Config page If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration it indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted 9 1 4 Multicast VLAN In old multicast transmission mode when users in different VLANs apply for join the same multicast group the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each VLAN owning a receiver one copy This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN By adding switch ports to the multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping you can make users in different VLANs share the same multicast VLAN This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only within the multicast VLAN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated from user VLANS Before configuring a multicast VLAN you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802 1Q VLAN page If the multicast VLAN is enabled the multicast configuration fo
254. ed Port s Unselect a port will disable NDP function of the port Anat 1 NDP function is effective only when NDP function is enabled globally and for the port 2 The aging time should be set over the hello time value otherwise this setting will be invalid and will not take effect 17 2 NTDP NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol is used for the commander switch to collect NDP information NTDP transmits and forwards NTDP topology collection request based on NDP neighbor information table and collects the NDP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network range The commander switch can collects the specified topology in the network regularly and you can also enable topology collection manually on the commander switch After the commander switch sends out NTDP request packets lots of switches receive the request packets and send out response packets at the same time which may result in network congestion and the commander switch overload To avoid the above problem two time parameters are designed to control the spread speed of NTDP request packets e NTDP hop delay Indicates the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time e NTDP port delay Indicates the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over The NTDP function can be implemented on D
255. ed switch port It is multi optional Allows you to Enable Disable the stack feature of the specified port 5 1 3 Switch Renumber In a stack system unit number is implemented to identify and manage the member device Unit number is unique in a stack system Unit number can be assigned automatically by stack system or manually configured by users On this page you can configure the unit number of member switch Choose the menu Stack Management Switch Renumber to load the following page 41 Switch Renumber Select Current Unit O 3 Role Designated Unit Mac Address Auto v Master Auto 00 0A EB 00 13 57 Figure 5 9 Switch Renumber The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Switch Renumber Select Current Unit Designated Unit Role MAC Address Select the desired entry It is multi optional Displays the current unit number of the member switch Configure the unit number of the member switch e Auto With this option selected the member switch will be assigned a free unit number automatically e 0 7 With this option selected the member switch will be assigned this unit number if it has not been used by the other members otherwise the member switch will be assigned a free unit number automatically Only the unused unit number is available for you to choose from The role of the device in a stack Displays the MAC address of the member switch 5 2 Application Example for Stack
256. ed to configure basic functions of the switch Here mainly introduces e Port Configure the basic features for the port e LAG Configure Link Aggregation Group LAG is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data path e Traffic Monitor Monitor the traffic of each port e MAC Address Configure the address table of the switch Chapter 7 VLAN This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in LANs Here mainly introduces e 802 1Q VLAN Configure port based VLAN e MAC VLAN Configure MAC based VLAN without changing the 802 1Q VLAN configuration e Protocol VLAN Create VLANs in application layer to make some special data transmitted in the specified VLAN e VLAN VPN VLAN VPN allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider e GVRP GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN e Private VLAN Designed to save VLAN resources of uplink devices and decrease broadcast Private VLAN mainly used in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user layer 2 separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices Chapter Introduction Chapter 8 Spanning Tree
257. een gt Neighbor Table Process Select one OSPF Process to display its neighbor list Interface Displays the interface for which neighbor list is to be displayed Neighbor IP The IP address of the neighboring router s interface to the Address attached network Router ID A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format representing the neighbor Area ID The area ID of the OSPF area associated with the interface Options An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor The neighbor s optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its Hello packets Router Priority The router priority of the neighbor 196 State The state of the neighbor e Down This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation It indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor On NBMA networks Hello packets may still be sent to Down neighbors although at a reduced frequency e Attempt This state is only valid for neighbors attached to NBMA networks It indicates that no recent information has been received from the neighbor but that a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor This is done by sending the neighbor Hello packets at intervals of Hello Interval e Init In this state a Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor However bidirectional communication has not yet been established with the neighbor i e the router itself did not appea
258. eiving IGMP leave message the receiving port of the router will send IGMP group specific query message to the multicast group and the switch will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast When receiving IGMP general query message the switch will forward them to all other ports in the VLAN owning the receiving port The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is nota router port yet it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified if the receiving port is already a router port its router port time will be directly reset When receiving IGMP group specific query message the switch will send the group specific query message to the members of the multicast group being queried 2 IGMP Report Message IGMP report message is sent by the host when it applies for joining a multicast group or responses to the IGMP query message from the router When receiving IGMP report message the switch will send the report message via the router port in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host applies for joining The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is a new member port it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified if the receiving port is already a member port its member port time will be directly reset 118 3 IGMP Leave
259. em When the authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN it will initiate the 802 1X authentication by sending EAP Request Identity packets to the supplicant The supplicant system can also launch an 802 1X client program to initiate an 802 1X authentication through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch 295 This TP LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating mode The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802 1X authentication procedure initiated by the supplicant system for example 1 EAP Relay Mode This mode is defined in 802 1X In this mode EAP packets are encapsulated in higher level protocol such as EAPOR packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP the EAP message field and the Message authenticator field This switch supports EAP MD5 authentication way for the EAP relay mode The following figure describes the basic EAP MD5 authentication procedure Supplicant System Authentication Server EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Figure 14 20 EAP MD5 Authentication Procedure 1 A supplicant system launches an 802 1X client program via its registered user name and password
260. em priority system MAC port priority port number and operation key operation key is determined by the physical properties of the port upper layer protocol and admin key The device with higher priority will lead the aggregation and disaggregation System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the device The smaller the system priority the higher the priority of the device is With the same 53 system priority the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority The device with the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority port number and operation key Only the ports with the same operation key can be selected into the same aggregation group In an aggregation group the port with smaller port priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred After an aggregation group is established the selected ports can be aggregated together as one port to transmit packets On this page you can configure the LACP feature of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LACP Config to load the following page Global Config System Priority 32768 0 65535 LACP Config UNIT 1 Select Port Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 Mode Status LAG 7 ar H O 1 01 1 32768 Active Disable O 110 2 1 32768 Active Disable E 1 0 3 1 32768 Active Enable O 1 0 4 1 32768 Active Enable O 1 0
261. ember port of LAG please ensure all the member ports of this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config GVRP Allows you to Enable Disable the GVRP function gt Port Config Unit Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Status Enable Disable the GVRP feature for the port The port type should be set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature 88 Registration Mode LeaveAll Timer Join Timer Leave Timer LAG Anore Select the Registration Mode for the port e Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information e Fixed In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information e Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information Once the LeaveAll Timer is set the port with GVRP enabled can send a LeaveAll message after the timer times out so that other GARP ports can re register all the attribute information After that the LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages a GARP port sends each Join message two ti
262. entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Instance Mapping Instance ID Enter the corresponding instance ID VLAN ID Enter the desired VLAN ID Click Add button the new VLAN ID will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous VLAN ID 106 gt Instance Config Select Instance ID Status Priority VLAN ID Show All Clear All Ano won t be replaced Click Delete button the VLAN ID will be delete from the corresponding instance ID Select the desired Instance ID for configuration It is multi optional Displays Instance ID of the switch Displays status of the instance Enter the priority of the switch in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific instance Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID After modification here the previous VLAN ID will be cleared and mapped to the CIST Click the Show All button to show all VLAN IDs mapped to the instance ID Click the Clear All button to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID The cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST In a network with both GVRP and MSTP enabled GVRP packets are forwarded along the CIST If you want to announce a specific VLAN through GVRP please be sure to map the VLAN to the CIST when configuring the MSTP VLAN instance mapping table For detailed introduction of GVRP please refer to GVRP functi
263. er 16 LLDP This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting Here mainly introduces e Basic Config Configure the LLDP parameters of the device e Device Info View the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors e Device Statistics View the LLDP statistics of the local device Chapter Introduction Chapter 17 Cluster This module is used to configure cluster function to centrally manage the scattered devices in the network Here mainly introduces e NDP Configure NDP function to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices e NTDP Configure NTDP function for the commander switch to collect NDP information e Cluster Configure cluster function to establish and maintain cluster Chapter 18 Maintenance This module is used to assemble the commonly used system tools to manage the switch Here mainly introduces e System Monitor Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch e Log View and configure the system log function e Device Diagnostics Including Cable Test and Loopback Cable Test tests the connection status of the cable connected to the switch and Loopback tests if the port of the switch and the connected device are available e Network Diagnostics Test if the destination is reachable and the account of router hops from the switch to the destination Chapter 19 System Maintenance via FT
264. er can log in the stack system through any StackWise ports of stackable devices and manage it as a single device You only need to configure the stack system once instead of operating repetitive configuration on multiple devices Various ways such as CONSOLE SNMP TELNET and WEB are available for users to manage the stack High reliability The stack is highly reliable in following aspects 1 2 The stack system is compromised of multiple devices among which one member device works as the stack master to take charge of the operation management and maintenance of the stack while the other stack members process services and keep a copy configuration file in accordance with the master for providing backup simultaneously Once the stack master becomes unavailable the remaining stack members elect a new master among themselves instantly and automatically which can ensure uninterrupted services and furthermore making 1 N backup feasible Due to the real time configuration and data synchronization being strictly executed the new master can take over the previous master to manage and maintain the stack system smoothly without affecting its normal operation Distributed LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol supports link aggregation across devices Since the whole stack system presents as a single device on the network external devices can implement LACP with the stack system by connecting to several stack member devices simultaneously Among
265. er it receives to confirm whether the data received is correct 7 LSA OSPF protocol defines area and multiple router types Via various sorts of LSA different types of router complete routing update caused by network changes OSPF protocol defines 11 types of LSA which all have the same LSA header As shown below every LSA is unique in the network and could be identified uniquely by the key field of LSA header 32 bits 8 8 8 8 Sn Link State ID Advertising Router ID LS sequence number Figure 10 43 LSA Header 1 Age The time passed since the LSA is generated When the age goes over the threshold value set by the router system which is one hour and the router doesn t receive an LSA update it will delete this LSA 2 Type The type of LSA Table 10 5 enumerates several common features of LSA 3 Link State ID It has different meanings for different types of LSA For details please refer to the RFC documentation 4 Advertising Router ID of the router advertising this LSA 5 Sequence Number lt indicates the uniqueness of a certain LSA whose update would be flooded to the network by adding 1 to the sequence number In the table below are the features of 6 types of common LSA 180 Type Name Features Code 4 Router LSA Originates from all the routers and describes the router interface which itself has already run the OSPF features and then spreads in its advertising area 2 Netw
266. eration Click the Detail button to view the mode and source IP address of the multicast group 11 2 5 Profile Binding When the switch receives IGMP report message it examines the profile ID bound to the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group If the multicast IP is not filtered the switch will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group Otherwise the switch will drop the IGMP report message In that way you can control the multicast groups that users can access The profile and binding relationship configurations are shared between this page and 9 4 Multicast Filter Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Profile Binding to load the following page 222 Profile and Max Group Binding UNIT 1 Select Port Profile ID Max Group Overflow Action O AB Y O 11041 Drop O 140 2 Drop O 1 0 3 Drop O 11074 Drop O 1 0 5 Drop O 1 0 6 Drop oO 10 7 Drop O 1 0 8 Drop O 1 0 9 Drop O 100 Drop O 1 0 11 Drop O 1 012 Drop O 1013 Drop O 104 Drop O 11015 Drop Note The port profile binding configuration here has no effect on static multicast IP Figure 11 9 Profile Binding The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Profile and Max Group Binding UNIT Select Port Profile ID Max Group Overflow Action LAG ClearBinding Profile LAG ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBindi
267. erface belongs only to one specific process In short multi process on one switch is to divide one switch into several independent switches logically Area Partition The switch can divide an autonomous system into different areas according to the user specified principle The routers in the same area only need to synchronize LSA with the other routers in its area which can save routing resources and lower routing performance requirements thus to reduce networking cost Configuration of multiple equal cost routes to balance load and backup lines Route redistribution OSPF can import routing information learned by other routing protocols or other OSPF processes Plaintext authentication and MD5 authentication supported when two neighbor routers in the same area are performing message interaction which can improve the security Customized configuration of multiple interface parameters including the interface cost the retransmit interval the transmit delay the router priority the router dead time the hello interval and authentication key etc in order to satisfy multiple network requirements with flexibility Configuration of virtual link When a network being divided into several areas it can connect the areas physically located far away to the backbone network through virtual link 181 8 Configuration of Stub Area and NSSA 9 ABR route summarization to summarize the intra area routing information with the same pre
268. ers Optional Configure different instances in the MST region for instance ports and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Instance Port Config page 8 4 STP Security Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect pages Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features 8 4 1 Port Protect On this page you can configure loop protect feature root protect feature TC protect feature BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports You are suggested to enable corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports gt Loop Protect In a stable network a switch maintains the states of ports by receiving and processing BPDU packets from the upstream switch However when link congestions or link failures occurred to the network a downstream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period which results in spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected and causes the blocked ports to transit to forwarding state Therefore loops may be incurred in the network The loop protect function can suppresses loops With this function enabled a port regardless of the role it plays in instances is always set to blocking state when the port does not receive BPDU 109 pac
269. erval Query Count Querier Timeout Ale Alert Y v v Y VLAN 1 Disable v2 2 60 10 15 2 1 2 120 Disable Disable Apply Figure 11 5 Interface Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Interface VLAN Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Loopback Enter the Loopback ID the desired entry must carry Routed Port Enter the routed port the desired entry must carry gt Interface Configuration Select Select the interface for which parameters is to be configured Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured Status The interface status You can select Enable Disable the IGMP function for the interface Version There are three versions for IGMP protocol e GMPv1 the interface is now an IGMPv1 Router e GMPv2 the interface is now an IGMPv2 Router e IGMPv3 the interface is now an IGMPv3 Router 217 11 2 2 Interface State Robustness Query Interval Query Max Response Time Startup Query Interval Startup Query Count Last Member Query Interval Last Member Query Count Querier Timeout Require Router Alert Send Router Alert Specify the robustness of the selected interface ranging from 1 to 255 The default is 2 The robustness variable determines the aging time of the member port after it receives the report message The aging time robustness general query interval query max response time Specify the IGMP
270. es an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward the packets When creating VLANs the PVID of each port indicating the default VLAN to which the port belongs is an important parameter with the following two purposes 1 according to the PVID of its received port 2 When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port i e when the port receives UL packets or broadcast packets the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN Different packets tagged or untagged will be processed in different ways after being received by ports of different link types which is illustrated in the following table Forwarding Packets The packet will be forwarded after removing its VLAN tag Receiving Packets Port Type Untagged Packets Tagged Packets If the VID of packet is the same as the PVID of the port the packet will be received Access If the VID of packet is not the same as the PVID of the port the packet will When untagged pe oroppee packets are received the port will add the default VLAN tag i e Trunk the PVID of the ingress port to the If the VID of packet is packets allowed by the port the packet will be received If the VID of packet is forbidden by the port the packet will be dropped General If the arriv
271. es including information about their routing tables 2 After receiving such information the router updates its local routing table and sends triggered update messages to its neighbors All routers on the network do the same to keep the latest routing information 3 By default an RIP router sends its routing table to neighbors every 30 seconds 4 RIP ages out routes by adopting an aging mechanism to keep only valid routes gt RIP Version RIP has two versions RIPv1 and RIPv2 RIPv1 a classful routing protocol supports message advertisement via broadcast only RIPv1 protocol messages do not carry mask information which means it can only recognize routing information of natural networks such as Class A B and C That is why RIPv1 does not support discontinuous subnets RIPv2 is a classless routing protocol Compared with RIPv1 RIPv2 has the following advantages Supporting route tags Route tags are used in routing policies to flexibly control routes 158 e Supporting masks route summarization and Classless Inter Domain Routing CIDR e Supporting designated next hops to select the best next hops on broadcast networks e Supporting multicast routing update to reduce resource consumption Supporting plain text authentication and MD5 authentication to enhance security e E ote RIPv2 has two types of message transmission broadcast and multicast Multicast is the default type using 224 0 0 9 as the multicast address The i
272. ess pool 146 10 4 2 Pool Setting This page shows you how to configure the IP pool in which the IP address can be assigned to the clients in the network Choose the menu Routing DHCP Server DHCP Server Pool to load the following page DHCP Server Pool Pool Name 8 characters maximum Network Address Format 192 168 0 0 Subnet Mask Format 255 255 255 0 Lease Time 1 2880 min Default 120 Default Gateway Optional Format 192 168 0 1 DNS Server Optional Format 192 168 0 1 Pool Table Select Pool Name Network Address Subnet Mask Lease Operation No entry in the table Al Note Configurations here will take effect only when the DHCP server is enabled Figure 10 10 Pool Setting The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DHCP Server Pool Pool Name Network Address Subnet Mask Lease Time Default Gateway Enter the name of the pool Specify the network number of the IP addresses in the pool Specify the corresponding subnet mask of the IP address in the pool Specify the lease time of IP addresses in the pool Specify the IP address of the default gateway for a client DNS Server Specify the IP address of the DNS server for a client Pool Table Select Select the entry to delete the IP pool Pool Name Displays the name of the IP Pool Network Address Displays the network address of the IP Pool Subnet Mask Displays th
273. essage from multicast group G the DR sends PIM join message toward the corresponding root also known as the RP 3 The join message travels router by router toward the root constructing a branch of the RPT as it goes These routers generate G entries in their forwarding tables with representing any multicast source The RPT works with RP as the root node and DR as the branch node When multicast data for multicast group G is sent to RP it will travels along the constructed RPT to DR and finally arrives at the receivers When a receiver is no longer interested in the multicast group data its directly connected DR will send prune message up the RPT toward the group s corresponding RP after the upstream node receives this prune message it will delete the link to the downstream node in its interface list and check if there are other receivers of this group If there are no more receivers the prune message will be sent upstream gt Multicast Source Registering The multicast source register is to inform its presence to the RP As shown in Figure 11 18 the process of the multicast source registering to RP is illustrated below 234 Register message Unicast Register stop message Unicast SS gt Join message gt Multicast packets HOST B Figure 11 18 Multicast Source Register Topology in PIM SM 1 When the multicast source S s directly connected DR receives a multicast packet sent from
274. etect O Enable Disable Trusted Port UNIT 1 21847161187 h0 62 44 46 48 1201122 241 2 KLJ RSIR 14 RY 45 7 91121 Ra 25 E Unselected Port s E Selected Port s E Not Available for Selection Note Itis recommended to configure the up linked port and LAG member as trusted port Figure 14 14 ARP Detect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Detect ARP Detect Enable Disable the ARP Detect function and click the Apply button to apply 288 gt Trusted Port UNIT Trusted Port Configuration Procedure Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port To ensure the normal communication of the switch please configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function Step Operation Description 1 Bind the IP address MAC Required On the IP MAC Binding page bind the IP address VLAN ID and the address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port connected Port number of number of the Host together via Manual Binding ARP the Host together Scanning or DHCP Snooping 2 Enable the protection for the Required On the Network Security IP MAC bound entry Binding Binding Table page specify a protect type for the corresponding bound entry
275. etransmit interval for the specified interface This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 5 seconds The hello interval for the specified interface in seconds This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 10 seconds The dead interval for the specified interface in seconds This specifies how long a router will wait to see a neighbor router s Hello packets before declaring that the router is down This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 40 The Transit Delay for the specified interface This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 1 second 193 Authentication Type Authentication Key Authentication Key ID State You may select an authentication type other than none by clicking on the Authentication Type button The choices are e default Uses the authentication type of the backbone area e null No authentication e simple Uses simple password e md5 U
276. ets and the switch can populate its multicast routing table Choose the menu Multicast Routing Global Config Global Config to load the following page Multicast Global Config Multicast Routing Enable Y Disable in 7 Appl SG Expiry Timer 210 60 65535 Spt threshold Figure 11 1 multicast Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Multicast Global Config Multicast Routing Select Enable Disable Multicast Routing function globally on the switch The default is disable SG Expiry Timer SG Expiry Timer is used to adjust S G expiry timer interval for S G multicast routers The range is from 60 to 65535 seconds Spt threshold Select rate which the last hop router will switch to a source specific shortest path tree Specify infinity if you want all sources for the specified group to use the shared tree never switching to the source tree The default is O kbps 11 1 2 Mroute Table On this page you can get the desired mroute information through different search options Choose the menu Multicast Routing Global Config Mroute Table to load the following page 211 Search Option Search Option All Y Mroute Table Group Source Entry Count 0 Incoming Interface Uptime Expires RPF Neighbor Protocol Flags Detail No entry in the table Figure 11 2 Mroute Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option All Group Source
277. etwork Choose the menu Routing DHCP Server DHCP Server to load the following page 145 Global Config DHCP Server Enable Disable Apply Ping Time Config Ping Packets 1 0 10 packets 0 for disable ping Ping Timeout 100 1000 10000 milliseconds Excluded IP Address Start IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 End IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 Excluded IP Address Table Select ID Start IP Address End IP Address No entry in the table al Note When the DHCP Server is enabled the DHCP Relay will be enabled too Figure10 9 DHCP Server The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Global Config DHCP Server Enable Disable the switch as a DHCP server Ping Time Config Ping Packets The number of packets to be sent Ping Timeout The time it takes to determine the specific IP not exist Excluded IP Address Configure the Excluded IP Address which can not be assigned by the switch Start IP Address The first one of the IP addresses that should not be assigned End IP Address The last one of the IP addresses that should not be assigned Excluded IP Address Table Select Select the entry to delete the Excluded IP Address pool ID Displays the corresponding ID of the Excluded IP Address pool Start IP Address Displays the start IP Address of the Excluded IP Address pool End IP Address Displays the last IP Address of the Excluded IP Addr
278. evice Table NTDP Summary and NTDP Config pages 17 2 1 Device Table On this page you can view the information of the devices collected by NTDP Meanwhile no matter whether a cluster is established on this page you can manually collect NTDP information at any time to manage and control devices Choose the menu Cluster gt NTDP gt Device Table to load the following page 339 Device Table Device Name Device MAC Cluster Name Role Hops dr ea 00 0A EB 00 13 57 TP commander 0 Detail Figure17 5 Device Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Table Device Name Displays the device type collected through NTDP Device MAC Displays the MAC address of this device Cluster Name Displays the cluster name of this device Role Displays the role this device plays in the cluster e Commander Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster e Member Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster e Candidate Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster e Individual Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled Hops Displays the hop count from this device to the switch Neighbor Info Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors Refresh Click the refresh button to refresh the web page and collect NTDP information of the switch so as to collect the latest network
279. f the entry you are creating Source Mask Enter the subnet mask to be applied to the Source RPF Neighbor Enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the mroute source Distance Enter the Administrative distance of static mroute The range is 0 255 and default is O The lower the distance the better the preference gt Static Mroute Config Table Select Select the static mroute entry to modify Source Displays the IP address of the multicast source Source Mask Displays the subnet mask of source RPF Neighbor Displays the IP address of the neighbor router Distance Displays the Administrative distance of static mroute Click modify to modify the selected entry Click delete to delete the selected entry 243 11 5 2 Static Mroute Table Choose the menu Multicast Routing Static Mroute Static Mroute Table to load the following page This table displays the static mroute entries whose RPF neighbor addresses are valid Static Mroute Table Source Entry Count 0 gt Static Mroute Config Source Source Mask RPF Neighbor Distance Source Mask RPF Neighbor Distance No entry in the table Figure 11 28 Static Mroute Table Displays the IP address of the multicast source Displays the subnet mask of source Displays the IP address of the neighbor router Displays the Administrative distance of static mroute Return to CONTENTS 244 Chapter 12 QoS QoS Quality of Service functions t
280. fServ DSCP Priority to load the following page 251 DSCP Priority Config DSCP Priority Enable Disable Apply Prio Sele OOOOOOO00000 Note rity level ct DSCP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 All Priority Y coso A coso coso cosa coso coso Coso coso cost cost lt Among the priority levels COS0 CO 1 COS7 the bigger value the higher priority Figure 12 9 DSCP Priority The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DSCP Priority Config DSCP Priority gt Priority Level Select Enable or Disable DSCP Priority DSCP Indicates the priority determined by the DiffServ region of IP datagram It ranges from 0 to 63 Priority Indicates the priority the packets with tag are mapped to The priority are labeled as COSO COS1 COS2 COS7 A ote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mapping relation between the DSCP priority and TC Required On QoS gt DiffServ DSCP Priority page enable DSCP Priority and configure the mapping relation between the DSCP priority and TC Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 252 12 2 Bandwidth Control Bandwidth function allowing you to control the traff
281. ficiency and does not apply to the large and medium sized network PIM SM is a multicast routing protocol in sparse mode It uses the Pull Mode to transfer multicast data and usually applies to large and medium sized network with relatively sparse multicast group members The working mechanism of PIM SM is illustrated as below PIM SM assumes that no hosts need to receive the multicast data the multicast data will not be forwarded to the host unless there is an explicitly request for the traffic The core task of PIM SM to realize multicast forwarding is to build and maintain the RPT Rendezvous Point Tree RPT selects a certain router in the PIM domain as the public RP rendezvous point through which the multicast data is transferred along the RPT to the receivers The router connected to the receiver sends the join message to the RP of a certain multicast group The path along which the join message is sent to the RP hop by hop forms a branch of RPT When the multicast source is sending multicast data to a multicast group the router directly connected to the multicast source firstly registers to the RP by sending the Register Message to the RP in unicast mode The arrival of the register message at the RP triggers the establishment of the SPT Then the multicast source sends the multicast data along the SPT to the RP The multicast data will be duplicated and distributed to the receivers after they arrive at the RP Adote The
282. figured according to the type of packets sent out from voice device and the link type of the port The following table shows the detailed information Port Voice Voice VLAN Mode Stream Type Link type of the port and processing mode ACCESS Not supported TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be TAG voice voice VLAN stream GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not Automatic Mode be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the voice VLAN should be TAG ACCESS Not supported UN TAG voice TRUNK Not supported stream GENERAL Not Supported ACCESS Not supported TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be TAG voice voice VLAN And the port should belong to the voice VLAN and the default VLAN stream GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN The port should be an untagged port in its Manual Mode default VLAN and a tagged port in the voice VLAN ACCESS Supported TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port should be UNTAG voice voice VLAN and the port should belong to the default VLAN steam GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port should be voice VLAN and the egress port should be configured as an untagged port of the voice VLAN Anote 1 Table 12 2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode If the 802 1X authentication and Guest VLAN are enabled on the ingress port
283. fix with a single route and then distribute it to other areas 10 ASBR route summarization to summarize the external routing information with the same prefix with a single route and then distribute it to the autonomous system 10 9 1 Process Choose the menu Routing OSPF Process to load the following page OSPF Process Config Process ID 1 65535 Router ID Auto v OSPF Process Table Select Process ID Active Router ID Router ID Status O No entry in the table Figure10 44 OSPF Process The following entries are displayed on this screen gt OSPF Process Config Process ID The 16 bit integer that uniquely identifies the OSPF process ranging from 1 to 65535 Router ID The 32 bit unsigned integer in dotted decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system AS gt OSPF Process Table Select Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional Process ID Displays the configured OSPF process Active Router ID Displays the active router ID that is currently used by the process Router ID Displays the router ID that you configured before When you change the router ID of a process it will not take effect until you restart the process Status Displays the status of the process e Running The process is running and its router ID has been configured or auto selected e Pending The process has no router ID and can not start 10 9 2 Basic Choo
284. following page Creating Interface Interface ID VLAN y 1 4094 IP Address Mode None Static O DHCP BOOTP IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask Format 255 255 255 0 Admin Status Enable Interface Name Optional 1 32 characters Interface List Select ID Mode IP Address Subnet mask Interface Name Status Operation O Vlan1 Static 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 Up Edit Detail All Delete Help Interface Count 1 Note The addresses of two interfaces cant be same Figure 10 1 Interface Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Interface Interface ID Enter the ID of the interface corresponding to VLAN ID loopback ID or routed port IP Address Mode Specify IP Address allocation mode None without ip Static setup manually DHCP allocated through DHCP BOOTP allocated through BOOTP IP Address Specify the IP address of the interface Subnet Mask Specify the subnet mask of the interface s IP address 135 Admin Status Interface Name Interface List Select ID Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Interface Name Status Operation Specify interface administrator status Choose Disable to disable the interface s Layer 3 capabilities Specify the name of the network interface Select the interfaces to modify or delete Displays the ID of the interface Display IP address allocation mode None without ip Static setup manually
285. formation associated with the VRRP Up to 5 interfaces can be tracked for every VRRP IP owner can not track any interface Interface VRID Tracked Interface Reduced Priority Create Track Table Select VRID Interface Tracked Interface Reduced Priority Link Status Apply Select the Interface ID from the pull down list Select the VRID From the from the pull down list Specify the interface to be tracked Enter the priority to reduce if the associated interface is down Click the button to add a tracked interface Select one or more items Displays the VRID associated with the VRRP Displays the VLAN ID associated with the VRRP Displays the Interface ID tracked by the VRRP Displays the reduced priority associated with the Interface tracked by the VRRP Displays the status of the Interface tracked by the VRRP Change the selected reduced priority A new reduced priority should be provided if the Apply button is clicked 207 Delete Delete the selected Interface 10 10 5Virtual Router Statistics Displays global statistics of all VRRP including router checksum errors router version errors router VRID errors and so on Choose the menu Routing gt VRRP Virtual Router Statistics to load the following page Global Statistics Router Checksum Errors 0 Router Version Errors D Router VRID Errors 0 Statistics Address Invalid Authentication Packet List Authentication Type Lengt
286. from other areas It is always Enable in Normal areas The default is Enable Set whether or not the external routes will be redistributed to the area It is always Enable in Normal areas and always Disable in Stub areas Enable or disable advertising default route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 into NSSA area by sending a NSSA External LSA It is only available in NSSA area Set the OSPF metric type of the default route Two types are supported External Type 1 and External Type 2 The default value is External Type 2 190 Metric Area Table Process Select Area ID Area Description Area Type Authentication Type Summary Redistribution Default Cost Default Advertise Route Metric Type Metric SPF runs ABR Count Area LSA Count Area LSA Checksum Specify the metric of the default route The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 and the default is 1 Select one OSPF Process to display its area list Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional Displays the configured area Displays the description of the area and it can be modified Displays the type of the area and it can be modified Displays the authentication type of the area and it can be modified Displays the Summary parameter and it can be modified Displays the Redistribution parameter and it can be modified Displays the stub cost of the area and it can be modified Displays the Default Route Advertise statu
287. ges 15 3 1 Statistics On this page you can configure and view the statistics entry Choose the menu SNMP RMON Statistics to load the following page Statistics Config ID 1 65535 Port Choose Format 1 0 1 Owner 16 characters maximum Status valid vi Statistics Table Select ID Port Owner Status Operation No entry in the table Al Figure 15 9 Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Statistics Config ID Enter the ID number of statistics entry ranging from 1 to 65535 Port Enter or choose the Ethernet interface from which to collect the statistics Owner Enter the owner name Status Choose the status of statistics entry e valid The entry exists and is valid e underCreation The entry exists but is not valid 314 Statistics Table Select ID Port Owner Status 15 3 2 History On this page you can configure the History Group for RMON Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding statistics entry It s multi optional Displays the ID number of the statistics entry Displays the Ethernet interface from which to collect the statistics Displays the owner name Displays the status of the statistics entry Choose the menu SNMP RMON gt History to load the following page History Control Table Select Index O O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O 9 O 10 O 11 O 12 Port Interval sec Ma
288. gt PIM SM Neighbor Interface The physical interface on which PIM DM is enabled Neighbor The IP address of the PIM neighbor for which this entry contains information Uptime The time since the PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the local switch Expires The time remaining before the PIM neighbor will be aged out 11 4 3 BSR PIM SM uses a Bootstrap Router BSR which advertises information to other multicast routers about the rendezvous point RP In a given network a set of routers can be administratively enabled as candidate bootstrap routers C BSR If it is not apparent which router should be the BSR the candidates flood the domain with advertisements The router with the highest priority is elected If all the priorities are equal then the candidate with the highest IP address becomes the BSR Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM BSR to load the following page PIM SM Candidate BSR Config Interface None v Apply Hash Mask Length 30 0 32 Help Priority 64 0 255 PIM SM Elected BSR Information BSR Address N A Priority 0 Hash Mask Length 0 Expire PIM SM Candidate BSR Information Candidate BSR Address N A Priority 0 Hash Mask Length 0 Figure 11 22 BSR The following entries are displayed on this screen gt PIM SM Candidate BSR Config Configure the candidate BSR of current device 238 Interface Select the interface on this switch from which the BSR addres
289. h Errors Type Mismatch Errors State Zero Zero Invalid Advertisement Advertisement Advertisement Authentication IP TTL Priority Priority Type nsitioned Received Sent Interval Errors Failure Errors Packets Packets Packets Master Received Sent Received Checksum Version VRID Interface aae nara Tra to No entry in the table clear Refresh Help Figure10 63 Virtual Router Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Statistics Router Checksum Displays the total number of VRRP packets received with an Errors invalid VRRP checksum value Router Version Displays the total number of VRRP packets received with an Errors unknown or unsupported version number Router VRID Errors Displays the total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router gt Statistics Displays specified virtual router statistics It lists all the statistics for the specified VRRP and can be reset for your convenience when doing statistics VRID The VRID for the selected Virtual Router Interface The interface ID for the selected Virtual Router Checksum Errors Displays the number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value Version Errors Displays the number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number State Transitioned Displays the number of times that this virtual router s state has to Master transitioned to Master Adver
290. h each other through Layer 3 forwarding by using proxy ARP function The following example simply illustrates how proxy ARP works Interface 3 192 168 3 1 24 Interface 2 192 168 2 1 24 Switch PCA PCB 192 168 2 10 16 192 168 3 11 16 Figure 10 19 ARP Application As shown in the figure above PC A and PC B are in the same network segment but belong to different VLANs respectively When PC A wants to contact PC B PC A will broadcast its ARP request with Destination IP address of PC B in its ARP packet As the two are in different VLANs the ARP request cannot be forwarded to PC B and thereby the two cannot communicate with each other To realize the connectivity between the two PCs we enable the Proxy ARP function for the corresponding VLAN interface 2 and VLAN interface 3 on the Switch Upon receiving the ARP request of PC A VLAN interface 2 responds to the request with its own MAC address instead of PC B s actual MAC address When PC A sends a packet to the Switch which is actually destined to PC B the Switch just forwards the packet to PC B The communication between PC A and B is realized totally unaware of the Switch proxying for each other On this page you can enable Proxy ARP function for the VLAN interface Choose the menu Routing Proxy ARP Proxy ARP to load the following page Global Config Search Default Route Enable Disable Apply Proxy ARP Information Select IP Address Mask Interface Interface Name Status
291. hassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Displays the local port number Indicates the basis for the chassis ID and the default subtype is MAC address Indicates the specific identifier for the particular chassis in local device 325 Port ID Subtype Port ID TTL Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Supported System Capabilities Enabled Management Address Indicates the basis for the port ID and the default subtype is interface name Indicates the specific identifier for the port in local device Indicates the number of seconds that the recipient LLDP agent is to regard the information associated with this chassis ID and port ID identifier to be valid Displays local port s description Indicates local device s administratively assigned name Displays local device s system description Displays the supported function of the local device Displays the primary function of the local device Displays the particular management address associated with local device 16 2 2 Neighbor Info On this page you can get the information of the neighbors Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Neighbor Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Pajero es aN eal ere aa eae BLE aaa E ES Unselected Port s ES Selected Port s C Not Av
292. he DHCP BOOTP relay agent if necessary if possible or may broadcast the message to a broadcast address on the client s subnet DHCP request A client can receive DHCP offers from multiple servers but it will accept only one DHCP OFFER and broadcast a DHCP REQUEST message which includes the server s identifier and the IP address offered by the server Based on the server s identifier servers are informed whose offer the client has accepted DHCP acknowledgement The server selected in the DHCP REQUEST message commits the binding for the client to persistent storage and responds with a DHCP ACK message containing the configuration parameters for the requesting client If the selected server is unable to satisfy the DHCP REQUEST message e g the requested IP address has been allocated the server should respond with a DHCP NAK message In Dynamic assignment policy the DHCP client is assigned an IP address with a lease time e g 2 hours from the DHCP server This IP address will be reclaimed by the DHCP server when its lease time expires If the client wants to use the IP address continually it should unicast a DHCP REQUEST message to the server to extend its lease After obtaining parameters via DHCP a host should be able to exchange packets with any other host in the networks gt The Format of DHCP Message Figure 10 4 DHCP model gives the format of a DHCP message and Figure 10 6 describes each field in the DHCP message The number
293. he Apply button Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 7 10 Application Example for Private VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch Ais connecting to switch B switch B is connecting to switch C e Switch B is connecting to PC1 PC2 and PC3 e Switch C is connecting to PC4 PC5 and PC6 e PCs in different VLANs cannot communicate with each other e For switch A packets from switch B and switch C have no VLAN tags Switch A needs not to consider the VLANs of switch B and switch C 93 gt Network Diagram Switch B gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Create VLAN6 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 6 owning Port 1 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Create Private Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page VLANs Enter the Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 select one type of secondary VLAN and then click the Create button 2 Add Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Promiscuous configure the port type of Port3 and Port4 as Promiscuous enter port to Private Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Apply VLANs button 3 Add Host port to Required On the
294. he Protocol VLAN is created please set its enabled port to be the member of corresponding 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally 7 5 1 Protocol Group Table On this page you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined Protocol VLANs Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group Table to load the following page 77 Protocol Group Table Select Protocol Name VLAN ID Member Operate No entry in the table Figure 7 9 Create Protocol VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Protocol Group Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional Protocol Name Displays the protocol of the protocol group VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol Member Displays the member of the protocol group Operate Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Apply button to apply your settings 7 5 2 Protocol Group On this page you can configure the Protocol Group Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Group to load the following page Protocol Group Config Protocol Name IP v VLAN ID 1 4094 Protocol Group Member UNIT 1 0104042 44 4 481120 22 2a 26 BbJ SJEA EIRA 13 RS RARA eY Ea 2 ES Unselected Port s C Selected Port s E Not Available for Selection Figure 7 10 Enable Protocol VLAN for Port gt Protocol Group Config Protocol Name Sel
295. he System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled 321 System Description TLV The System Description TLV allows network management to advertise the system s description which should include the full name and version identification of the system s hardware type software operating system and networking software System Name TLV The System Name TLV allows network management to advertise the system s assigned name which should be the system s fully qualified domain name Management Address TLV Port VLAN ID TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher entities to assist discovery by network management The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise the port s VLAN identifier PVID that will be associated with untagged or priority tagged frames Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV The Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID VLAN Name TLV The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802 1Q compatible IEEE 802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN with which it is configured Link Aggregation TLV The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated whether the link is currently in an aggregation and if in an aggregation the port identifica
296. he clients connected to the port can access the network on the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802 1X Authentication Authorized Displays the authentication status of the port LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 14 6 3 Radius Server RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service server provides the authentication service for the switch via the stored client information such as the user name password etc with the purpose to control the authentication and accounting status of the clients On this page you can configure the parameters of the authentication server Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Radius Server to load the following page Authentication Config Primary IP Format 192 168 0 1 Secondary IP Format 192 168 0 1 apply Auth Port 1812 1 65535 Auth Key 15 characters maximum Accounting Config Accounting enable Y disable Primary IP Format 192 168 0 1 Apply Secondary IP Format 192 168 0 1 Help Accounting Port 1 65535 Accounting Key 15 characters maximurn Figure 14 24 Radius Server The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Authentication Config Primary IP Enter the IP address of the authentication server Secondary IP Enter the IP address of the alternate authentication server Auth Port Set the UDP port of authentication server s The default
297. he daisy chain topology In a daisy chained stack link failure can cause stack split While in a ring connected stack the system is able to operate normally with a new daisy chained topology n ote Establish a stack of ring or daisy chain topology with eight T3700 28TQ switches at most 2 Topology Collection Each member in the stack collects the topology of the whole stack by exchanging stack discovery packets with its neighbors Discovery packet carries topology information including stack port connection status unit number priorities MAC addresses etc Each member keeps a local record of the known topology information When the device initializes it only possesses the record of its own topology information Periodically the stack members send out their known topology information through the stack ports to its neighbors When the neighbors receive the information they will update their local topology information After a period of time of broadcasting and updating information all the stack members can collect the complete topology information known as topology convergence Then the switch enters the master election stage 3 Master Election After all members have obtained topology information known as topology convergence the stack enters the master election stage A stack always has one stack master while the other stack members are slaves Master election determines the stack role of the stack members 36 Master elect
298. he following page 355 Memory Monitor UNIT 3 Run Time 556 sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Current Average MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Utilization Utilization 37 37 37 37 montor step Figure18 2 Memory Monitor UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate every four seconds 18 2 Log The Log system of switch can record classify and manage the system information effectively providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose malfunction The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels Severity Level Description emergencies 0 The system is unusable alerts 1 Action must be taken immediately critical 2 Critical conditions errors 3 Error conditions warnings 4 Warnings conditions notifications 5 Normal but significant conditions 356 Severity Level Description informational 6 Informational messages debugging 7 Debug level messages Table 18 1 Log Level The Log function is implemented on the Log Table Local Log Remote Log and Backup Log pages 18 2 1 Log Table The switch supports logs output to two directions namely log buffer and log file The information in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas th
299. he multicast data sending from Source 2 to G referred as S2 G Thus only the multicast data from Source 1 will be transferred to Host B 2 Function Enhancement of the Query and Report Message 1 Query message carrying source address IGMPv3 supports source specific query as well as the general query in IGMPv1 and the group specific query in IGMPv2 e The general query message carries neither group address nor source address e The group specific query message carries the group address without the source address e The source specific query message carries not only the group address but also one or several source addresses 2 The report message carrying several group records The destination address of IGMPv3 report message is 224 0 0 22 The IGMPv3 report message can carry one or several group records which contains the list of multicast group addresses and multicast source addresses in each of them The types of group records are listed as below e IS_IN indicating the mapping relationship between the multicast group and the multicast source list is INCLUDE which means the host will only receive the multicast data sending from the specified multicast source list to this multicast group If the specified multicast source list is empty here the host will leave this group 216 IS_EX indicating the mapping relationship between the multicast group and the multicast source list is EXCLUDE which means the host will only recei
300. he switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more The default value is 260 seconds Leave Time Indicates the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups The default value is 1 second The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on Snooping Config Port Config VLAN Config and Multicast VLAN pages 9 1 1 Snooping Config To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch please firstly configure IGMP global configuration and related parameters on this page If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table the switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth and enhance the process efficiency of the system Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config to load the following page 119 Global Config IGMP Snooping Enable Disable Unknown Multicast Forward Discard IGMP Snooping Status Description Member Enabled Port Enabled YLAN Note IGMP Snooping will take effect only when Global Config Port Config and VLAN Config are all enabled Figure 9 4 Basic Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config IGM
301. his kind of ARP attack is called Man In The Middle attack gt ARP Flooding Attack The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the network bandwidth viciously which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed Meantime the Gateway learns the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries from these ARP packets and updates its ARP table As a result the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts which causes that the legal Hosts can not access the external network 287 The IP MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch Basing on the predefined IP MAC Binding entries the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect ARP Defend and ARP Statistics pages 14 3 1 ARP Detect ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets basing on the bound entries in the IP MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man In The Middle Attack etc Choose the menu Network Security gt ARP Inspection ARP Detect to load the following page ARP Detect ARP D
302. ic rate and broadcast flow on each port to ensure network in working order can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages 12 2 1 Rate Limit Rate limit functions to control the ingress egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the available bandwidth of each port In this way the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed and utilized Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwidth Control gt Rate Limit to load the following page Rate Limit Config UNIT 1 Select Port Ingress Rate 1 10000000Kbps Egress Rate 1 10000000Kbps LAG O AA E O 11011 4S O 1 0 2 O 1 0 3 O 1 0 4 O 1 0 5 O 1 016 go 11017 o 1 0 8 O 1 0 9 O 1 010 O 11011 O 102 v Al Note For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rate control atthe same time Figure 12 10 Rate Limit The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Rate Limit Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port for Rate configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch Ingress Rate Select the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port Egress Rate Select the bandwidth for sending packets on the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 253 Adote 1 If you enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control enabled port storm control feature will be disabled for this port 2 When egress rate limit
303. icast forwarding table e If the packet s actual arriving interface is exactly the RPF interface the RPF check will pass and the packet will be forwarded to all the output interfaces e If the packet s actual arriving interface is not the RPF interface the RPF check fails and this packet will be discarded gt PIM Modes PIM can be divided into two modes according to different routing mechanisms e PIM DM Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode e PIM SM Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode gt PIM DM PIM DM is a multicast routing protocol in dense mode It uses Push Mode to transfer multicast packets and applies to small network with relatively dense multicast group members The working mechanism of PIM DM is illustrated as below e PIM DM assumes that there is at least one multicast group member in each subnet of the network and the multicast packets will be flooded to all the nodes in the network Then branches without receivers are pruned from the distribution tree leaving only branches that contain receivers This flood and prune process takes place periodically The pruned branches can also resume to forwarding state periodically e When anew receiver on a previously pruned branch of the tree joins a multicast group the PIM DM takes the Graft see Grafting mechanism to actively resume this node s function of forwarding multicast data thus reducing the time it takes to resume to the forwarding state 22
304. icast route of the higher priority to the multicast source 2 The router with the unicast route of the smaller cost to the multicast source 3 The router with the local interface of the higher IP address 11 3 1 PIM DM Interface Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM DM PIM DM Interface to load the following page PIM DM Interface Config Select Interface Status Hello Interval DR Priority IP Address Neighbor Count DR Address O x go Vlan1 Disable 30 1 192 168 0 1 Figure 11 13 PIM DM Interface The following entries are displayed on this screen gt PIM DM Interface Config The L3 interfaces can be configured as PIM DM mode by this page Select Select the desired PIM DM interface entry to modify 229 Interface The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured You must have configured at least one router interface before configuring or displaying data for a PIM DM interface Status Select enable or disable from the pull down list to set the administrative status of PIM DM for the selected interface The default is disable Hello Interval Specify the rate time in seconds at which PIM hello messages are transmitted from the selected interface The valid value ranges from 1 to 18725 and the default is 30 seconds DR Priority Specify the DR priority for the selected interface The valid value range from 0 to 4294967294 The default value is 1 IP Address The IP address of this interface Neighbor Count
305. icate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted Figure 4 16 SSL Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 26 gt Global Config SSL Select Enable Disable the SSL function on the switch gt Certificate Download Certificate File Select the desired certificate to download to the switch The certificate must be BASE64 encoded gt Key Download Key File Select the desired SSL Key to download to the switch The key must be BASE64 encoded Mnote 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work The SSL certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted To establish a secured connection using https please enter https into the URL field of the browser 4 It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection because https connection involves authentication encryption and decryption etc 4 4 3 SSH Config As stipulated by IFTF Internet Engineering Task Force SSH Secure Shell is a security protocol established on application and transport layers SSH encrypted connection is similar to a telnet connection but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe because the password and data transmitted with plain text can be easily intercepted SSH can provide information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through a
306. ication When the router receives multicast packets sent from multicast source S to multicast group G it will look up the multicast forwarding table at first 225 1 If the corresponding entry S G exists and the packet s actual arriving interface is the same as the input interface in the multicast forwarding table the packet will be forwarded to all the output interfaces 2 If the corresponding entry S G exists and the packet s actual arriving interface is different from the input interface in the multicast forwarding table the router will perform RPF check on this packet e f the check result shows that the RPF interface is the same as the input interface in the current S G entry which indicates that the S G entry is correct and the packet from the wrong path will be discarded e f the check result shows that the RPF interface is the different from the input interface in the current S G entry which indicates that the S G entry is invalid and the router will correct the input interface to the packet s actual arriving interface and forward this packet to all the output interfaces 3 If the corresponding entry S G doesn t exist the router will still perform the RPF check on this multicast packet With the RPF interface as the input interface the router will create corresponding entry with the RPF interface as the input interface combining related routing information and send this entry to the mult
307. ies are displayed on this screen gt Create Private VLAN Primary VLAN Enter the ID number of the Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Enter the ID number of the Secondary VLAN 91 gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in Private VLAN Primary VLAN ID Enter the Primary VLAN ID number of the desired Private VLAN Secondary VLAN ID Enter the Secondary VLAN ID number of the desired Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Table Select Select the entry to delete It is multi optional Primary VLAN Displays the Primary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN Secondary VLAN Displays the Secondary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN Port Displays the Port number of the Private VLAN 7 9 2 Port Config The Private VLAN provides two Port Types for the ports Promiscuous and Host Usually the Promiscuous port is used to connect to uplink devices while the Host port is used to connect to the he terminal hosts such as PC and Server Choose the menu VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page Port Config Port selected Format 1 0 1 Port Type Promiscuous Apply Primary VLAN 2 4094 Help Secondary VLAN 2 4094 UNIT 1 ee iaeia fe LAS ALS ALZ ES RARR RRAN C Unselected Port s E Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Private VLAN Port Table UNIT 1 Port
308. igure reas ar he tcl Multicast Source Multicast Streams amp Router I s L i F S V PC PC Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Figure 9 1 Information transmission in the multicast mode Features of multicast 1 The number of receivers is not certain Usually point to multipoint transmission is needed 2 Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group The multicast information sender just need to send the information to the network device once 3 Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time 4 Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed 116 gt Multicast Address 1 Multicast IP Address As specified by IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Class D IP addresses are used as destination addresses of multicast packets The multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The following table displays the range and description of several special multicast IP addresses Multicast IP address range Description 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 255 Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols and other network protocols 224 0 1 0 224 0 1 255 Addresses for video conferencing 239 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Local management multicast addresses which are used in the local network only Table 9 1 Range of the special multicast IP 2 Multicast MAC Address When a unicast packet is transmitted in an
309. ill actively send IGMP membership report message to the multicast group it wants to join in 2 The IGMP querier will periodically send the IGMP query message to all the hosts and routers in the local network with the multicast address 224 0 0 1 213 3 After receiving the IGMP query message the host that is interested in multicast group G1 either Host B or Host C depending on whose latency timer runs out first for example Host B will firstly multicast IGMP membership report message to G1 to declare it belongs to G1 As all the hosts and routers can receive this membership report message and the IGMP routers Router A and Router B already know there is a host interested in G1 Host C will not send its report message for G1 after it receives the report message of Host B This is called the membership report preventing mechanism and it helps to reduce the traffic in the local network 4 At the same time as Host A is interested in G2 it will multicast report message to G2 to declare it belongs to G2 5 Through the above query and response process the IGMP router learns that there are group members of G1 and G2 in the local network It will generate the multicast forwarding entries G1 and G2 via the multicast routing protocol such as PIM as the basis of the multicast traffic forwarding The symbol represents any multicast source 6 When multicast packets sending to G1 or G2 from the multicast source arrive
310. ilures occurred in the network without occupying too much network resources A too large hello time parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in the links which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated A too small hello time parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently which increases the network load of the switches and wastes network resources The default value is recommended A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems A too large max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time which in 102 turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less adaptive The default value is recommended If the TxHold Count parameter is too large the number of MSTP packets being sent in each hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources The default value is recommended 8 1 2 STP Summary On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Summary to load the following page STP Summary STP Status STP Version Local Bridge Root Bridge External Path Cost Region Root Internal Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count MSTP Instance Summary Insta
311. imit2 On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 101 to Policy limit2 On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy limit2 to bind to port 1 0 4 Return to CONTENTS 274 Chapter 14 Network Security Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security including five submenus IP MAC Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection IP Source Guard DoS Defend and 802 1X Please configure the functions appropriate to your need 14 1 IP MAC Binding The IP MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together Basing on the IP MAC binding table ARP Inspection and IP Source Guard functions can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching the bound entries to access the network The following three IP MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch 1 Manually You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN 2 Scanning You can quickly get the information of the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function and bind them conveniently You are only requested to enter the IP address on the ARP Scanning page for the scanning 3 DHCP Snooping You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monito
312. include option 54 in the DHCP OFFER message in order to allow the client to distinguish between lease offers DHCP clients use the option ina DHCP REQUEST message to indicate which lease offers is being accepted 143 9 option 55 Parameter Request List option This option is used by a DHCP client to request values for specified configuration parameters 10 option 61 Client hardware address 11 option 66 TFTP server name option This option is used to identify a TFTP server 12 option 67 Boot file name option This option is used to identify a boot file 2 13 option 150 TFTP server address option This option is used to specify the address of the TFTP server which assigns the boot file to the client For particulars of DHCP option please refer to RFC 2132 In the next section DHCP Server and DHCP Relay function on this switch will be introduced in detail gt Application Environment of DHCP Server DHCP Server assigns IP address to the client efficiently in the following environment 1 More and more device proliferates in the network and it is a hard work to configure the IP parameter for every device manually 2 There are not enough network resources to assign to every device exclusively 3 Only alittle device need static IP address to connect the network gt Details of DHCP Server on T3700G 28TQ A typical application of T3700G 28TQ working at DHCP Server function is shown below It can be altered to meet the network
313. ing stolen The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent gt MIB Introduction To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages SNMP adopts the hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects It is like a tree and each tree node represents a managed object as shown in the following figure Thus the object can be identified with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers The number string is the Object Identifier of the managed object In the following figure the OID of the managed object B is 1 2 1 1 While the OID of the managed object A is 1 2 1 1 5 Figure15 2 Architecture of the MIB tree gt SNMP Configuration Outline 1 Create View The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects The managed object uniquely identified by OID can be set to under or out of the management of SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type included excluded The OID of managed object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station 2 Create SNMP Group After creating the SNMP View it s required to create an SNMP Group The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group The Groups with these three items the same are considered to be the same Yo
314. ing Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID 1 4094 Search Option Search Option All Y Filtering Address Table Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status al Total MAC Address 0 Note The maximurn ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please clickthe Search button to getthe complete address entries Figure 6 16 Filtering Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Filtering Address MAC Address Enter the MAC Address to be filtered VLAN ID Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table 64 e MAC Address Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry gt Filtering Address Table Select Select the entry to delete the corresponding filtering address It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the filtering MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID Port Here the symbol __ indicates no specified port Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address Anote 1 The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table can not be added to the Static Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 2 This MAC address filtering funct
315. ing NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time Displays the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Selected Port means NTDP function of the port is enabled Unselected Port means NTDP function of the port is disabled Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Config to load the following page Global Config NTDP O Enable Disable NTDP Interval Time 1 min 1 60 default 1 NTDP Hops 3 hop 1 16 default 3 Apply NTDP Hop Delay 200 ms 1 1000 default 200 NTDP Port Delay 20 ms 1 100 default 20 Port Config UNIT 1 tot to 0 42 64 0 4020264 a 0010376577 Ce RA RA 618 17 RA 21 23 25 fal Unselected Port s Ea Selected Portis E Not Available for Selection Figure17 8 NTDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time Select Enable Disable NTDP for the switch globally Enter the interval to collect topology information 342 NTDP Hops Enter the hop count the switch topology collects NTDP Hop Delay Enter the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time NTDP Port Delay Enter the time between the port forwarding NTDP request pac
316. ing broadcasted in the network The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch including four submenus IGMP Snooping Multicast IP Multicast Filter Packet Statistics 9 1 IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Process The switch running IGMP Snooping listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host and the router and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port When receiving IGMP report message the switch adds the port to the multicast address table when the switch listens to IGMP leave message from the host the router sends the Group Specific Query message of the port to check if other hosts need this multicast if yes the router will receive IGMP report message if no the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table The router regularly sends IGMP query messages After receiving the IGMP query messages the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time gt IGMP Messages The switch running IGMP Snooping processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows 1 IGMP Query Message IGMP query message sent by the router falls into two types IGMP general query message and IGMP group specific query message The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query if the multicast groups contain any member When rec
317. ing packet s VLAN tag is the same as the port s PVID the packet will be forwarded after removing its VLAN tag otherwise the packet will be forwarded with its current VLAN tag If the egress rule of port is TAG the packet will be forwarded with its current VLAN tag If the egress rule of port is UNTAG the packet will be forwarded after removing its VLAN tag Table 7 1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing IEEE 802 1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages 7 1 1 VLAN Config On this page you can view the current created 802 1Q VLAN Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config to load the following page 68 Vian Table Select VLAN_ID Name Members Operation 1 System VLAN 4 0 1 26 Edit Detail Total VLAN 1 Figure 7 3 VLAN Table To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch the default VLAN of all ports is set to VLAN1 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN It is multi optional VLAN ID Displays the ID number of VLAN Name Displays the user defined name of VLAN Members Displays the port members in the VLAN Operation Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry e Edit Click to modify the settings of VLAN e Detail Click to get the information of VLAN Click Edit button to modify the settings of the cor
318. ings to the interface or through something like a bit error test For this reason IP packets may still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state To facilitate this such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes whose destination is the interface IP address e Waiting The router is trying to determine the identity of the Backup Designated Router by monitoring received Hello Packets The router is not allowed to elect a Backup Designated Router or a Designated Router until it transitions out of Waiting state This prevents unnecessary changes of Backup Designated Router e DR This router is itself the Designated Router on the attached network Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network The router must also originate a Network LSA for the network node The Network LSA will contain links to all routers including the Designated Router itself attached to the network e BDR This router is itself the Backup Designated Router on the attached network It will be promoted to Designated Router if the present Designated Router fails 187 The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network The Backup Designated Router performs slightly different functions during the Flooding Procedure as compared to the Designated Router e DR Other The interface is connected to a broadcast on which other routers have been selected to be the Designated Router and Back
319. inra cee A Di 268 132321 A MAndadhs abe enedeladndee dhe Mid te meses a aa aAa 268 13 3 2 Policy Create sainan a a a aaeei 268 13 3 39 Action Create ici clei N aae E era 269 13 4 Polley BINCING Stata 270 13 4 1 Binding Table ssssseeeeeeiseeeeeeetttetitettntttttttttttkttttnttttttttrtttnntrnnttnntttrnttnntenneenat 270 13 4 7 on ailne TIA AES E ites 271 ISS VEAN BNO ists A A 272 13 5 Application Example for ACL ooooninnoccccconccccoconononcnnncoconnnnnnnnnnnnnononnonannonnnnnnnennanannnnnnes 273 Chapter 14 Network Security ooococononococccnoccccconnnnonccnnncoconnnnnnnnnnnncnnoncnnnnnncnnncnnencanennnnnnnnaninnanes 275 14 1 A A ahead a ted dia tigre aM Aa 275 ATTE Binding Td ali ess 275 14 12 Manual BINdINO eresse ta p a aa soeee dai aa Adat 276 14 13 ARP Scandium lote 278 142 DACPSAOOPINO isie a td 279 142 1 Global Config ers aeara t aeri A A eana erat 282 142 2 Port Coin cad 284 143 ARP INSPSCUON tt A AEE aa A AEAN de tees 285 1437 ARP Detest smon raar tise aa a a aaraa aeeoa do 288 14 32 ARP Defend ira ee t 289 14433 ARP StAUSUCS ad A A tt 290 14 4 IP Source GUA ii A AA AE AA AA 291 14 5 DoS Defend ooococccnonociconononnnnnnnnnoncnnnnn rn cnn cnn nr nn nn nn enn RR RR RRE RR R nn DR ner nn nr nr ener erre nnanen rra 293 1451 DOS Defend A a A AA 294 IS A OO Re re ee rr eee eT ae ae 294 146 T Global Config ic teeta iia asked bac ee 298 14 62 Pot Coti aiii ibid is bid 300 14 6 3 Radius
320. ion group must have the same Admin Key Specify a Port Priority for the port This value determines the priority of the port to be selected as the dynamic aggregation group member The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred Specify LACP mode for your selected port Enable Disable the LACP feature for your selected port Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 6 3 Traffic Monitor The Traffic Monitor function monitoring the traffic of each port is implemented on the Traffic Summary and Traffic Statistics pages 6 3 1 Traffic Summary Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port which facilitates you to monitor the traffic and analyze the network abnormity Choose the menu Switching Traffic Monitor Traffic Summary to load the following page 55 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Traffic Summary UNIT 3 Select Port Packets Rx Packets Tx Octets Rx Octets Tx Statistics O 301 0 0 0 0 Statistics WM O 302 14900 18782 2368911 5805417 Statistics Ol 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 4 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 05 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 6 15323 11538 3789401 1867628 Statistics O 307 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 30 8 0 0 0 0 Statistics Cl 3 0 9 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 10 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3 0 11 0 0 0 0 Statistics O 3
321. ion information GVRP has the following three port registration modes Normal Fixed and Forbidden e Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information e Fixed In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information That is the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static VLAN to pass 87 e Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information That is the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN namely VLAN 1 to pass Choose the menu VLAN gt GVRP gt GVRP Config to load the following page Global Config GVRP O Enable Disable Port Config UNIT 1 Sed eee Came ne eae pera eee eS O Y a O 1 0 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 A O 10 2 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 3 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 4 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 5 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F O 1 0 6 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 17 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 8 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 A O 1 0 9 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 040 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1 0 44 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 1042 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 110113 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 as O 1 04 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 v Figure 7 16 GVRP Config Mdote If the GVRP feature is enabled for a m
322. ion is held each time the topology changes for example when stack merge or split occurs or the stack or the current master is reset The master is elected based on the following rules and in the order listed 1 2 3 The switch that is currently the stack master The switch with the highest stack member priority value The switch with the lowest MAC address After master election the stack forms and enters into stack management and maintenance stage ote The priority value ranges from 1 to 15 The higher the value is the more likely the member will be elected as the master By default the member priority of the switch is 5 We recommend you manually assign the highest priority value to the switch that you prefer to be the stack master before stack establishment The switch is non preemptible when it joins the stack in cold start mode and the process is illustrated as bellow the switch has no stack role at its start and it sends out discovery messages to collect the topology of the current stack system After the topology collection the switch obtains its role according to the rules above The switch will become stack slave if there is already a master in the stack The master will resume its role even if the newly joined switch has a higher priority 4 Stack Management and Maintenance After the stack is established all the stack members are integrated into a virtual device in the network and managed by the master Th
323. ion is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled Return to CONTENTS 65 Chapter 7 VLAN The traditional Ethernet is a data network communication technology basing on CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect via shared communication medium Through the traditional Ethernet the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision flooding broadcasts poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet Though connecting the LANs through switches can avoid the serious collision the flooding broadcasts can not be prevented which will occupy plenty of bandwidth resources causing potential serious security problems A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control broadcast in LANs By creating VLANs in a physical LAN you can divide the LAN into multiple logical LANs each of which has a broadcast domain of its own Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another as if they are in a LAN However hosts in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly Therefore broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as Router the Layer3 switch etc The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation VLAN 2 Router
324. ion of the multicast group members 210 The multicast model divides into two types depending on whether there is an exact multicast source ASM Any Source Multicast and SSM Source Specific Multicast ASM Any Source Multicast In the ASM model any sender can be a multicast source sending multicast information to a multicast group address and receivers can join a multicast group identified by the group address and obtain multicast information addressed to that multicast group In this model receivers are not aware of the location of the multicast source in advance However they can join or leave the multicast group at any time At any specified moment the number of multicast source in the ASM should be no more than one otherwise network congestion and malfunction of the multicast members may occur SSM Source Specific Multicast In the SSM model the receivers know the exact location of the multicast source The SSM allows host to specify the multicast sources and it uses the multicast group address range different from that of the ASM The SSM marks a multicast session with both multicast address and multicast source address and it builds up dedicated multicast forwarding path for the receiver and its specified multicast source 11 1 Global Config The Global Config can be implemented on the Global Config and Mroute Table pages 11 1 1 Global Config You must enable IP multicast routing Then the software can forward multicast pack
325. is a distance vector routing protocol using UDP packets for exchanging information through port 520 RIP uses hop to measure the distance to a destination The hop count from a router to a directly connected network is 0 The hop count from a router to a directly connected router is 1 To limit convergence time the range of RIP metric value is from 0 to 15 A metric value of 16 or greater is considered infinite which means the destination network is unreachable That is why RIP is not suitable for large scaled networks RIP prevents routing loops by implementing the split horizon and poison reverse functions gt RIP routing table An RIP router has a routing table containing routing entries of all reachable destinations and each routing entry contains e Destination address IP address of a host or a network e Next hop IP address of the adjacent router s interface to reach the destination e Egress interface Packet outgoing interface e Metric Cost from the local router to the destination 157 Route time Time elapsed since the routing entry was last updated The time is reset to 0 every time the routing entry is updated gt RIP timers RIP employs three timers update timeout and garbage collect Update timer defines the interval between routing updates Timeout timer defines the route aging time If no update for a route is received within the aging time the metric of the route is set to 16 in the routing t
326. isplayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Select Enable Disable auto refresh feature Refresh Period Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh period gt IGMP Statistics Interface Displays the interface Query Packet Displays the number of query packets the interface received Report Packet V1 Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the interface received Report Packet V2 Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the interface received Report Packet V3 Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the interface received Leave Packet Displays the number of leave packets the interface received Error Packet Displays the number of error packets the interface received 11 3 PIM DM PIM defined in RFC 3973 is a popular multicast routing protocol within the AS Instead of relying on one specific unicast routing protocol PIM uses the static routing or unicast routing table generated by any unicast routing protocol including RIP OSPF IS IS BGP etc to perform routing for IP multicast data Unlike some other multicast routing protocols PIM doesn t update routing information between routers or maintain an independent route forwarding table PIM uses the RPF Reverse Path Forwarding check mechanism to forward the multicast data There are two types of multicast routing and forwarding tables in the multicast implementation e All the multicast route information will be summarized as
327. item Symbols in this Guide Symbol Description A Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the Note device This format indicates important information that helps you make better use of Tips your device 1 3 Overview of This Guide Chapter Introduction Chapter 1 About This Guide Introduces the guide structure and conventions Chapter 2 Introduction Introduces the features application and appearance of T3700G 28TQ switch Chapter 3 Login to the Switch Introduces how to log on to T3700G 28TQ Web management page Chapter Introduction Chapter 4 System This module is used to configure system properties of the switch Here mainly introduces e System Info Configure the description system time and network parameters of the switch e User Management Configure the user name and password for users to manage the switch with a certain access level e System Tools Manage the configuration file of the switch e Access Security Provide different security measures for the user to enhance the configuration management security Chapter 5 Stack This module is used to configure the stack properties of the switch Here mainly introduces e Stack Info View the detailed information of the stack e Stack Config Configure the current stack e Switch Renumber Configure the stack member s unit ID Chapter 6 Switching This module is us
328. k interface IP address as the router ID which is thus always invariant outward To ensure the uniqueness of the router ID it is recommended to manually configure the router ID or the loopback interface 166 In the automatic election the router would in the first place select the highest loopback interface IP address as the router ID If the router doesn t pre define the loopback interfaces it would select the highest physical interface IP address as the router ID 3 OSPF Network Types OSPF a dynamic routing protocol running in the network layer would apply different working mechanism according to the features of different data link layers There are four sorts of relationships between the working mechanism of OSPF routing protocol and network type 1 Broadcast When the network type is Ethernet or FDDI OSPF protocol would broadcast the Hello LSU and LSAck packets For instance the Hello packet is multicast to the other OSPF routers in the LAN and the destination address is the reserved 224 0 0 5 while the other routers forward the link state update and acknowledgement data to OSPF DR with the reserved multicast address as 224 0 0 6 In such broadcast type of network the DD and LSR packets are unicast 2 NBMA Non Broadcast Multi Access In such type of network as frame relay ATM or X 25 where the routers need extra configuration to find neighbors the OSPF protocol packets are unicast 3 P2MP Point to MultiPoint In genera
329. k layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation of the packet only so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer encapsulation for identification In 1999 IEEE issues the IEEE 802 1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation defining the structure of VLAN tagged packets IEEE 802 1Q protocol defines that a 4 byte VLAN tag is encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information about VLAN As shown in the following figure a VLAN tag contains four fields including TPID Tag Protocol Identifier Priority CFl Canonical Format Indicator and VLAN ID VLAN Tag Figure 7 2 Format of VLAN Tag 1 TPID TPID is a 16 bit field indicating that this data frame is VLAN tagged By default it is 0x8100 2 Priority Priority is a 3 bit field referring to 802 1p priority Refer to section QoS amp QoS profile for details 3 CFI CFI is a 1 bit field indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the standard format in different transmission media This field is not described in detail in this chapter 4 VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet belongs It is in the range of O to 4 095 Generally O and 4 095 is not used so the field is in the range of 1 to 4 094 VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will encapsulate a VLA
330. ket is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode Table 12 3 Security mode and packets processing mode Anote Don t transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for some special requirements The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config Port Config and OUI Config pages 12 3 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN including VLAN ID aging time the transmission priority of the voice packets and so on Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN gt Global Config to load the following page Global Config Voice YLAN VLAN ID Aging Time 1440 Priority 6 O Enable Disable 2 4094 min 1 43200 default 1440 Figure 12 12 Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Voice VLAN VLAN ID Select Enable Disable Voice VLAN function Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN 257 Aging Time Specifies the living time of the member port in auto mode after the OUI address is aging out Priority Select the priority of the port when sending voice data 12 3 2 Port Config Before the voice VLAN function is enabled the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should be configured on this page Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page Port Config
331. kets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over gt Port Config Selected Port s Select a port will enable NTDP function of the port Unselected Port s Unselect a port will disable NTDP function of the port Anos NTDP function is effective only when NTDP function is enabled globally and for the port 17 3 Cluster A commander switch can recognize and add the candidate switch to a cluster automatically based on NDP and NTDP You can manually add the candidate switch to a cluster If the candidate switch is successfully added to the cluster it will get a private IP address assigned by the commander switch You can manage and configure the member switch via the commander switch The Cluster function can be implemented on Cluster Summary Cluster Config Member Config and Cluster Topology pages 17 3 1 Cluster Summary On this page you can view the status of the current cluster Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Summary to load the following page e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Candidate Cluster Management vian VLAN ID 1 Figure17 9 Cluster Summary for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster 343 gt Cluster Management vlan VLAN ID
332. kets The packets with 89 as its IP header protocol segment are OSPF ones This device abides by the standard RFC protocol And we are going to introduce the packet formats involved in the course of OSPF routing protocol running according to the definition by RFC documentation and attached with the images and the meaning of key segments 1 OSPF Header In the course of routing learning OSPF uses five types of packet which have the same OSPF header as shown below 175 32 bits o 8 8 8 8 Version Router ID Aye 0x0000 Key ID Auth Data Len Cryptographic sequence number Figure 10 38 OSPF Header Version The version number of OSPF run by this device For instance the OSPF run by our IPv4 devices is of Version 2 and that run by IPv6 devices is of Version 3 Type The type of this packet There are totally five types of OSPF packets as shown in the table below Type Code Packet Name 1 Hello Packet 2 Database Description Packet Link State Request Packet Link State Update Packet Link State Acknowledgement Packet Table 10 3 OSPF Packet Type Router ID ID of the router sending this packet Area ID ID of the area that the router interface sending this packet belongs to Authentication Type The authentication type applied by this packet The segment marked with in the rear is regarded below as essential information of authentication as sh
333. kets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated and thereby loops can be prevented gt Root Protect A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high bandwidth core region Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities being received by the legal root bridge which causes the current legal root bridge to lose its position and network topology jitter to occur In this case flows that should travel along high speed links may lead to low speed links and network congestion may occur To avoid this MSTP provides root protect function Ports with this function enabled can only be set as designated ports in all spanning tree instances When a port of this type receives BDPU packets with higher priority it transits its state to blocking state and stops forwarding packets as if it is disconnected from the link The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for 60 seconds gt TC Protect A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDU packets If a user maliciously sends a large amount of TC BPDU packets to a switch in a short period the switch will be busy with removing MAC address entries which may decrease the performance and stability of the network To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries you can enable the TC protect function on the switch
334. key and the supplicant system encrypted password to the RADIUS server for further authentication Whereas the randomly generated key in EAP MD5 relay mode is generated by the authentication server and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication packet and forward it to the RADIUS server gt 802 1X Timer In 802 1 x authentication the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system the switch and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way 1 Supplicant system timer Supplicant Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system The switch will resend the request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the specified timeout period 2 RADIUS server timer Server Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server The switch will resend 297 the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified timeout period 3 Quiet period timer Quiet Period This timer sets the quiet period When a supplicant system fails to pass the authentication the switch quiets for the specified period before it processes another authentication request re initiated by the supplicant system gt Guest VLAN Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to access the specific network resourc
335. l P2MP type of network is converted from NBMA where the Hello packet is multicast 224 0 0 5 LSU and LSAck packets are multicast 224 0 0 5 or unicast DD and LSR packets are unicast 4 P2P Point to Point When the link layer protocol is PPP or HDLC the link always connects a pair of routers who could generally establish an adjacency relationship after becoming valid neighbors In this type of network the protocol packets are multicast 224 0 0 5 Our switches are all Ethernet ones The network type of all the interfaces defaults to Broadcast and it also supports to be configured as P2P type that can automatically find neighbors To ensure the communication of multi point networking it s not recommended to manually configure the network type of interfaces In the following guide we will mainly take the broadcast type of interface for example to introduce the working principle of OSPF protocol 4 Designated Router and Backup Designated Router On broadcast networks or NBMA networks usually there are multiple routers running OSPF protocol at the same time If the neighbor relationship between any two routers is adjacency the change of one router could result in the repeated forwarding of route updates and a waste of network resources DR Designated Router and BDR Backup Designated Router defined by OSPF protocol would maintain the entire network while the other routers only need to establish adjacency relationships with DR and
336. l IP Format 192 168 0 1 VRRP Table Select VRID Interface Interface IP Virtual IP Priority Status Other No entry in the table Al The total number ofthe virtual router O Figure10 58 VRRP Basic Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VRRP Basic Config VRID Enter the VRID only if you are creating a new VRRP The VRID ranges from 1 to 255 Interface Select the Interface ID for the new VRRP 202 Virtual IP Create Clear gt VRRP Table Select VRID Interface Interface IP Virtual IP Priority Status Other Select All Delete Enter the IP Address associated with the new VRRP Click the button to add a new VRRP Click the button to clear the configuration Select one or more items Displays the VRID associated with the VRRP Displays the Interface ID associated with the VRRP Displays the IP Address associated with the selected interface Displays the primary Virtual IP associated with the VRRP Displays the priority associated with the VRRP Displays the status associated with the VRRP Displays more information about the VRRP Select all the VRRP items Delete the selected items Click Detail to display the following figure Details of the Specified VRRP YRID Interface Description Interface IP Status Configure Priority Running Priority Advertise Timer Preempt Delay Timer Preempt Mode Authentication Type Key Virtual
337. l VLANs can be sorted by IP IPX DECnet AppleTalk Banyan and so on Through the Protocol VLANs the broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position in the network with its VLAN member role always effective By creating Protocol VLANs the network administrator can manage the network clients basing on their actual applications and services effectively This switch can classify VLANs basing on the common protocol types listed in the following table Please create the Protocol VLAN to your actual need Protocol Type Type value ARP 0x0806 IP 0x0800 MPLS 0x8847 0x8848 IPX 0x8137 IS IS 0x8000 LACP 0x8809 802 1X 0x888E Table 7 2 Protocol types in common use The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag to it If no Protocol VLAN is matched the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission 2 When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it basing on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded 3 If t
338. l regions Each region has several internal spanning trees which are independent of each other e MSTP provides a load balancing mechanism for the packets transmission in the VLAN e MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP gt MSTP Elements MST Region Multiple Spanning Tree Region An MST Region comprises switches with the same region configuration and VLAN to Instances mapping relationship MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance Multiple spanning trees can be generated in an MST region through MSTP one spanning tree being independent of another Each spanning tree is referred to as a multiple spanning tree instance IST Internal Spanning Tree An IST is a spanning tree in an MST CST Common Spanning Tree ACST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all MST regions in the network CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree A CIST comprising IST and CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP 99 gt Figure 8 2 Basic MSTP diagram MSTP MSTP divides a network into several MST regions The CST is generated between these MST regions and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region Each spanning trees is called an instance As well as STP MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree The only difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carries the MSTP configuration information on the switches
339. large scale network OSPF protocol can divide the routers in an autonomous system into logic areas identified by Area ID After the area partition the intra area routers will accomplish the route addressing and data forwarding according to the standard OSPF routing protocol While the boundary routers of multiple areas will have to summarize the information from the routers of all areas to the backbone area that is identified as Area 0 and then the backbone area will advertise these summary to the other areas As below is the model of area partition Area2 Figure 10 33 Area Model As shown above a large scale network is divided into three areas Area 0 Area 1 and Area 2 Area 1 and Area 2 exchange the routing information via Backbone Area which has to maintain its 171 network connectivity at all time The non backbone Area 1 and Area 2 cannot communicate directly with each other but they can exchange routing information through the backbone Area 0 On large scale networks an appropriate area partition can help greatly to save network resources and enhance the speed of the routing After the area partition in the network routers of different type need to accomplish different tasks Different areas need to transmit the routing information to the backbone area in different ways due to their different locations relative to the backbone area In the following we will introduce the details involved after the area partition 1 Router Ty
340. lay the information of the corresponding port Local Interface Enable Disable the auto refresh function Device Type Specify the auto refresh rate Application Type Application Type indicates the primary function of the applications defined for the network policy 332 Unknown Policy Displays whether the local device will explicitly advertise the policy Flag required by the device but currently unknown VLAN tagged Indicates the VLAN type the specified application type is using tagged or untagged Media Policy VLAN Displays the application eg Voice VLAN VLAN identifier VID for ID the port Media Policy Layer Displays the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified 2 Priority application type Media Policy DSCP Displays the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 16 4 4 Neighbor Info On this page you can get the LLDP MED information of the neighbors Choose the menu LLDP LLDP MED Neighbor Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh C Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate E sec 3 300 LLDP MED Neighbor Info UNIT 113 PayPal Ped Ped Fal a Fa fel 18 20 122 24 26 2 BLUE a ls Unselected Portis E Selected Portis 3 Not Available for Selection Port 1 01 Device Type Application Type Location Data Format Power Type Information No en
341. lays the role the switch plays currently Online Time Displays the time when the member switch is added to the cluster Hops Displays the hop count from the member switch to the commander switch e Fora member switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Member ClusterName TP Commander MAC 00 0A EB 13 12 F7 Cluster Management vian VLAN ID 1 Figure17 11 Cluster Summary for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster Cluster Name Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to Commander MAC Displays the MAC address of the commander switch gt Cluster Management vlan VLAN ID Displays the management VLAN ID of the switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed 345 Global Config Cluster undefined Cluster Role Individual Cluster Management vian VLAN ID 1 Figure17 12 Cluster Summary for Individual Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster gt Cluster Management vlan VLAN ID Displays the management VLAN ID of the switch 17 3 2 Cluster Config On this page you can c
342. le Figure 11 6 Interface State The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Interface VLAN Loopback Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Enter the Loopback ID the desired entry must carry 218 Routed Port gt Interface State Table Interface IP Address Querier IP Querier State Other Querier Expire Time Number Of Groups Enter the routed port the desired entry must carry The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured The IP address of the selected interface The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached Indicates whether the selected interface is in querier or non querier mode The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires If the local system is the querier this will be zero The current number of dynamic groups for the selected interface 11 2 3 Static Multicast Config On this page you can configure the static multicast table The multicast groups configured here are not learned by IGMP and are independent of dynamic multicast groups and multicast filter Multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 1 to 239 255 255 255 The range for receivers to join is from 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Static Multicast Group to load the following page 219 IGMP Static Multicast Group
343. le Loop Protect function for the non edge ports Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to the PC and server Return to CONTENTS 115 Chapter 9 Multicast gt Multicast Overview In the network packets are sent in three modes unicast broadcast and multicast In unicast the source server sends separate copy information to each receiver When a large number of users require this information the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to the users Therefore large bandwidth will be occupied In broadcast the system transmits information to all users in a network Any user in the network can receive the information no matter the information is needed or not Point to multipoint multimedia business such as video conferences and VoD video on demand plays an important part in the information transmission field Suppose a point to multi point service is required unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users whereas broadcast is suitable for networks with densely distributed users When the number of users requiring this information is not certain unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency Multicast solves this problem It can deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi point service which can save large bandwidth and reduce the network load In multicast the packets are transmitted in the following way as shown in the following f
344. le o 3 O 305 Disable Disable O 306 Disable Disable O 307 Disable Disable O 308 Disable Disable O 30 9 Disable Disable O 3 0 10 Disable Disable O 3 0 41 Disable Disable O 30 12 Disable Disable vi Figure 6 3 Port Mirror Config 46 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Mirror Session Session gt Destination Port Destination Port gt Source Port Displays session number Input or select a physical port from the port panel as the mirroring port Select Select the desired port as a mirrored port It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Ingress Select Enable Disable the Ingress feature When the Ingress is enabled the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port Egress Select Enable Disable the Egress feature When the Egress is enabled the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to The LAG member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port Mnote 1 The LAG member can not be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port 2 Aportcan not be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously 3 The Port Mirror function can take effect span the multiple VLANs 6 1 3 Port Security MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relationship between the port and the MAC address of the conne
345. lect the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Defend Select Enable Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port Speed 10 100 pps Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second Current Speed pps Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets Status Displays the status of the ARP attack LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to Operation Click the Recover button to restore the port to the normal status The ARP Defend for this port will be re enabled Mdote It s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port 14 3 3 ARP Statistics ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port which facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Statistics to load the following page 290 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Refresh Interval sec 3 300 Illegal ARP Packet UNIT 1 Port Trusted Port lllegal ARP Packet 1 0 11 No 0 e 1 0 2 No 0 1 0 3 No 0 1 0 4 No 0 1 0 5 No 0 1 0 6 No 0 1 0 17 No 0 1 0 8 No 0 1 0 9 No 0 E 1 0 10 No 0 1 0 11 No 0 1 0 12 No 0 1 0 13 No 0 1 0 14 No 0 1 0 15 No 0 v Figure 14 16 ARP Statistics The following entries are displayed on thi
346. licated The amount of the PCs always exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses The wireless network and the laptops are widely used and the locations of the PCs are always changed Therefore the corresponding IP address of the 279 PC should be updated with a few configurations DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol the network configuration protocol optimized and developed basing on the BOOTP functions to solve the above mentioned problems gt DHCP Working Principle DHCP works via the Client Server communication mode The Client applies to the Server for configuration The Server assigns the configuration information such as the IP address to the Client so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source A Server can assign the IP address for several Clients which is illustrated in the following figure For details about the DHCP Server function please refer to 10 4 DHCP Server DHCP Server Access Layer Switch Central Switch DHCP Client DHCP Client 2 DHCP Client 3 DHCP Client 4 Figure 14 5 Network diagram for DHCP snooping implementation For different DHCP Clients DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods 1 Manually assign the IP address Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to the specific Client e g WWW Server via the DHCP Server 2 Automatically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP address without an expiration time limitation to the Client
347. licy Name VLAN ID Direction Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction 272 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure effective Required On ACL Time Range configuration pages time range configure the effective time ranges for ACLs 2 Configure ACL rules Required On ACL gt ACL Config configuration pages configure ACL rules to match packets 3 Configure Policy Required On ACL Policy Config configuration pages configure the policy to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules 4 Bind the policy to port VLAN the Required On ACL gt Policy Binding configuration pages bind the policy to the port VLAN to make the policy effective on the corresponding port VLAN 13 5 Application Example for ACL gt Network Requirements 1 The manager of the R amp D department can access to the forum of the company without any forbiddance The MAC address of the manager is 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 2 The staff of the R amp D department can visit the forum during the working time 3 The staff of the marketing department can not visit the forum during the working time 4 The R amp D department and marketing department can
348. lish letters and underlines only Figure 5 8 Stack Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 40 Stack Config Stack Name Stack Auth Mode Stack Auth Key Input Again Stack Priority Config Switch Role MAC Address Priority Stack Port Config Stack Port Status Enter the name of the stack The length of this field should be 1 30 characters After the stack is established the name of master determines the stack name Select the authentication mode used in stack creation There are three options None Simple and MD5 None Indicates no authentication mode is adopted in stack creation e Simple Indicates simple plain text authentication mode is adopted in stack creation MD5 Indicates MD5 authentication mode is adopted in stack creation Enter the authentication password used in stack authentication if the Stack Auth Mode is Simple or MD5 Retype the authentication password which should be the same with above The unit number of the switch The role of the switch in the stack as Master or Slave The unique identification of the switch The priority for the stack member The priority ranges from 1 to 15 The new priority value takes effect immediately but does not affect the current stack master The new priority helps determine which stack member is elected as the new stack master when the current stack master or the switch stack resets Select the desir
349. llowing entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Host Index Displays the index of the log host The switch supports 4 log hosts Host IP Configure the IP for the log host UDP Port Displays the UDP port used for receiving sending log information Here we use the standard port 514 Severity Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log host Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be sent to the corresponding log host Status Enable Disable the log host Aner The Log Server software is not provided If necessary please download it on the Internet 18 2 4 Backup Log Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device diagnosis and statistics analysis When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system you can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis after the switch is restarted Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Backup Log to load the following page 359 Backup Log Click the button here to backup the log file Note It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without any operation Figure18 6 Backup Log The following entry is displayed on this screen gt Backup Log Backup Log Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer Mdote It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without any
350. lobally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally 2 Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 3 Create SNMP Required alternatively Community e Create SNMP Community directly directly On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Community page create SNMP Community based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c Configure e Create SNMP Group and SNMP User access level a for the User Create SNMP Similar to the configuration way based on Group and SNMP SNMPv3 you can create SNMP Group and SNMP User of SNMP v1 v2c The User name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a community name The users can manage the device via the Read View Write View and Notify User 311 View defined in the SNMP Group 15 2 Notification With the Notification function enabled the switch can initiatively report to the management station about the important events that occur on the Views e g the managed device is rebooted which allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time The notification information includes the following two types Trap Trap is the information that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network management station without
351. mary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN 2 A VLAN can not be set as the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN simultaneously 3 A Secondary VLAN can only join one private VLAN 90 4 A Primary VLAN can be associated with multi Secondary VLANs to create multi Private VLANs gt Private VLAN Implementation To hide Secondary VLANs from uplink devices and save VLAN resources Private VLAN containing one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN requires the following characteristics e Packets from different Secondary VLANs can be forwarded to the uplink device via promiscuous port and carry no corresponding Secondary VLAN information e Packets from Primary VLANs can be sent to end users via host port and carry no Primary VLAN information Private VLAN functions are implemented on the PVLAN Config and Port Config pages 7 9 1 PVLAN Config On this page you can create Private VLAN and view the information of the current defined Private VLANs Choose the menu VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config to load the following page Create Private VLAN Primary VLAN 2 4094 Secondary VLAN l o i Format 2 4 5 8 Secondary VLAN Type Community v Search Option Search Option AI Private VLAN Table Select Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN VLAN Type Port No entry in the table Total Private VLAN 0 Note Its recommended to create less than 10 Private VLANs at a time Figure 7 17 Create Private VLAN The following entr
352. mean ett eae tata 101 Bel STP CONi it ici 101 8 12 E ST PASUMMARY ne e neh th eed dee haere 103 8 2 A 103 3 37 MST PAINStAN CC sein aaa 105 8 3 1 Region Contig Lai AA id 105 8 3 2 Ec eeraa a aade i a AA eena EEan 106 8 3 3 Instance Port CONflO ccccccccnnonooncccncccccnconononcnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnanencanns 107 8 4 STP SOC Vii A e AI ae ea pee 109 8 4 1 Port Protection tii 109 342 EP At 111 8 5 Application Example for STP Function oooooooccccnnncccococonocnncnoncconanannnoncnnnnononnnnnnccnnnnos 112 Ghapter 9 Multicas tc A E A e 116 9 1 IGMP SNOOpING ME A E E AS E eed 118 9 1 1 SNOOPING CONIC ME PE E TE 119 9 1 2 Port Config aso ih nie eG ee nin et a Gee 120 Solas SVAN CONO ds o da deso dun dond 121 9A Multicast VLAN td 123 9 1 5 Que rier COMIG imprentas aaa 125 9 2 Application Example for Multicast VLAN 0 ccccecceeceesecececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteesnneneees 127 9 3 MulticaStlP ii A nee aes 129 9 3 1 Multicast P Table iia E Ea 129 9 32 Static Multicast Prarie di Bel eie iinet eevee eet 129 G4 IMulticast Filteri a a a araa aa aiat 131 9 4 1 Profile Config aeaaeae a a Ea a e aa 131 9 4 2 Profile BINdIN Y issie neend enor bed 132 9 9 PacketiStatistiCSs r tala 133 Chapter 10 Routing ccccccccceceeeeeeccene aces eeeeeee cae aeeeeeeeeeeececeeeaeeeeeeeseecneeaeeeseeseteeceaeaeeeeeeeetees 135 IN A RA 135 10 2 ROUINO Table tucan MEERE Amat 138 IAS 138 10 4 DH
353. mes The Join Timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds Once the Leave Timer is set the GARP port receiving a Leave message will start its Leave timer and deregister the attribute information if it does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds Displays the LAG to which the port belongs LeaveAll Timer gt 10 Leave Timer Leave Timer gt 2 Join Timer Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type of the port to be TRUNK 2 Enable GVRP function Required On the VLAN gt GVRP page enable GVRP function 3 Configure the port registration Required On the VLAN gt GVRP page configure the mode and the timers for the parameters of ports basing on actual applications 7 9 Private VLAN Private VLANs designed to save VLAN resources of uplink devices and decrease broadcast are sets of VLAN pairs that share a common primary identifier To guarantee user information security the ease with which to manage and account traffic for service providers in campus network service providers usually require that each individual user is Layer 2 separated VLAN feature can solve this problem However as stipulated by IEEE 802 1Q pr
354. mes are not counted in Displays the number of good multicast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Displays the number of good unicast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error and have a bad FCS with an integral octet CRC Error The length of the packet is between 64 bytes and 1518 bytes Displays the number of the received packets excluding error packets that are less than 64 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are 64 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 65 and 127 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 128 and 255 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 256 and 511 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are more than 1023 bytes long Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during packet transmissions 58 6 4 MAC Address The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports base
355. messages are transmitted from the selected interface The valid value ranges from 1 to 18725 seconds and the default is 30 seconds Join Prune Interval Specify the frequency at which PIM Join Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface The valid value range from 1 to 18724 seconds and the default value is 60 seconds DR Priority Specify the DR priority for the selected interface The valid value range from 0 to 4294967294 The default value is 1 BSR Border Select to enable or disable the BSR border to define a PIM bootstrap message boundary for the PIM domain IP Address Displays the IP address of the interface Neighbor Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors of this interface DR Address Displays the DR address of the interface 11 4 2 PIM SM Neighbor PIM SM neighbor is automatically learned by sending and receiving Hello Packets when PIM SM is enabled Choose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM PIM SM Neighbor to load the following page Search Option Search Option ALL I PIM SM Neighbor Interface Neighbor Uptime Expires No entry in the table Total PIM SM neighbor O Figure 11 21 PIM SM neighbor The following entries are displayed on this screen 237 gt Search Option Search Option e ALL Displays all entries e Interface Select Interface and enter the interface ID of your desired entry e Neighbor Select Neighbor and enter the neighbor address of your desired entry
356. mount of times the switch resends an inform request The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding management station IP Address Displays the IP Address of the management host UDP Port Displays the UDP port used to send notifications User Displays the User name of the management station Security Model Security Level Displays the Security Model of the management station Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Type Displays the type of the notifications Retry Displays the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request Timeout Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform request Operation Click the Edit button to modify the corresponding entry and click the Modify button to apply 15 3 RMON RMON Remote Monitoring basing on SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol architecture functions to monitor the network RMON is currently a commonly used network management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force IETF which is mainly used to monitor the d
357. mply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices acts as the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between
358. n it sends out a Leave message Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before the timer times out e LeaveAll Timer Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer and sends out a LeaveAll message after the timer times out so that other GARP entities can re register all the attribute information on this entity After that the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a new cycle gt GVRP GVRP as an implementation of GARP maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch the switch receives the VLAN registration information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information including VLAN members ports through which the VLAN members can be reached and so on The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information The VLAN registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally but also the dynamic registration information which is received from other switches In this switch only the port with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to maintain the VLAN registrat
359. n for port enable VLAN Mapping function for the ports 3 Create SP Service Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page create the Provider VLAN SP VLAN For the steps of creating VLAN please refer to 802 1Q VLAN 7 8 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is an implementation of GARP generic attribute registration protocol GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN gt GARP GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver propagate and register the information among the members GARP itself does not work as the entity among the devices The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation and GVRP is the implementation of GARP When GARP is implemented on a port of device the port is called GARP entity The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages GARP defines the messages into three types Join Leave and LeaveAll e Join Message When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Join message And when receiving the Join message from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically the device also sends out a Join message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities e Leave Message When a GA
360. n insecure network environment It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the information in a remote management being leaked Comprising server and client SSH has two versions V1 and V2 which are not compatible with each other In the communication SSH server and client can auto negotiate the SSH version and the encryption algorithm After getting a successful negotiation the client sends authentication request to the server for login and then the two can communicate with each other after successful authentication This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH connection using SSH client software SSH key can be downloaded into the switch If the key is successfully downloaded the certificate authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch Choose the menu System Access Security SSH Config to load the following page 27 Global Config SSH Enable Disable Protocol V1 Enable Disable Protocol V2 O Enable Disable Apply Idle Timeout 1120 sec 1 120 Max Connect 5 1 5 Key Download Choose the SSH public key file to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSA DSA v Se Browse Key File Note It will take a long time to download the key file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 17 SSH Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Global Config SSH Select Enable Disable SSH function P
361. n not be managed by the SNMP management station View Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding view All the entries of a View will be deleted together View Name Displays the name of the View entry View Type Displays the type of the View entry MIB Object ID Displays the OID of the View entry 15 1 3 SNMP Group On this page you can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View 306 Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Group to load the following page Group Config Group Name 16 characters maximum Security Model vio Security Level noAuthNoPriv w Read View viewDefault Write View None i Notify View None v Group Table Select Group Name cord Security Level Read View Write View Notify View Operation No entry in the table All Delete Help Note A group should contain a read view and the default read view is viewDefault Figure15 5 SNMP Group The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Group Config Group Name Enter the SNMP Group name The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group These three items of the Users in one group should be the same Security Model Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group e vi SNMPv1 is defined for the group In this model the Communit
362. nable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page Create a multicast VLAN Required Create a multicast VLAN and add all the member ports and router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN page e Configure the link type of the member ports as GENERAL e Configure the link type of the router ports as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as tagged GENERAL Configure parameters for Optional Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the multicast VLAN Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page It is recommended to keep the default time parameters Look over the configuration If it is successfully configured the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page 9 1 5 Querier Config In an IP multicast network that runs IGMP a Layer 3 multicast device works as an IGMP querier to send IGMP queries and manage the multicast table But IGMP is not supported by the devices in Layer 2 network IGMP Snooping Querier can act as an IGMP Router in Layer 2 network It can help to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it generates Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Querier Config to load the following page 125 IGMP Snooping Querier Config VLAN ID
363. name of the time range for time identification Holiday Select Holiday you set as a time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday Absolute Select Absolute to configure absolute time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the absolute time range Week Select Week to configure week time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the week time range gt Create Time Slice Start Time Set the start time of the time slice End Time Set the end time of the time slice gt Time Slice Table Index Displays the index of the time slice Start Time Displays the start time of the time slice 262 End Time Displays the end time of the time slice Delete Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time slice 13 1 3 Holiday Config Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode On this page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Holiday Config to load the following page Create Holiday Start Date 01 vii ior End Date o1 visio Apply Holiday Name Holiday Table Select Index Holiday Name Start Date End Date O 1 NewYearDay 01 01 01 01 al Figure 13 3 Holiday Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create
364. nce ID Instance Status Local Bridge Region Root Internal Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count 8 2 Port Config Disable MSTP 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 43 30 1 1 Disable 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 44 41 1 Figure 8 5 STP Summary On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree Port Config to load the following page 103 Port Config UNIT 1 Select Port Status z 1 04 Disable 1 0 2 Disable 1 0 3 Disable 1 0 4 Disable 1 0 5 Disable 1 0 6 Disable 1 0 7 Disable 10 8 Disable 1 0 9 Disable 1 0 10 1 0 11 1 0 12 1 0 13 1 0 14 1 0 15 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Note Priority 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Ext Path Cost Int Path Cost Edge Port P2P Link MCheck Port Mode Port Role Port Status LAG l Al J E Auto Auto Disable Auto a Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto
365. nd of information is being sent Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is the actual information to be sent The basic TLV Format is shown as follows TLV information TLV type string length TLV information string 7 bits 9 bits 0 lt n lt 511 octets TLV header Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information contained in the TLV The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs TLV Type TLV Name Description Usage in LLDPDU End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in LLDPDUs Mandatory Any information following an End Of LLDPDU TLV shall be ignored Chassis ID Identifies the Chassis address of the connected Mandatory device 320 TLV Type TLV Name Description Usage in LLDPDU 2 Port ID Identifies the specific port that transmitted the Mandatory LLDP frame When the device does not advertise MED TLY this field displays the port name of the port when the device advertises MED TLV this field displays the MAC address of the port 3 Time To Live Indicates the number of seconds that the Mandatory neighbor device is to regard the local information to be valid 4 Port Description Identifies the description string of the port Optional 5 System Name Identifies the system name Optional 6 System Identifies the system description Optional Descrip
366. nd report generating gt SNMP Management Frame SNMP management frame includes three network elements SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB Management Information Base SNMP Management Station SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the SNMP client program providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage the most network devices conveniently SNMP Agent Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station In the meanwhile Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as device reboot MIB MIB is the set of the managed objects MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects including the names the access rights and the data types Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB The SNMP Management station can read write the MIB objects basing on its management right SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed object The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged through SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The relationship among SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure MIB Read Configure the MIB variables Send response and notification packets SNMP Managemen
367. ndix C 802 1X Client Software oooocoonncnocccnncccccncononncononcnconcnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnes 374 Appendix D GIOSSANY iii AE 382 VIII Package Contents The following items should be found in your box One T3700G 28TQ switch One PSM150 AC One Power Cord One Console Cable Two mounting brackets and other fittings Installation Guide Vv Vv VV VV WV Resource CD for T3700G 28TQ switch including e This User Guide e The Command Line Interface Guide e Other Helpful Information Mnote Make sure that the package contains the above items If any of the listed items are damaged or missing please contact your distributor Chapter 1 About This Guide This User Guide contains information for setup and management of T3700G 28TQ switch Please read this guide carefully before operation 1 1 Intended Readers This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies 1 2 Conventions In this Guide the following conventions are used gt The switch or T3700G 28TQ mentioned in this Guide stands for T3700G 28TQ JetStream 28 Port Gigabit Stackable L3 Managed Switch without any explanation gt Menu Name gt Submenu Name gt Tab page indicates the menu structure System System Info gt System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu option that is located under the System menu gt Bold font indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu
368. ne Philips Phone Pingtel Phone PolyCom Phone 3Com Phone Enter the OUI address of the voice device Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device Give a description to the OUI for identification 259 gt OUl Select OUI Mask Description Table Select the desired entry to view the detailed information Displays the OUI address of the voice device Displays the OUI address mask of the voice device Displays the description of the OUI Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN Step Operation Description 1 Configure the link type of Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page the port configure the link type of ports of the voice device 2 Create VLAN Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN 3 Add OUI address Optional On QoS gt Voice VLAN OUI Config page you can check whether the switch is supporting the OUI template or not If not please add the OUI address 4 Configure the parameters Required On QoS Voice VLAN Port Config page of the ports in voice VLAN configure the parameters of the ports in voice VLAN 5 Enable Voice VLAN Required On QoS Voice VLAN gt Global Config page configure the global parameters of voice VLAN Return to CONTENTS 260 Chapter 13 ACL ACL Access Control List is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies of packets in order to control
369. ne monitor Disable O 3 public None monitor Disable O 4 public None monitor Disable O 5 public None monitor Disable O 6 public None monitor Disable O 7 public None monitor Disable O 8 public None monitor Disable g g public None monitor Disable O 10 public None monitor Disable Fl 11 public None monitor Disable g 12 public None monitor Disable m Figure15 11 Event Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Event Table Select Index User Description Type Owner Status 15 3 4 Alarm Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Enter the name of the User or the community to which the event belongs Give a description to the event for identification Select the event type which determines the act way of the network device in response to an event e None No processing e Log Logging the event e Notify Sending trap messages to the management station e Log amp Notify Logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Select Enable Disable the corresponding event entry On this page you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON 316 Choose the menu SNMP gt RMON gt Alarm to load the following page Alarm Config Select Index Variable Statistics Sampl
370. nentic sation Telnet E Program Files private ppk Rlogin z SSH Kex TTY x11 Tunnels Bugs After successful authentication please enter the login user name If you log on to the switch without entering password it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded 192 168 0 1 PulIY Fur hentication Authenticating with ub e rsa key 20140127 gt 2006 01 01 09 3 Us 3 Login the C py wryO 192 168 0 110 Mnote Following the steps above you have already entered the User EXEC Mode of the switch However to configure the switch you need a password to enter the Privileged EXEC Mode first For a switch with factory settings the Privileged EXEC Mode password can only be configured through the console connection For how to configure the Privileged EXEC Mode password please refer to the 1 1 2 Configuring the Privileged EXEC Mode Password in CLI Reference Guide Return to CONTENTS 32 Chapter 5 Stack The stack technology is to connect multiple stackable devices through their StackWise ports forming a stack which works as a unified system and presents as a single entity to the network in Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols It enables multiple devices to collaborate and be managed as a whole which improves the performance and simplifies the management of the devices efficiently gt Advantages The stack delivers the following benefits 1 Simplified management After stack establishment the us
371. ng ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding ClearBinding Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired entry for configuration The port to be bound The existing Profile ID bound to the selected port The maximum multicast group a port can join gt lt The policy should be taken when the number of multicast group a port has joined reach the maximum e Drop drop the successive report packet and this port can not join any other multicast group e Replace when the port joins another new multicast group it will quit the existing multicast group randomly The LAG number which the port belongs to Click the ClearBinding button to clear all profiles bound to the port Click the Profile button to create new IGMP profiles 223 11 2 6 Packet Statistics On this page you can view multicast packet statistics over each interface of the switch which facilitates you monitor the IGMP packets in the network Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Packet Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Period sec 3 300 IGMP Statistics Interface Query Packet Report Packet W1 Report Packet 42 Report Packet Y3 Leave Packet Error Packet No entry in the table Figure 11 10 Packet Statistics The following entries are d
372. ng removed from the cluster the member switch becomes to be the candidate switch 335 e The commander switch becomes to be the candidate switch only when the cluster is deleted gt Introduction to Cluster Cluster functions to configure and manage the switches in the cluster based on three protocols NDP NTDP and CMP Cluster Management Protocol e NDP All switches get neighbor information by collecting NDP e NTDP The commander switch collects the NDP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network range to determine the candidate switches in the cluster Cluster maintenance The commander switch adds the candidate switch to the cluster and removes the member switch from the cluster according to the collected NTDP information The Cluster module mainly used for cluster management configuration including three submenus NDP NTDP Cluster and batch Management 17 1 NDP NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol is used to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices to support cluster establishing An NDP enabled device sends NDP packets regularly to neighbor devices as well as receives NDP packets from neighbor devices An NDP packet carries the NDP information including the device name MAC address firmware version and so on A switch keeps and maintains a neighbor information table which contains the NDP information of each neighbor switch If a switch receives the NDP info
373. nger Network Print Server gt an Macrobject gt ee S Adobe ImageReady CS2 y AN Adobe Photoshop CS2 A DLS1100 exe E Windows Movie Maker Mozilla Firefox gt i TP LINK SES ES TP LINK 802 1X FA i sta LINK 802 1X P tog Off Turn Off Computer Ta ee A EE All Programs E fai y p dwa RETON Dore ws Sna Luan Figure C 8 Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X 377 2 Then the following screen will appear If you want to stop the remove process click Cancel TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait InstallShield Cancel Figure C 9 Preparing Setup 3 On the continued screen click Yes to remove the application from your PC TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its Features Figure C 10 Uninstall the Application 4 Click Finish to complete TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling T pSupplicant Back Cancel Figure C 11 Uninstall Complete 1 3 Configuration 1 After completing installation double click the icon ES to run the TP LINK 802 1X Client Software The following screen will appear 378 5 TP LINK 802 1 Client TP LINK N
374. nication Endpoint Devices based on configuration of the Network Connectivity Device it s connected to You can set the Location Identification content in Location Identification Parameters If Location Identification TLV is included and Location Identification Parameters isn t set a default value is used in Location Identification TLV Extended Power Via MDI TLV The Extended Power Via MDI TLV is intended to enable advanced power management between LLDP MED Endpoint and Network Connectivity Devices and it allows advertisement of fine grained power requirement details Endpoint power priority as well as both Endpoint and Network Connectivity Device power status Inventory TLV The Inventory TLV set contains seven basic Inventory management TLVs that is Hardware Revision TLV Firmware Revision TLV Software Revision TLV Serial Number TLV Manufacturer Name TLV Model Name TLV and Asset ID TLV If support for any of the TLVs in the Inventory Management set is implemented then support for all Inventory Management TLVs shall be implemented LLDP MED is configured on the Global Config Port Config Local Info and Neighbor Info pages 16 4 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the LLDP MED parameters of the device globally Choose the menu LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Global Config to load the following page LLDP MED Parameters Config Fast Start Count 4 19 Device Class Network Connectivity Figure 16
375. not communicate with each other gt Network Diagram J D a TU Tu R amp D Department 10 10 70 0 Manager 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 Switch WE Marketing Department 10 10 50 0 Forum Server 10 10 88 5 00 64 A5 32 4C 12 gt Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure On ACL Time Range page create a time range named work_time Time range Select Week mode and configure the week time from Monday to Friday Add a time slice 08 00 18 00 273 Step Operation Description Configure requirement 1 for On ACL ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 11 On ACL ACL Config MAC ACL page select ACL 11 create Rule 1 configure the operation as Permit configure the S MAC as 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 and mask as FF FF FF FF FF FF and configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named manager On ACL gt Policy Config lt Action Create page add ACL 11 to Policy manager On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy manager to bind to port 1 0 3 Configure requirement and 4 for 2 On ACL gt ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 100 On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 1 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 50 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range
376. nterface working in the RIPv2 broadcast mode can also receive RIPv1 messages gt RIP Message Format 1 RIPv1 message format An RIPv1 message consists of a header and up to 25 route entries The following figure shows the format of RIPv1 message 15 31 0 7 IP address Route Figure 10 23 RIPv1 Message Format The detailed explanations of each field are stated as following e Command Type of message 1 indicates request and 2 indicates response e Version Version of RIP 0x01 for RIPv1 e AFI Address Family Identifier 2 for IP e P Address Destination IP address of the route It can be a natural network subnet or a host address e Metric Cost of the route 2 RIPv2 message format The format of RIPv2 message is shown as the following figure It is similar to RIPv1 15 0 7 31 ci IP address Route Next hop Figure 10 24 RIPv2 Message Format 159 The detailed explanations of each field are stated as following e Version Version of RIP For RIPv2 the value is 0x02 e Route Tag Route Tag e P Address Destination IP address It can be a natural network address subnet address or host address e Subnet Mask Mask of the destination address e Next Hop If set to be 0 0 0 0 it indicates that the originator of the route is the best next hop otherwise it indicates a next hop better than the originator of the route gt RIPv2 authentication RIPv2 sets the AFI field of the first route entry
377. o provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a network service experience of a better quality gt QoS This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function Packets are mapped to different priority queues CoS Packets sent via this interface lt lt lt j Packets are forwarded Ta G a ag Egress interface a pod S eses ae EREL Gs i Packets are forwarded Packets H according to the pagers Scheduling schedule mode classification Figure 12 1 QoS function e Traffic classification Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain rules e Map The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority modes This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP e Queue scheduling algorithm When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch supports four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ gt Priority Mode This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP By default the priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional
378. of the interface is important for the switch as the virtual router The more up states of the interfaces the more likely the switch becomes master Forrnat 192 168 0 1 Interface Virtual IP No entry in the table Figure10 61 Virtual IP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen This filed is used to add virtual IP addresses associated with the VRRP Up to five virtual IP addresses can be added for every VRRP Select the VRID From the from the pull down list Select the Interface ID from the pull down list Enter an IP address for the VRRP Click the button if you want to add a Virtual IP to the VRRP Select one or more items Displays the Vrid associated with the VRRP Displays the Interface ID associated with the VRRP Displays the Virtual IP associated with the VRRP Click the Apply button to make the modification take effect You should not select more than one item at one time Delete the selected Virtual IP Choose the menu Routing VRRP Track Config to load the following page 206 Add Track Interface v YRID v Tracked Interface VLAN v 1 4094 Reduced Priority 1 254 Track Table Select VRID Interface fACKed Reduced Priority Link State Interface O No entry in the table Figure10 62 Track Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Add Track This filed is used for adding track in
379. om when OSPF receives a topology change to the start of the next SPF calculation The valid value ranges from 1 to 600 seconds and the default is 5 The minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations The valid value ranges from 1 to 600 seconds and the default is 5 The number of AS External LSAs in the link state database The sum of the LS checksums of the AS External LSAs contained in the link state database This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router The number of LSAs received from other routers in OSPF domain Set a default for the metric of redistributed routes The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 and the default is 20 Set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination The valid value ranges from 1 to 32 and the default is 5 Configure the Auto Cost to control how OSPF calculates link cost When Enable selected unless the link cost is manually configured the link cost is computed by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth When Disable selected the link cost should be manually configured or use default value The default option is Enable Specify the reference bandwidth in megabits per second The valid value ranges from 1 to 4294967 Mbps and the default is 1000Mbps 184 Passive Default 10 9 3 Network You can configure networks contained by an area on this page The interfaces whose IP address Configure the glob
380. omparable with the cost of an OSPF internal route The cost from a router to the destination of the Type 1 external route equals to the cost from the router to the corresponding ASBR plus that from the ASBR to the destination of the external route 4 Type 2 external route It has low credibility so OSPF considers the cost from the ASBR to the destination of the Type 2 external route is much bigger than the cost from the ASBR to an OSPF internal router Therefore the cost from the internal router to the destination of the Type 2 external route equals to that from the ASBR to the destination of the Type 2 external route If two routes to the same destination have the same cost then take the cost from the router to the ASBR into consideration Intra area route and inter area route describe the internal network structure of the autonomous system while the external routes tell how to select the route to the destination outside the autonomous system 4 Stub Area and NSSAArea An area that can connect to the autonomous system and forward the communication data to external areas only through ABR could be set as Stub Area Once an area is set to be Stub Area ABR would no longer flood the external routing information described by the AS External LSA to it and meanwhile a default route with a target network 0 0 0 0 would be generated This default routing would be announced to the other routers in the area All the packets forwarded to external areas wo
381. on 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 74 Step Operation Description 3 Create MAC VLAN Required On the VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create the MAC VLAN For the device in a MAC VLAN it s required to set its connected port of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to ensure the normal communication 4 Select your desired Required On the VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select ports for MAC VLAN and enable the desired ports for MAC VLAN feature feature 7 4 Application Example for MAC VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch A and switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively and the two rooms are for all departments e Notebook A and Notebook B special for meeting room are of two different departments e The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively The two notebooks can just access the server of their own departments that is Server A and Server B in the two meeting rooms e The MAC address of Notebook A is 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 Notebook B s MAC address is 00 19 56 82 3B 70 gt Network Diagram Server B Server A
382. on 2 Flooding As Figure 10 31 shows two random routers will synchronize the link state database via LSA request LSA update and LSA acknowledgement packets But in the actual module of router network how do the routers flood the change of local network to the entire network through LSA update packets Figure 10 32 will introduce in details the flooding of the LSA update packets on the broadcast network 170 DR 224 gt 0 6 BDR 224 0 0 6 DROther1 DROther2 DROther3 224 0 0 5 224 0 0 5 224 0 0 5 KE Me Me Figure 10 32 Flooding of the LSA 1 DROthers multicast the LSA update of its directly connected network to DR and BDR 2 After receiving the LSA update DR floods it to all the adjacent routers 3 After receiving the LSA update from DR the adjacent routers flood it to the other OSPF interfaces in their own areas gt Area and Route Summarization OSPF protocol gets every router in the network to obtain a complete network topology through adjacency relationship thus to calculate the routing table and accomplish the forwarding of network data As the network grows in size every router has to spend plenty of resources to store LSDB and calculate routing table so any delicate changes in the network topology will require the routers in the entire network to re synchronize and re calculate which will cause the network to be in the state of frequent oscillation In order to run effectively and efficiently in a
383. on No entry in the table al Figure 7 7 Create and View MAC VLAN 73 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create MAC VLAN MAC Address Enter the MAC address Description Give a description to the MAC address for identification VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to gt MAC VLAN Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the MAC address Description Displays the user defined description of the MAC address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Modify button to apply your settings 7 3 2 Port Enable On this page you can enable the port for the MAC VLAN feature Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC VLAN take effect Choose the menu VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt Port Enable to load the following page Port Enable UNIT 1 2 Fa fel s 0 42 Fa Fel 18 20 22 24 E JRE RARR YKY RIRH 19 21 23 E ii Unselected Port s E Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Figure 7 8 Enable Port for MAC VLAN UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select your desired port for MAC VLAN function All the ports are disabled for MAC VLAN function by default Configuration Procedure Step Operation Descripti
384. on to the Web management page of the corresponding member switch 17 3 4 Cluster Topology On this page you can see the whole cluster topology Click the node switch to directly log on to the corresponding Web management page for you to configure and manage this switch Double click the node switch to view its detailed information Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology to load the following page Member Y Candidate SY Individual Y InActive Link Collect Topology Retresn Help Figure17 18 Collect Topology The following entries are displayed on this screen 350 gt Graphic Show Collect Topology Refresh Manage Click the Collect Topology button to display the cluster topology Click the Refresh button to refresh the cluster topology If the current device is the commander switch in the cluster and the selected device is a member switch in the cluster you can click the Manage button to log on to Web management page of the corresponding switch Global configuration procedure of the Cluster function Before configuring a cluster you should make clear the role each device will play in the cluster in advance and make sure the devices in the cluster can communicate with each other gt To configure the switch to be a commander switch in the cluster please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable the NDP function globally and for th
385. on page 8 3 3 Instance Port Config A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports in different instances as well as view status of the ports in the specified instance Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance Port Config to load the following page 107 Instance ID Select Instance ID 1 6 Instance Port Config UNIT i Select Port Priority Path Cost Port Role Port Status LAG O dl 1 04 128 Auto A P 1 0 2 128 Auto O 1 0 3 128 Auto P 1 0 4 128 Auto P 1 0 5 128 Auto Fl 1 0 6 128 Auto O 10 7 128 Auto O 108 128 Auto O 109 128 Auto E O 1 0 10 128 Auto O 1 0 14 128 Auto O 1 012 128 Auto O 1 0 13 128 Auto dl 140 14 128 Auto i 1 0 15 128 Auto v Apply Note Ifthe Path Cost of a portis setto 0 it will alter automatically according to the ports link speed Figure 8 9 Instance Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Instance ID Select Instance ID Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration gt Instance Port Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select the desired port to specify its priority and path cost It is multi optional
386. onfigure the status of the cluster the switch belongs to Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Config to load the following page e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Candidate Cluster managementylan VLAN ID 1 Role Change Role Change Individual Commander Cluster Name characters 1 16 IP Pool Address Mask Figure17 13 Cluster Configuration for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen 346 gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Cluster management vlan VLAN ID Enter the cluster management vlan id gt Role Change Individual Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch Commander Select this option to change the role of the switch to be commander switch and then configure the cluster e Cluster Name Configure the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to e IP Pool amp Mask Configure the private IP range of the member switches in the cluster e Foracommander switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Commander Cluster managementvian VLAN ID 1 Apply Role Change Role Change Candidate Apply Cluster Config Hold Time 20 J sec 1 255 Interval Time 20 sec 1 255 Figure17 14 Cluster Configuration for Commander Switch The following entrie
387. operation 18 3 Device Diagnostics This switch provides Cable Test and Loopback functions for device diagnostics 18 3 1 Cable Test Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch which facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network Choose the menu Maintenance Device Diagnostics Cable Test to load the following page Cable Test Port UNIT 1 2 a Fe 402 Fra ae 118 201122 a 26 ARIES RRRA RIRH RY EY 23 25 ES Unselected Portis cy Selected Portis 5 Not Available for Selection Result Pair Status Length meter Error meter Pair A Pair B Pair C Pair D Apply Note 1 The interval between two cable test for one port must be more than 3 seconds 2 The result is more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status 3 The result is just for your information Figure18 7 Cable Test 360 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Cable Test Port Select the port for cable testing UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Pair Displays the Pair number Status Test the connection status of the cable connected to the port Length If the connection status is normal here displays the length range of the cable Error If the connection status is close open or crosstalk here displays The error length of the cable Anote le 2 3 4 Th
388. or remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection
389. ork LSA Originates from DR and describes the link state of all routers in its connected network segment and then diffuses in its advertising area 3 Network Originates from ABR and describes the routers of all segments in the area and then advertises to the backbone area the Summary LSA j routers in which area will re summarize and then announce to the other area 4 ASBR Originates from ABR and describes the routers from ABR to ASBR and advertises the path to ASBR to the area ABR Summary LSA connects Originates from ASBR and describes the external route and the 5 AS External E f LSA accessible network obtained by other routing protocols This type of LSA will be flooded to the entire autonomous system 7 NSSA Originates from ASBR in the NSSA The content of this LSA is External LSA the same as that of AS external LSA but it would be advertised only to NSSA ABR can transform this type of routing information to AS external LSA and then flood it to the entire AS gt Table 10 5 Types of LSA OSPF Features Supported by the Switches This switch supporting standard OSPF routing features is applicable to multiple network environments and able to meet the common networking requirements in the Ethernet scene The OSPF features supported are listed as follows 1 Multi process The switch can establish multiple routing processes independent of each other and having independent database Each routing int
390. ork can be disbranched to form a tree topological ring free network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly in the network BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use Enough information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation STP is to determine the topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices To implement spanning tree function the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the received BPDUs BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the spanning tree gt STP Elements Bridge ID Bridge Identifier Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority Root Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID Configure the switch with the best performance in the ring network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability Designated Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root bridge in each network segment BPDUs are forwarded to the network segment through the designated bridge The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge Root Path Cost Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the swit
391. ortcut Delete Rename Properties Figure B 1 In the prompt page that showed below double click on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Local Area Connection Properties 2 xl General Authentication Advanced Connect using us Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI Fast Ett This connection uses the following items QoS Packet Scheduler M 3 AEGIS Protocol IEEE 802 1x v3 4 3 0 Internet Protocol TCP IP Uninstall Install Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected JV Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Figure B 2 372 5 The following TCP IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if pour network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask pour network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 0 241 Subnet mask 255 205 200 0 Default gateway 192 168 1 C Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server 3
392. ose the menu Multicast Routing PIM SM gt RP to load the following page 239 PIM SM Static RP Config RP Address Format 192 168 2 1 Override Enable Disable PIM SM Candidate RP Config Interface Vian 1 v Priority 192 0 255 Apply Interval 60 1 255 Pitt SM Candidate RP Table Select Interface Priority Interval Next advertisement time No entry in the table An Figure 11 23 RP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt PIM SM Static RP Config By default no static RP address is configured You could configure the IP address of RPs on all multilayer switches RP Address Specify the IP address of the static RP Override Select to enable or disable override mode If the override mode is enabled the static RP will take effect no matter the candidate RP is configured or not Otherwise the static RP will be invalid when the candidate RP is configured gt PIM SM Candidate RP Config Configure the candidate RP on this device Candidate RPs periodically send multicast RP announce messages to a particular group or group range to announce their availability Interface Select the VLAN interface of the candidate RP Priority Specify the priority of the candidate RP The default value is 192 Interval Specify the interval of advertisement message of the candidate RP in seconds The default value is 60 gt PIM SM Candidate RP Table Interface Displays th
393. otocol a device can only support up to 4094 VLANs If a service provider assigns one VLAN per user the VLANs will be far from enough as a result the number of users this service provider can support is limited 89 Private VLAN adopts Layer 2 VLAN structure A Private VLAN consists of a Primary VLAN and a Secondary VLAN providing a mechanism for achieving layer 2 separation between ports For uplink devices all the packets received from the downstream are without VLAN tags Uplink devices need to identify Primary VLANs but not Secondary VLANs Therefore they can save VLAN resources without considering the VLAN configuration in the lower layer Meanwhile the service provider can assign each user an individual Secondary VLAN so that users are separated at the Layer 2 level Private VLAN technology is mainly used in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user Layer 2 separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices gt The Elements of a Private VLAN Promiscuous port A promiscuous port connects to and communicates with the uplink device The PVID of the promiscuous port is the same with the Primary VLAN ID One promiscuous port can only join to one Primary VLAN Host port A host port connects to and communicates with terminal device The PVID of the host port is the same as the Secondary VLAN ID One host port can only belong to one Private VLAN There are two types of host ports e Isolated port An isolated port has
394. ould send a LSR packet to request for a complete LSA e 32 bits __________ 8 8 8 8 Router ID Area ID 3 i LS type Link State ID Advertising Router ID Figure 10 41 LSR Packet 1 Link State Type The type of LSA There are 11 types of LSA in total Router LSA Network LSA Network Summarization LSA ASBR Summarization LSA and so on In the following all these would be introduced in details 2 Link State ID It has different meanings for different types of LSA The Link State ID of Router LSA stands for the ID of advertising router that of Network LSA stands for the interface IP address of the DR and that of Network Summarization LSA stands for the IP address of the network or subnet advertised and etc 3 Advertising Router Router ID of the router advertising this LSA 5 LSU Packet When one router receives an LSR it would send an LSU packet to inform the other the complete LSA information The router receiving the LSA update will re encapsulate this LSA and then flood it 179 e 32 bis e 8 8 8 8 Router ID Area ID 2 a nae O 0x0000 Key ID Auth Data Len Cryptographic sequence number LSAs Figure 10 42 LSU Packet 1 LSA Quantity The quantity of LSA included in the LSU 2 LSA A complete description of LSA 6 LSAck Packet When receiving a LSU the router will send to the router forwarding the LSU packet a LSAck packet including the LSA head
395. out the errors via the Logs 3 Cable Test Test the connection status of the cable to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network 4 Loopback Test whether the ports of the switch and its peer device are available 5 Network Diagnostics Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the route hops from the switch to the destination device 18 1 System Monitor System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via the data graph The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably around a specific value If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases markedly please detect whether the network is being attacked The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages 18 1 1 CPU Monitor Choose the menu Maintenance gt System Monitor CPU Monitor to load the following page 354 CPU Monitor UNIT 3 Run Time 180 sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Current Average MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Utilization Utilization 14 17 14 14 montor stop Figure18 1 CPU Monitor UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every four seconds 18 1 2 Memory Monitor Choose the menu Maintenance System Monitor Memory Monitor to load t
396. own in the table 176 Type Authentication Features Code Name 0 Non Authentication The 64 bit authentication information fields behind are all 0 1 Plain text The 64 bit authentication information behind is the Authentication password to authenticate 2 MD5 Ciphertext The Key ID authentication data length and Authentication encryption serial number work together to perform MD5 Ciphertext Authentication Table 10 4 Authentication Type 2 HELLO Packet OSPF routers send Hello packets to each other to find neighbor routers in the network and to maintain the mutual adjacency relationship Only when two routers send Hello packets carrying the same interface parameters can they become neighbors PA 32 bits 8 8 vein ft 8 8 Packet length Router ID Area ID 0x0000 Key ID Cryptographic sequence number Hellointerval RouterDeadinterval Designated Router ID Backup Designated Router ID Neighbor ID T Neighbor ID Figure 10 39 HELLO Packet 1 Netmask Netmask of the router interface forwarding Hello packet Only when the netmask of the forwarding interface and that of the receiving interface coincide can these two routers be neighbors 2 Hello Interval Interval of a sequence of Hello packets sending by the forwarding interface Only the routers with the same Hello interval can become neighbors 3 Router Priority This field decides the election result for DR BDR in the ne
397. packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Enter the source IP address contained in the rule Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Select the time range for the rule to take effect 13 2 5 Extend IP ACL Extend IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses destination IP addresses IP protocol and other information of this sort carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL ACL Config Extend IP ACL to load the following page 266 Create Extend IP Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation O sp O D P IP Protocol TCP Flag S Port D Port DSCP IP ToS Time Range Extend IPACL vw 0 1999 Permit v Mask Format 192 168 0 1 A Mask Dw Al URG ack PSH RST SYN FIN No Limit No Limit v IP Pre No Limit y No Limit v Figure 13 8 Create Extend IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Extend IP Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation S IP D IP Mask IP Protocol TCP Flag S Port D Port DSCP IP ToS IP Pre Select the desired Extend IP ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match
398. path cost of X equal those of Y but the bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID the root path cost and bridge ID of X equal those of Y but the port ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y gt STP Generation e Inthe beginning In the beginning each switch regards itself as the root and generates a configuration BPDU for each port on it as a root with the root path cost being 0 the ID of the designated bridge being that of the switch and the designated port being itself 97 e Comparing BPDUs Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports from another switch The following table shows the comparing operations Step Operation 1 If the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of the port itself the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of the port 2 If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself the switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority Table 8 1 Comparing BPDUs e Selecting the root bridge The root bridge is selected by BPDU comparing The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as the root bridge e Selecting the root port and designate port The operation is taken in the following way
399. pe User Priority Time Range Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule Enter MAC address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Enter EtherType contained in the rule Select the user priority contained in the rule for the tagged packets to match Select the time range for the rule to take effect 13 2 4 Standard IP ACL Standard IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL to load the following page 265 Create Standard IP Rule ACLID Rule ID Operation O S P O D P Time Range Standard IP ACL v 0 1999 Permit v Mask Format 192 168 0 1 Mask No Limit M Figure 13 7 Create Standard IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Standard IP Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation S IP D IP Mask Time Range Select the desired Standard IP ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process
400. pe As Figure 10 34 shows after the area partition of the network the routers need to accomplish different tasks due to their locations in different areas according to which the routers can be classified into 4 types Internal Router IR Backbone Router BR Area Boundary Router ABR and Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR BGP RIP vee INS eg Ss a ar a Woe Figure 10 34 Classification of Routers Responsibilities of different routers divide as Table 10 2 Router Name Features Responsibility IR All the routing interfaces belong to the same area Flood and exchange its all link and interface information with the adjacent routers in the same area thus to synchronize the link state database with the intra area routers BR At least one routing interface belongs to the backbone area Summarize the routing topology information from all areas in AS via ABR and forward the communication data for all areas ABR Connect one or more areas to the backbone area Maintain independent link state databases for different areas and deliver the topology information of each area to the other areas via the backbone area ASBR Connect with the routers outside the OSPF AS by other routing protocol Maintain independent routing tables for different routing protocols import the routing information learned by other routing protocol to OSPF domain through a certain
401. plays all multicast IP entries e Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry e Forward Port Enter the forward port number the desired entry must carry gt Multicast IP Table Multicast IP Displays multicast IP address VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Forward Port Displays the forward port of the multicast group Type Displays the type of the multicast IP Anote If the configuration on VLAN Config page and multicast VLAN page is changed the switch will clear up the dynamic multicast addresses in multicast address table and learn new addresses 9 3 2 Static Multicast IP Static Multicast IP table isolated from dynamic multicast group and multicast filter is not learned by IGMP Snooping It can enhance the quality and security for information transmission in some fixed multicast groups 129 Choose the menu Multicast Multicast IP Static Multicast IP to load the following page Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 VLAN ID 1 4094 Forward Port UNIT 1 Patata te 201122124 Labs Ls bajas imbeledea Es Unselected Port Selected Port Not Available for s s Selection Search Option Search Option All v Static Multicast IP Table Select Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port No entry in the table The number of static multicast groups is 0 Figure9 10
402. plications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology gt LLDPDU Format Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequence of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV as shown in the figure below Chassis ID TLV Port ID TLV TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU Optional TLVs provide various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network management Chassis ID Port ID TLV TLV M M M mandatory TLV required for all LLDPDUs The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the particular transmission rate and protocol In IEEE 802 3 MACs for example the maximum LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic untagged MAC frame 1500 octets gt LLDP Working Mechanism 1 LLDP Admin Status The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port making it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs Four LLDP admin statuses are supported by each port Tx amp Rx the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs Rx_Only the port can receive LLDPDUs only e Tx_Only the port can transmit LLDPDUs only 319 2 Disable the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs LLDPDU tran
403. policy only when the policy is bound to the port VLAN The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table Port Binding and VLAN Binding pages 13 4 1 Binding Table On this page view the policy bound to port VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Options Show Mode Policy Vian Bind Table Select Policy Port Bind Table UNIT Select O Index 1 Index Show All vi Policy Name Interface Direction No entry in the table Policy Name Interface Direction No entry in the table Al Figure13 12 Binding Table 270 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Options Show Mode Policy Vlan Bind Table Select Index Policy Name Interface Direction Policy Port Bind Table UNIT Select Index Policy Name Interface Direction 13 4 2 Port Binding On this page you can bind a policy to a port Select a show mode appropriate to your needs Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the VLAN ID bound to the policy Displays the binding direction Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the po
404. port Status Displays the connection status of the port Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port The actual rate divided by theoretical maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization Figure 4 3 displays the bandwidth utilization monitored every four seconds Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities 15 Run Time 84sec Current Port 1 0 9 Current Utilization 0 0 Legend fj Rx E Tx O rx O Tx Figure 4 3 Bandwidth Utilization gt Bandwidth Utilization Rx Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets on this port Tx Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets on this port 4 1 2 Device Description On this page you can configure the description of the switch including device name device location and system contact Choose the menu System System Info Device Description to load the following page Device Description Device Name T37006 28T0 1 17 characters Device Location SHENZHEN 1 32 characters Apply System Contact httpvwww tp link com 1 32 characters Note The Device Name can contain digits English letters and underlines only Figure 4 4 Device Description The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Description Device Name Enter the name of the switch Device Location Enter the location of th
405. port is 1812 Auth Key Set the shared password for the switch and the authentication 301 servers to exchange messages gt Accounting Config Accounting Primary IP Secondary IP Accounting Port Accounting Key Enable Disable the accounting feature Enter the IP address of the accounting server Enter the IP address of the alternate accounting server Set the UDP port of accounting server s The default port is 1813 Set the shared password for the switch and the accounting servers to exchange messages Anote 1 The 802 1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port 2 The 802 1X function can not be enabled for LAG member ports That is the port with 802 1X function enabled can not be added to the LAG 3 The 802 1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server In addition the authentication parameters of the switch and the authentication server should be the same Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Connect an authentication Required Record the information of the client in the LAN to server to the switch and do the authentication server and configure the corresponding some configuration authentication username and password for the client 2 Install the 802 1X client Required For the client computers you are required to software install the 802 1X software TpSupplicant provided on
406. query interval at which IGMP router sends out a general query ranging from 1 to 3600 The default is 60 When IGMP router sends out a query packet the host should response within the specified Query Max Response Time ranging from 1 to 25 seconds The default is 10 seconds When IGMP router starts up it will send out a general query every Startup Query Interval ranging from 1 to 300 The default is 15 The number of general queries to be sent on startup ranging from 1 to 20 The default is 2 When the last member leaves a multicast group IGMP router will send out a specific query every Last Member Query Interval ranging from 1 to 5 The default is 1 The number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report ranging from 1 to 20 The default is 2 Specify the time for Querier Timeout A non querier IGMP router will become a querier again after the specified timeout if no query report is received ranging from 60 to 300 The default is 120 When Require Router Alert is enabled the IGMP router will drop IGMP packets without router alert option When Send Router Alert is enabled the IGMP router will add router alert option to the query packets Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Interface State to load the following page Search Option All Search Option Interface State Table Interface IP Address Querier IP Querier State Other Querier Number Of Expire Time Groups No entry in the tab
407. r future use and must be set to zero by clients and ignored by servers and relay agents ciaddr Client IP address filled in by client in DHCPREQUEST when verifying previously allocated configuration parameters yiaddr your client IP address configuration parameters allocated to the client by DHCP server siaddr IP address of next server to use in bootstrap returned in DHCPOFFER DHCPACK and DHCPNAK by server giaddr Relay agent IP address used in booting via a relay agent chaddr Client hardware address sname Optional server host name null terminated string 142 14 file Boot file name null terminated string generic name or null in DHCPDISCOVER fully qualified directory path name in DHCPOFFER 15 options Optional parameters field See the options documents RFC 2132 for a list of defined options We will introduce some familiar options in the next section gt DHCP Option This section defines a generalized use of the options field for giving information useful to a wide class of machines operating systems and configurations Sites with a single DHCP server that is shared among heterogeneous clients may choose to define other site specific formats for the use of the options field Figure 10 7 gives the format of options field Code 1 Length 1 Value variable Figure 10 7 DHCP Option All options begin with a Code octet which uniquely identifies the option followed by the length octet Th
408. r in the neighbor s Hello packet All neighbors in this state or greater are listed in the Hello packets sent from the associated interface e 2 Way In this state communication between the two routers is bidirectional This has been assured by the operation of the Hello Protocol This is the most advanced state short of beginning adjacency establishment The Backup Designated Router is selected from the set of neighbors in state 2 Way or greater e ExStart This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies e Exchange In this state the router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor In this state Link State Request Packets may also be sent asking for the neighbor s more recent LSAs All adjacencies in Exchange state or greater are used by the flooding procedure These adjacencies are fully capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF routing protocol packets e Loading In this state Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered but not yet received in the Exchange state e Full In this state the neighboring routers are fully adjacent These adjacencies will now appear in Rou
409. r other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid that is the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN to load the following page 123 Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Dynamic Router Ports UNIT 1 O Enable Disable 2 4094 tarot 042 faa 6 he 1120 122 124 sec 60 600 recommend 300 sec 60 600 recommend 260 sec 1 30 recommend 1 26 KREA EA KARA EEI EEN KEETA EEES EA Static Router Ports UNIT 1 25 Eea EA AZ 26 KREA EA KARA KEI EEN KEETA EENES EA C Unselected Port s Note cy Selected Port s 125 C Not Available for Selection 1 AIl IGMP packet will be processed in the Multicast VLAN after Multicast VLAN is created 2 The Multicast VLAN wont take effect unless you first complete the configuration on the VLAN Config page Figure 9 7 Mult The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time UNIT Dynamic Router Ports UNIT Select Enable Disable Multicast VLAN feature Enter the VLAN ID Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port icast VLAN of the multicast VLAN
410. r the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP MAC Binding entries The entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision Among the entries in collision only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect These three sources Manual Scanning and Snooping are in descending order of priority The IP MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table Manual Binding ARP Scanning and DHCP Snooping pages 14 1 1 Binding Table On this page you can view the information of the bound entries Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Source m di N Binding Table UNIT 1 Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision o D No entry in the table an Apply Delete Help Entry Count0 Note 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect Figure 14 1 Binding Table 275 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Source IP Select gt Binding Table UNIT Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision Aner
411. r the times of sending specific query frames by IGMP Snooping Querier At receiving a leave frame a specific query frame will be sent by IGMP Snooping Querier If a report frame is received before sending specific frames number reaches Last Member Query Times the switch will still treat the port as group member and stop sending specific query frames to the port otherwise the port will be removed from forward ports of the IP multicast group Enter the source IP of the specific query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP IGMP Snooping Querier Table Select VLAN ID Select the desired entry It is multi optional Displays the ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Querier 126 Query Interval Displays the Query Interval of the IGMP Snooping Querier Max Response Displays the maximal time for the host to respond to a general Time query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier General Query Displays the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Source IP Snooping Querier Last Listener Query Displays the time interval of sending specific query frames by Interval IGMP Snooping Querier Last Listener Query Displays the times of sending specific query frames by IGMP Count Snooping Querier Special Query Displays the source IP of the specific query frame sent by IGMP Source IP Snooping Querier 9 2 Application Example for Multicast VLAN gt Network Requirements
412. rd with the type of the key file 2 The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted 4 After the public key is downloaded please log on to the interface of PUTTY and enter the IP address for login X PulTY Configuration Category Session Logging Terminal Keyboard Bell Features Window Appearance Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Connection Data Proxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Kex Auth TTY x11 Basic options for your PuTTY session Specify the destination you want to connect to Host Name for IP address _ Port 192 168 0 1 22 Connection type ORaw O Iene O Rlogin SSH Serial Load save or delete a stored session Saved Sessions Default Settings Save Delete Close window on exit O lways O Never Only on clean exit 5 Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open 31 ix PuTTY Configuration Category Terminal Options controlling SSH authentication Keyboard Bell C Bypass authentication entirely SSH 2 only Features Window a ss Appearance Attempt authentication using Pageant Behav C Attempt TIS or CryptoCard auth SSH 1 Translation Attempt keyboard interactive auth SSH 2 Selection Colours Connection Data C Allow attempted changes of username in SSH 2 Authentication methods Authentication parameters C Allow agent forwarding Proxy ale Ke amp for aut
413. request Inform Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times The Inform type employed on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 has a higher security than the Trap type On this page you can configure the notification function of SNMP Choose the menu SNMP Notification Notification Config to load the following page Host Config IP Address User Security Model Type Retry Timeout Notification Table Select IP Address User UDP Port 162 Security Level 1 265 sec 1 3600 Security Model No entry in the table Security Level Type Retry Timeout Operation All Delete Help Figure15 8 Notification Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Host Config IP Address User Security Model Enter the IP Address of the management Host Enter the User name of the management station Select the Security Model of the management station 312 Type Retry Timeout Notification Table Select the type for the notifications e Trap Indicates traps are sent e Inform Indicates informs are sent The Inform type has a higher security than the Trap type Specify the a
414. responding VLAN Click Create button to create a new VLAN VLAN Info VLAN ID _ 2 4094 Name 16 characters maximum Untagged port UNIT i 21847167187 h0 62 44 46 48 Bo ea 241 28 bJ RA RA 45 E7 19 24 La 25 Tagged port UNIT 1 2141061081 40 42 Ga 161148 20 122 Ba 26 KAKARAKA Le 1 68 45 47 ae fea 23 25 E Unselected Port s cy Selected Port s C Not Available for Selection Figure 7 4 Create or Modify 802 1Q VLAN 69 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Info VLAN ID Name Untagged port UNIT Tagged port Enter the ID number of VLAN Displays the user defined name of VLAN Displays the untagged port which is ACCESS TRUNK or GENERAL Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Displays the tagged port which is TRUNK or GENERAL 7 1 2 Port Config Before creating the 802 1Q VLAN please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the switch in order to configure the ports properly Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page VLAN Port Config UNIT 1 Select Port 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 1 0 17 1 0 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 1 0 11 1 0 12 1 0 13 1 0 14 1 0 15 OOOOOOOOOO0O000000 Link Type x PVID LAG i ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS Figure 7 5 802 1Q
415. rization route 192 161 0 0 16 and advertise it to the backbone area while in Area 2 ABR2 can configure an summarization route 192 162 0 0 16 and advertise it to the backbone area Please pay attention to that if the network is planned to be discontinuous subnets you need to configure the route summarization with great caution otherwise it might cause some unreachable network conditions As Figure 10 37 shown configuring the summarization route 192 161 0 0 16 on ABR1 and ABR2 might result in the inaccessible routing Under such circumstance it is suggested to configure route summarization on only one ABR ASBR Route Summarization If a route summarization is configured on an ASBR the AS External LSA in the specified address range will be summarized When NSSA is configured Type 7 LSA in the specified address range will also be summarized Following a similar principle with ABR route summarization ASBR summarizes routes of different type 190 0 3 0 24 190 0 1 0 24 190 0 2 0 24 192 161 30 0 24 Backbone Area ee ABR2 192 162 90 0 24 192 162 80 0 24 p ABR1 192 161 40 0 24 192 161 10 0 24 192 161 20 0 24 Area1 Figure 10 36 ABR Route Summarization 174 190 0 3 0 24 190 0 1 0 24 190 0 2 0 24 lt 30 0 24 192 161 40 0 24 t 192 161 20 0 24 Backbone Area O ABR2 192 161 90 0 24 PA 192 161 80 0 24 ES e Figure 10 37 Dis
416. rmation of a new neighbor it will add the information to the neighbor information table If the received NDP information is different from the old information the switch will update it in the neighbor information table if the received NDP information is the same with the old information the switch will just update the aging time if the switch does not receive NDP information within the aging time the switch will remove the corresponding information from the table automatically The NDP function can be implemented on Neighbor Info NDP Summary and NDP Config pages 17 1 1 Neighbor Info On this page you can view the NDP neighbor information of the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP Neighbor Info to load the following page Neighbor Search Search Option All vw Neighbor Info Native Pot Remote Port Device Name Device MAC Firmware Version Aging Time sec No entry in the table Figure1 7 2 Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen 336 Neighbor Search Option Neighbor Info Native Port Remote Port Device Name Device MAC Firmware Version Aging Time sec 17 1 2 NDP Summary On this page you can view the NDP configuration of the switch Select the information the desired entry should contain and then click the Search button to display the desired entry in the following Neighbor Information table Displays the port number of the switch Displays the port number of
417. root bridge In the same condition the switch with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge The lower value has the higher priority The default value is 32768 and should be exact divisor of 4096 Hello Time Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links 2 Hello Time 1 lt Max Age The default value is 2 seconds Max Age Enter a value from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure The default value is 20 seconds Forward Delay Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed 2 Forward Delay 1 2 Max Age The default value is 15 seconds TxHoldCount Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval The default value is 5pps Max Hops Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded The default value is 20 hops Adore le The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated A too small forward delay parameter may result in temporary loops A too large forward delay may cause a network unable to resume the normal state in time The default value is recommended An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link fa
418. rotocol V1 Select Enable Disable SSH V1 to be the supported protocol Protocol V2 Select Enable Disable SSH V2 to be the supported protocol Idle Timeout Specify the idle timeout time The system will automatically release the connection when the time is up The default time is 500 seconds Max Connect Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server No new connection will be established when the number of the connections reaches the maximum number you set The default value is 5 Key Download Key Type Select the type of SSH Key to download The switch supports three types SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA and SSH 2 DSA Key File Select the desired key file to download Download Click the Download button to down the desired key file to the switch Anote tl 2 Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits After the Key File is downloaded the user s original key of the same type will be replaced The wrong uploaded file will result in the SSH access to the switch via Password authentication 28 Application Example 1 for SSH gt Network Requirements 1 Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch 2 PuTTY client software is recommended gt Configuration Procedure 1 Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY Enter the IP address of the switch into Host Name field keep the default v
419. rt number bound to the policy Displays the binding direction Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding to load the following page Port Bind Config Policy Name Port UNIT 1 19104042 4 he a 20 221 124 Select Policy v 2 1133651673810 RARI RA RA fea 23 EJ ES Unselected Port s Ea Selected Port s cy Not Available for Selection Port Bind Table UNIT 1 Index Policy Name Port Direction No entry in the table Figure13 13 Bind the policy to the port 271 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 13 4 3 VLAN Binding Port Bind Config Policy Name Port Port Bind Table Index Policy Name Port Direction Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the number of the port you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding VLAN Binding to load the following page VLAN Bind Config Policy Name Select Policy vl Apply VLAN ID WLAN Bind Table Index Format 1 Policy Name VLAN IB Direction No entry in the table Figure13 14 Bind the policy to the VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Bind Config Policy Name VLAN ID VLAN Bind Table Index Po
420. rt receives voice data or not e Manual In this mode you can manually add a port to the voice VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN Configure the security mode for forwarding packets e Disable All packets are forwarded e Enable Only voice data are forwarded Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to The switch supports OUI creation and adds the MAC address of the special voice device to the OUI table of the switch The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its OUI address The switch analyzes the received packets If the packets are recognized as voice packets the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN OUI Config to load the following page Forrnat 00 00 00 00 00 01 16 characters maximum Create OUl OUI Mask FF FF FF 00 00 00 Default FF FF FF 00 00 00 Description OUI Table Select oul MASK O 00 01 e3 00 00 00 fefER 00 00 00 O 00 03 6b 00 00 00 fr ff ff 00 00 00 O 00 04 0d 00 00 00 fefER 00 00 00 O 00 60 b9 00 00 00 f ff ff 00 00 00 O 00 d0 1e 00 00 00 fefEf 00 00 00 O 00 e0 75 00 00 00 fefER 00 00 00 O 00 e0 bb 00 00 00 fefef 00 00 00 All Figure 12 14 OUI Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create OUI OUI Mask Description Description Siemens Phone Cisco Phone Avaya Pho
421. ry S G and the multicast packets will no longer forwarded to the pruned branches Note The entry S G contains the multicast source address S the multicast group G the list of output interfaces and input interfaces The prune process is initiated by the leaf router as shown in Figure 11 11 the leaf router without receivers such as the router directly connected to Host A performs the prune actively and the prune process will last until there are only necessary branches in the PIM DM domain These branches form the SPT 227 censeo Prune Message Multicast packets a Figure 11 11 SPT Topology in PIM DM The flood and prune process takes place periodically The pruned nodes are provided with timeout mechanism and the flood and prune process will resume after the pruned state times out gt Grafting When a new receiver on a previously pruned branch of the tree joins a multicast group the PIM DM takes the Graft mechanism to actively resume this node s function of forwarding multicast data thus reducing the time it takes to resume to the forwarding state The process is illustrated as below 1 The branch that needs to receive the multicast data again will send a graft message to its upstream node up the distribution tree towards the source hop by hop applying to rejoin the SPT 2 The upstream node turns the downstream node into forwarding state after receiving the graft message and re
422. s 3 Dynamically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an expiration time When the time for the IP address expired the Client should apply for a new one The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically which is illustrated in the following figure 280 DHCP Client DHCP Server 1 DHCP DISCOVER 2 DHCP OFFER 3 DHCP REQUEST 4 DHCP ACK Figure 14 6 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server 1 DHCP DISCOVER Stage The Client broadcasts the DHCP DISCOVER packet to find the DHCP Server 2 DHCP OFFER Stage Upon receiving the DHCP DISCOVER packet the DHCP Server selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP OFFER packet carrying the IP address and other information 3 DHCP REQUEST Stage In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the DHCP OFFER packets the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP OFFER packet and broadcast the DHCP REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP address of the DHCP OFFER packet 4 DHCP ACK Stage Since the DHCP REQUEST packet is broadcasted all DHCP Servers on the network segment can receive it However only the requested Server processes the request If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client it will send the DHCP ACK packet back to the Client Otherwise the Server will send the DHCP NAK packet to ref
423. s 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE Mark Warning CE This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures NA MpoayktT ceptudikoBaHo 3riaHo c npasnnamn cncremn YkpCEMPO Ha BianoBiaHicre BuMoram HOpMaTNBHNX AOKyMeHTiB Ta BUMOraM WO nepeabadeni YMHHNMN 3aKkOoHogaBynMmn akTamu Y paiun ERL Safety Information When product has power button the power button is one of the way to shut off the product When there is no power button the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source e Don t disassemble the product or make repairs yourself You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty If you need service please contact us Avoid water and wet locations This product can be used in the following countries CONTENTS Package Content ii A atone Ae tt a RA ts 1 Chapter 1 About This Guide ee e E A a E a E a a aa Ee a 2 1 1 Intended Readers seii an e i lll nln a iai aaa raa iai iaa SEA Se Phat ea T 2 1 2 gt CONVENIOS ai dede 2 1 3 Overview of This
424. s through a RADIUS Access Accept packet and an EAP Success packet to the switch to indicate that the supplicant system is authorized 7 The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the supplicant system access the network And then the switch will monitor the status of supplicant by sending hand shake packets periodically By default the switch will force the supplicant to log off if it can not get the response from the supplicant for two times 8 The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL Logoff packets to the switch The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected 2 EAP Terminating Mode In this mode packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are mapped into RADIUS packets Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS protocol In this mode PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server This switch supports the PAP terminating mode The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the following figure RADIUS Authentication Server Supplicant System EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response ldentity EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Figure 14 21 PAP Authentication Procedure In PAP mode the switch encrypts the password and sends the user name the randomly generated
425. s and it can be modified Displays the type of default route and it can be modified Displays the metric of default route and it can be modified Displays the number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database This is typically done using Dijkstra s algorithm Displays the total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass Displays the total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs Displays the 32 bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements LS checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external LS type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers 10 9 6 Area Aggregation You can configure address ranges for an area on this page The address range is used to consolidate or summarize routes for an area at an area boundary The result is that a single summary route is advertised to other areas by the ABR Routing information is condensed at area boundaries a single route is advertised for each address range Choose the menu Routing OSPF Area Aggregation to load the following page 191 Area Aggregation Config Process ID Area ID 0 4294967295 or a b
426. s and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses DHCP Snooping is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection IP Source Guard and the other security protection features DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the DHCP Server Cheating Attack by discarding the DHCP response packets on the distrusted port so as to enhance the network security 14 2 1 Global Config Choose the menu Network Security gt DHCP Snooping Global Config to load the following page 282 DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Enable Disable Global Rate Limit Disable Y pps Decline Rate Threshold Disable v pps Decline Rate Limit 5 vj pps Option 82 Configuration Option 82 Support Enable Disable Existed Option 82 s Keep v field a i Customization O Enable Disable Circuit ID Remote ID Apply Help Note Circuit ID or Remote ID can only use number or letters Figure 14 8 DHCP Snooping Anote If you want to enable the DHCP Snooping feature for the member port of LAG please ensure the parameters of all the member ports are the same The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Enable Disable the DHCP Snooping fun
427. s are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Candidate Select this option to change the role of the switch to be candidate switch 347 gt Cluster Config Hold Time Enter the time for the switch to keep the cluster information Interval Time Enter the interval to send handshake packets e Fora member switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Member Cluster management vlan VLAN ID 1 Apply Role Change Role Change Individual Figure17 15 Cluster Configuration for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Cluster management vlan VLAN ID Enter the cluster management vlan id gt Role Change Individual Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed 348 Current Role Role Individual Cluster managementvian VLAN ID 1 Apply Role Change Role Change Candidate Figure 17 16 Cluster Configuration for Individual Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Cluster management vlan VLAN ID Enter the cluster management vlan id gt Role Change Candidate Select this option
428. s in parentheses indicate the size of each field in octets The names for the fields given in the figure will be used throughout this document to refer to the fields in DHCP messages 141 10 11 12 13 ons Figure 10 6 The Format of DHCP Message op Message type 1 BOOT REQUEST 2 BOOT REPLY htype Hardware address type 1 for ethernet hlen Hardware address length 6 for ethernet hops Clients set this field to zero and broadcast the DHCP REQUEST message optionally used by relay agents when booting via a relay agent xid Transaction ID a random number chosen by the client used by the client and server to associate messages secs Filled in by client seconds elapsed since client started trying to boot flags A client that cannot receive unicast IP datagrams until its protocol software has been configured with an IP address should set the first bit in the flags field to 1 in any DHCP DISCOVER or DHCP REQUEST message that client sends A client that can receive unicast IP datagrams before its protocol software has been configured should clear the first bit to 0 A server or relay agent sending or relaying a DHCP message directly to a DHCP client should examine the first bit in the flags field If this bit is set to 1 the DHCP message should be sent as an IP broadcast and if the bit is cleared to 0 the message should be sent as an IP unicast The remaining bits of the flags field are reserved fo
429. s is derived to make it a candidate This interface must be enabled with PIM SM Hash Mask Length specify the mask length that is to be ANDed with the group address before the hash function is called All groups with the same seed hash correspond to the same RP The valid value range from 0 to 32 and the default value is 30 Priority Specify the priority of the BSR The BSR with the larger priority is preferred If the priority values are the same the device with the highest IP address is selected as the BSR The valid value range from 0 to 255 and the default value is 64 gt PIM SM Elected BSR Information BSR Address Displays the elected BSR address Priority Displays the priority of the elected BSR Hash Mask Length Displays the hash mask length of the elected BSR Next BSR message Displays the time of next BSR message sending if this is the time elected BSR Expire Displays the expiry time of the elected BSR gt PIM SM Candidate BSR Information Candidate BSR Displays the Candidate BSR address Address Priority Displays the priority of the Candidate BSR Hash Mask Length Displays the hash mask length of the Candidate BSR 11 4 4 RP In the PIM SM mode RP receives multicast data from the source and transmits the data down the shared tree to the multicast group members You must have an RP if the interface is in sparse dense mode and you can manually assign static RP or config candidate RP to generate the RP Cho
430. s module is used to configure match rules and process policies of packets to filter packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network Here mainly introduces e Time Range Configure the effective time for ACL rules e ACL Config ACL rules e Policy Config Configure operation policies e Policy Binding Bind the policy to a port VLAN to take its effect on a specific port VLAN Chapter 14 Network Security This module is used to configure the multiple protection measures for the network security Here mainly introduces e IP MAC Binding Bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together e ARP Inspection Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent the network from ARP attacks e IP Source Guard Configure IP source guard feature to filter IP packets in the LAN e DoS Defend Configure DoS defend feature to prevent DoS attack e 802 1X Configure common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems Chapter 15 SNMP This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices Here mainly introduces e SNMP Config Configure global settings of SNMP function e Notification Configure notification function for the management station to monitor and process the events e RMON Configure RMON function to monitor network more efficiently Chapt
431. s of IP addresses and hardware addresses 10 4 4 Binding Table In this page you can view the information about the clients attached to the Server Choose the menu Routing DHCP Server Binding Table to load the following page 148 DHCP Server Binding Table select ID IP Address Client ID Hardware Address Type seis No entry in the table Al Figure 10 12 DHCP Server Binding Table gt DHCP Server Binding Table ID Displays the ID of the client IP Address eee the IP address that the Switch has allocated to the client Client ID Hardware Displays the MAC address of the client Address Type Displays the type of this binding entry Lease Time Left s Displays the lease time of the client left Click Delete to delete the selected entry 10 4 5 Packet Statistics In this page you can view the DHCP packets the switch received or sent Choose the menu Routing DHCP Server Packet Statistics to load the following page Packet Received BOOTREQUEST DHCPDISCOVER DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE DHCPRELEASE S O O O O O DHCPINFORM Packet Sent BOOTREPLY DHCPOFFER DHCPACK S O O O DHCPNAK Figure10 13 Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Packets Received BOOTREQUEST Displays the Bootp Request packet received 149 DHCPDISCOVER DHCPREQUEST DHCPDECLINE DHCPRELEASE DHCPINFORM Packets Sent BOOTREPLY DHCPOFFER DHCPACK DHCPNAK Configuration Procedure
432. s screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the Auto Refresh feature Refresh Interval Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics gt Illegal ARP Packet UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Port Displays the port number Trusted Port Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not Illegal ARP Packet Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets 14 4 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is to filter the IP packets based on the IP MAC Binding entries Only the packets matched to the IP MAC Binding rules can be processed which can enhance the bandwidth utility Choose the menu Network Security IP Source Guard to load the following page 291 IP Source Guard Config UNIT 1 Select Pont Security Type LAG O a O 14041 Disable A O 1 0 2 Disable ES O 1 0 3 Disable O 1 0 4 Disable O 1 0 5 Disable ae O 1 0 6 Disable a O 11017 Disable ER O 1 0 8 Disable d O 1 0 9 Disable ds O 110110 Disable su O 1 0 11 Disable a O 1 0 12 Disable me O 1 0 13 Disable a O 1 0 14 Disable O 1 0 15 Disable Z Y Al Apply Note IP Source Guard can not be enabled for LAG member Figure 14 17 IP Source Guard The following entries are displayed on this screen gt IP Source Guard Config UNIT Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Security Type Select
433. sage from interface it would transition to the Backup state in which case its priority is not 255 or Master state in which case its priority is 255 Routers in master or backup state can change to Initialize state only when they receive shutdown message from interface In Initialize state router cannot deal with VRRP packet If the master router functions properly it will periodically send VRRP packets informing backup routers in the backup group that it functions properly VRRP timer can be manually configured to customize the intervals that master router sends VRRP packet If the backup router waits for a period longer than three times the advertisement timer and fails to receive VRRP packets from the master router they will assume that the master router is dead and initiate an election process by transitioning to the Master state and forwarding VRRP packets To avoid frequent Master Backup state transition among routers in the backup group and provide enough time for backup routers to collect necessary information backup router would not preempt to be master as soon as it receives packets with lower priority value It would wait for a certain time which is called preempt mode delay time and then send packets to take place of the former master Users can customize the preempt mode delay time 4 Authentication Methods VRRP provides three authentication methods e No authentication the eligibility of VRRP packets is not verified and no se
434. screen click Finish to complete the installation 376 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed TpSupplicant Click Finish to exit the wizard If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version please go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation Figure C 7 InstallShield Wizard Complete Note Please pay attention to the tips on the above screen If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version on your computer the 802 1X Client Software TpSupplicant can not work It s recommended to go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation 1 2 Uninstall Software If you want to remove the TpSupplicant please take the following steps 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to All Programs gt TP LINK gt TpSupplicant and then click Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X shown as the following figure 2 AUUUVE LIVELYyULE PES gler U U si 7 UltralS0 gt Administr a T SnagIt T gt 7 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 12 gt Internet 5 Internet Explorer E SolidConvertPDF ESOS 2 Adobe Help Center Y Outlook Express mm Foxmail gt Microsoft Word g Command Prompt a3 MSN Microsoft Project Windows Media Plays 7 CorelDRAW 9 gt E SmartWindow Symantec Client Security gt z T DAEMON Tools Lite 33 Windows Messe
435. se the menu Routing OSPF Basic to load the following page 182 Select Current Process Current Process vi Default Route Advertise Config Originate Enable Disable Always Enable Disable Metric 16777214 Metric Type O External Type 1 O External Type 2 OSPF Config ASBR Mode ABR Status Distance 055 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enable v SPF Delay Time sec 1 600 SPF Hold Time sec 1 600 External LSA Count gt External LSA Checksum Fj LSAs Originated LSAs Received Default Metric 1 16777214 Maximum Paths 1 32 Passive Default Enable Auto Cost Enable Reference Bandwidth Mbps 1 4294967 Figure 10 45 OSPF Base The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Select Current Process Current Process Select the desired OSPF process for configuration gt Default Route Advertise Config Originate When this parameter is Enable OSPF originates an AS External LSA advertising a default route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Always If Originate is Enable but the Always option is DISABLE OSPF will only originate a default route if the router already has a default route in its routing table Set Always to ENABLE to force OSPF to originate a default route regardless of whether the router has a default route Metric Specify the metric of the default route The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 and the default is 1 Metric Type Set the OSPF metri
436. sed on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN owning the receiving port The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group port list When forwarding a multicast packet the switch looks up the multicast address table based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet If the corresponding entry can not be found in the table the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving port If the corresponding entry can be found in the table it indicates that the destination address should be a group port list so the switch will duplicate this multicast data and deliver each port one copy The general format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 8 3 below VLANID MulticastIP Pori Figure 9 3 Multicast Address Table 117 gt IGMP Snooping In the network the hosts apply to the near Router for joining leaving a multicast group by sending IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol messages When the up stream device forwards down the multicast data the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts IGMP Snooping is a multicast control mechanism which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the multicast group The switch running IGMP Snooping manages and controls the multicast group via listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast router thereby effectively prevents multicast groups be
437. sequence number field is an unsigned 32 bit integer It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement Checksum The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded or while it is being held in a router s memory This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the LS age field Options The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement 10 10 VRRP VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol is a fault tolerant protocol Generally all hosts in a LAN Local Area Network would set a default route Packets which are sent by the host and whose destination address does not belong to the local network segment will be sent to the gateway via the default route Therefore communication between the host and external network can be established Once the gateway fails all hosts of this network segment whose default next hop is the gateway will stop communicating with external network VRRP is developed to solve the problem mentioned above and designed for LAN with multicast or broadcast function such as Ethernet Virtual router acts as a backup group which consists of one master router and several backup routers The virtual router also a backup group has its own IP address
438. ser Displays the Privacy Mode of the User Click the Edit button to modify the Group of the User and click the Modify button to apply More The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level 309 15 1 5 SNMP Community SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a password If SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c is employed you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this page without configuring SNMP Group and User Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Community to load the following page Community Config Community Name 16 characters maximum Access read only v view z MIB View viewDefault v Community Table Select Community Name Access MIB View Operation No entry in the table A Note The default MIB view of community is viewDefault Figure 15 7 SNMP Community The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Community Config Community Name Enter the Community Name here Access Defines the access rights of the community e read only Management right of the Community is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the corresponding View e read write Management right of the Community is read write and changes can be made to the corresponding View MIB View Select the MIB View for the community to acce
439. ses md5 message digest algorithm Displays the active authentication key of the interface Displays the active authentication key ID of the interface Displays the current state of the selected router interface One of e Down This is the initial interface state In this state the lower level protocols have indicated that the interface is unusable In this state interface parameters will be set to their initial values All interface timers will be disabled and there will be no adjacencies associated with the interface e P2P In this state the interface is operational and connects either to a physical point to point network or to a virtual link Upon entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router Hello Packets are sent to the neighbor every Hellolnterval seconds 10 9 8 Route Redistribution Choose the menu Routing OSPF Route Redistribution to load the following page Route Redistribution Process Select Source Redistribute Metric Metric Type Tag NSSA Only O a L BE m l vi No entry in the table Figure10 52 Route Redistribution The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Route Redistribution Process Select Source Redistribute Metric Select one OSPF Process to display its route redistribution list Select the desired item for configuration It is multi optional The available source routes for redistribution by OSPF
440. smission mechanism If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode they will advertise local information by sending LLDPDUs periodically If there is a change in the local device the change notification will be advertised To prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to frequent changes in local device a transmission delay timer is set by network management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP frame transmissions If the LLDP admin status of the port is changed from Disable Rx to TxRx Tx the Fast Start Mechanism will be active the transmit interval turns to be 1 second several LLDPDUs will be sent out and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular interval LLDPDU receipt mechanism When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode the device will check the validity of the received LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs save this neighbor information to the local device and then set the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL Time To Live TLV Once the TTL is 0 this neighbor information will be aged out immediately The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL Hold Multiplier is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval gt TLV TLV refers to Type Length Value and is contained in a LLDPDU Type identifies what ki
441. sponses with a Graft Ack message to confirm 3 If the downstream node sending the graft message doesn t receive the Graft Ack message from its upstream node it will keep sending graft messages until being confirmed gt Assert Mechanism If there are multiple multicast routers in one network segment these routers may send the same multicast packets to this network segment repeatedly To avoid this kind of situation the Assert Mechanism is applied to select the exclusive router to forward the multicast data 228 Router A Router B penosa gt Assert message gt Multicast message Router C Receiver Figure 11 12 Assert Mechanism As shown in Figure 11 12 the downstream node Router C will receive the same two S G multicast packets from Router A and Router B in the local network after they receive them from the upstream nodes Router A and Router B will also receive the multicast packets on their local interfaces sent from each other Meanwhile Router A and Router B will send the Assert Messages through their local interfaces to all the PIM routers with the multicast address 224 0 0 13 The Assert Message contains the following information the multicast source address S the multicast group address G the priority and cost of the unicast route to the multicast source The router to forward the multicast packets of S G is elected based on the following rules and in the order listed 1 The router with the un
442. ss Select Area ID Area Description lt 0 4294967295 or a b c d y Optional 1 20 characters Optional Range 1 16777214 Metric Metric Type Optional Range 1 16777214 Area Type Authentication Summary Redistribution Default Cost LE Type Advertise Mewic lype w v v v z v No entry in the table Lappy Derete Help Figure10 49 OSPF Area The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Area Config Process ID Area ID Area Description Area Type Authentication Type Default Cost Summary Redistribution Default Advertise Route Metric Type Select the desired OSPF process for configuration The 32 bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies the area lt can be in decimal format or dotted decimal format One simple string to describe the area No more than 20 characters OSPF area type Normal Stub or NSSA The authentication type of the area All the interfaces that belong to such area will have the same authentication type by default e null No authentication e simple Uses simple password e md5 Uses md5 message digest algorithm The metric value you want to apply for the default Summary LSA advertised into the stub area The valid value ranges from 1 to 16777214 Set whether or not the specified Area will allow Summary Link State Advertisements Summary LSAs to be imported into the area
443. ss gt Community Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community It is multi optional Community Name Displays the Community Name here Access Displays the right of the Community to access the View MIB View Displays the Views which the Community can access Operation Click the Edit button to modify the MIB View and the Access right of the Community and then click the Modify button to apply 310 Mote The default MIB View of SNMP Community is viewDefault Configuration Procedure e If SNMPv3 is employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function globally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally 2 Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 3 Create SNMP Group Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP Group page create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and specify SNMP Views with various access levels for SNMP Group 4 Create SNMP User Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP User page create SNMP User in the Group and configure the auth privacy mode and auth privacy password for the User e If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function g
444. t Enable Disable 802 1P Priority 250 gt Priority and CoS mapping Config Tag id CoS id Indicates the precedence level defined by IEEE 802 1P and the CoS ID Queue TC id Indicates the priority level of egress queue the packets with tag and CoS id are mapped to The priority levels of egress queue are labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 to TC7 Mnote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ 802 1P Priority page relation between the 802 1P configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority Tag CoS and the TC priority Tag CoS and the TC 2 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 12 1 4 DSCP Priority On this page you can configure DSCP priority DSCP DiffServ Code Point is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities When DSCP Priority is enabled IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority mode non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode if 8021 1P Priority mode is enabled the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode Choose the menu QoS Dif
445. t IP address the entry Source IP Displays the Source IP of the entry Forward Ports Displays the forward port of the multicast group 11 2 4 Multicast Group Table On this page you can view the information of the multicast groups already on the switch Multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 1 to 239 255 255 255 The range for receivers to join is from 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Multicast Group Table to load the following page Search Option Search Option E El 7 IGMP Router Multicast Group Table Interface Multicast IP Total multicast groups O Forward Ports Operation No entry in the table Figure 11 8 Multicast Group Table The following entries are displayed on this screen 221 gt Search Option Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly e All Displays all multicast IP entries Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry e Interface VLAN Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry e Port Enter the port the desired entry must carry e Routed Port Select the routed port the desired entry must carry gt IGMP Router Multicast Group Table Interface Displays the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Multicast IP Displays the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Forward Port Displays the forward port of the multicast group Op
446. t Station SNMP Agent Figure15 1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements gt SNMP Versions This switch supports SNMP v3 and is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c The SNMP versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same Otherwise SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent can not communicate with each other normally You can select the management mode with proper security level according to your actual application requirement 303 SNMP v1 SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication The community name is used to define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent The SNMP packets failing to pass community name authentication are discarded The community name can limit access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS functioning as a password SNMP v2c SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication It is compatible with SNMP v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1 SNMP v3 Basing on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and manageability It adopts VACM View based Access Control Model and USM User Based Security Model authentication The user can configure the authentication and the encryption functions The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the senders of packets Meanwhile the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information be
447. t in the TCP IP and is used to establish and maintain the multicast member relationships between the IP host and its directly neighboring multicast routers PIM Protocol Independent Multicast is a typical intra domain multicast routing protocol among the AS It provides IP multicast forwarding by leveraging static routes or unicast routing tables generated by any unicast routing protocols such as RIP Routing Information Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First IS IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System or Border Gateway Protocol BGP MSDP Multicast Source Discovery Protocol is an intra domain multicast resolution which aims at the connection of different PIM SM domains and is used to discover the multicast source information among different ASs DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is mainly applied in the multicast backbone network of the Internet The following mainly introduces IGMP PIM and Static Multicast Routing gt Multicast Roles and Models There are several different roles in the multicast transmission e Multicast Source The sender of the multicast information e Multicast Group Member All the receivers of the multicast information e Multicast Group The group consists of the multicast group members e Multicast Router Cor the Layer 3 Multicast Device The router or switch that supports the layer 3 multicast functions which contains the multicast routing function and the management funct
448. t receive or forward BPDUs but it sends out its own BPDUs Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to guarantee generation the spanning trees correct Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security Port Protect to load the following page 110 Port Protect UNIT 1 Select Port Loop Protect Root Protect TC Protect BPDUProtect BPDU Filter LAG O v v v v v O 1 04 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable S O 1 0 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 1 0 3 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable go 1 0 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable o 1 0 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 1 0 6 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 1 0 7 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable F 1 0 8 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 1 0 9 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable E O 1 0 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable oO 10m1 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 10 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 103 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 1 0 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 11015 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Mi Figure 8 10 Port Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Protect UNIT Select Port Loop Protect Root Protect TC Protect BPDU Protect BPDU Filter LAG 8 4 2 TC Protect When TC Protect is enabled for
449. t the IP address has been used and the server will choose another IP as destination IP to test again The server will assign the IP address if the server not receives the Reply packet in the Ping time gt Policy of IP Assignment The switch chooses the IP assigned to clients based on the rules shown as follows 1 First the server will choose the IP which has been bound to the client manually 2 Then the server will assign the IP which has been assigned to the client once 3 For the next the server will assign the IP which is specified in the DHCP DISCOVER packet from the client 4 Atlast the server will choose the first IP from the IP pool which has not been assigned gt Tips for Configure DHCP Server Function on T3700G 28TQ 1 Configure the Excluded IP address which can not be assigned by the switch e g web server s IP broadcast IP of subnet and gateway s IP 2 Specify IP address for specific clients and then the switch will supply these IP address to them only for ever 3 Configure the IP pool in which the IP address can be assigned to the clients The DHCP Server allowing the clients in all VLANs to get the IP address from the server automatically is implemented on the DHCP Server Pool Setting Manual Binding Binding Table and Packet Statistics pages 10 4 1 DHCP Server This page allows you to enable the DHCP Server function configure the Excluded IP Address which can not be assigned by the switch in every n
450. t the current DR BDR and synchronize the link state database with them until a complete adjacency relation is established During synchronizing the link state database DR BDR will obtain LSA from the newly joint routers and then flood this LSA to the adjacent routers who then will flood it to the other ports till the entire network Work Flow Diagram The diagram below takes two routers for example to introduce in the Ethernet module the detailed steps of two routers from failure state to complete adjacency state and the relevant packet types involved in the process Adore To facilitate the description the diagram below shows the LSA synchronization after the DD exchange while in reality these two processes are simultaneous 169 RT2 Invalid HELLO DR 0 0 0 0 Neighbor None Neighbor Discovery HELLO DR 0 0 0 0 Neighbor None OS Y HELLO DR 0 0 0 0 Neighbor RT2 DR BDR Election HELLO DR 0 0 0 0 Neighbor RT1 DD Seq x I M MS 111 Master Slave Election DD Seq y I M MS 111 fe ee DD Seq y M MS 010 DD Seq y 1 I M MS 011 DD DD Seq y 1 l M MS 010 Exchange DD Seq y n I M MS 001 DD Seq y n I M MS 000 LS Request r_a LS Update LS Ack LSA Synchronization LS Request LS Update a Complete Adjacency Relation Established Keep alive Figure 10 31 Steps to Establish a Complete Adjacency Relati
451. ted with the VRRP Displays the Virtual MAC address associated with the VRRP Displays the tracked interface ID Displays the reduced priority when the tracked interface is down Click the button to go back to the VRRP basic config page Click the button to refresh this page 10 10 2Advanced Config You can modify most of features of the VRRP on this page including the description priority preempt mode advertisement But you can not add or delete a VRRP Choose the menu Routing gt VRRP Advanced Config to load the following page 204 VRRP Advanced Config Select VRID Interface O The total number ofthe virtual router O Description Priority Advertise Timer PreemptMode DelayTime Authentication Key Ita x a No entry in the table Figure10 60 VRRP Advanced Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VRRP Advanced Config Select VRID Interface Description Priority Advertise Timer Preempt Mode Delay Time Authentication Key Apply Select one or more items Displays the VRID associated with the VRRP Displays the Interface ID associated with the VRRP Enter the description associated with the VRRP Numbers characters and are the only valid inputs and the maximal length of the inputs is 8 Enter the Priority associated with the VRRP It ranges from 1 to 254 Enter the advertise timer associated with the VRRP
452. ter LSAs and Network LSAs Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred Retransmission An integer representing the current length of the Queue length retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router ID of the specified interface Dead Time The amount of time in seconds to wait before the router assumes the neighbor is unreachable 10 9 11Link State Database Choose the menu Routing OSPF Link State Database to load the following page 197 Link State Database Process Area ID Advertising Router LSA Type Link State ID Age Sequence Checksum Options No entry in the table Retresn Help Figure10 55 Link State Database The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Link State Database Process Select one OSPF Process to display its link state database Area ID Displays the ID of the area to which the LSA belongs Advertising Router Displays the ID of the router that advertising the LSA LSA Type The format and function of the link state advertisement One of the following Router Network Network Summary ASBR Summary External Type 5 NSSA External Type 7 Link State ID The Link State ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement s LS type Age The time since the link state advertisement was first originated in seconds Sequence The
453. terface should send from the pulldown menu e RIPv1 send RIP version 1 formatted packets via broadcast e RIPv2 send RIP version 2 packets using multicast Receive Version Select what RIP control packets the interface will accept from the pulldown menu e RIPv1 accept only RIP version 1 formatted packets e RIPv2 accept only RIP version 2 formatted packets RIPv2 Broadcast This is a RIP version 1 compatibility mode Enable RIPv2 Broadcast will send RIP version 2 formatted packets via broadcast Passive Mode Suppress routing updates on an interface Authen Mode Select an authentication type e None This is the initial interface state If you select this option from the pulldown menu no authentication protocols will be run e Simple If you select Simple you will be prompted to enter an authentication key This key will be included in the clear in the RIP header of all packets sent on the network All routers on the network must be configured with the same key e MDS If you select MD5 you will be prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID Key ID Enter the RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface If you choose not to use authentication or to use simple you will not be prompted to enter the key ID Key Enter the RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface If you do not choose to use authentication
454. the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Enter the source IP address contained in the rule Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Select IP protocol contained in the rule Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol Configure TCP IP source port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol Configure TCP IP destination port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule 267 Time Range Select the time range for the rule to take effect 13 3 Policy Config A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by configuring ACLs and actions together for effect The operations here include stream mirror stream condition QoS remarking and redirect The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary Police Create and Action Create pages 13 3 1 Policy Summary On this page you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Summary to load the following page Select Options Selecta Policy v Action Table Select Index ACL ID S Mirror s Condition Redire
455. the access of the illegal users to the network Besides ACL functions to control traffic flows and save network resources It provides a flexible and secured access control policy and facilitates you to control the network security On this switch ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions which can be L2 L4 protocol key fields carried in the packets A time range based ACL enables you to implement ACL control over packets by differentiating the time ranges The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch including four submenus Time Range ACL Config Policy Config and Policy Binding 13 1 Time Range If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time range a time range should be firstly specified in the ACL As the time range based ACL takes effect only within the specified time range data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time ranges On this switch absolute time week time and holiday can be configured Configure an absolute time section in the form of the start date to the end date to make ACLs effective configure a week time section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week configure a holiday section to make ACLs effective on some special days In each time range four time slices can be configured The Time Range configuration can be implemented on Time Range Summary Time Range Create and Holiday Config pages 13 1 1 Time Range Summary On this page you
456. the link state data to advertise LSA until all the routers establish an identical link state database During the synchronization of link state database if the database description packet sent contains an updated LSA or a LSA the receiver doesn t have the receiver would send request for the details of this LSA via LSR packets In other words in any phase of DD exchange as long as the received DD packet contains new LSA information the receiver could send LSA request for synchronization The routers receiving the LSR packet will unicast the LSU packet carrying LSA to the other end 168 1 After two routers have finished the synchronization of link state database a complete adjacency relation will be established When the intra area routers have an identical link state database each of them will calculate a loop free topology through SPF algorithm with itself as the root thus to describe the shortest forward path to every network node it knows and create a routing table according to the topology of shortest forward path and provide a basis for data forwarding After the establishment of routing table if the network remains stable the neighbors would discover and maintain their neighbor relationships by sending out Hello packets at regular intervals And the adjacent routers would recalculate the routing table by periodical LSA update in order to maintain valid entries in the routing table Any new routers joining the network will accep
457. the menu Switching gt MAC Address Address Table to load the following page 59 Search Option O MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 O VLAN ID 1 4094 O Type All Static Dynamic Filter Port UNIT 1 jeee e BJB ARARA RIRA 19 21 23 ES Unselected Port s ea Selected Port s z5 Not Available for Selection Address Table UNIT 1 MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status 58 66 BA DF 7B 05 1 1 0 2 Dynamic Aging 94 DE 80 B4 CF 96 1 1 0 10 Dynamic Aging D4 3D 7E BF 61 5F 1 1 0 2 Dynamic Aging Unit 1 Address Num Displayed 3 Total Address Num of All Unit 3 Note The maximum of the displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 6 13 Address Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option MAC Address Enter the MAC address of your desired entry VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry Port Select the corresponding port number or link aggregation number of your desired entry Type Select the type of your desired entry e All This option allows the address table to display all the address entries Static This option allows the address table to display the static address entries only Dynamic This option allows the address table to display the dynamic address entries only Filtering This option allows the address table to display the filtering a
458. the multicast source to the multicast group G the DR will encapsulate this packet into a register packet and send it to the corresponding RP in unicast way 2 After the RP receives the register packet it will de capsulate this packet and send the packaged multicast data to the receivers along the RPT and meanwhile it will send join message to the multicast source hop by hop The join message travels router by router toward the source from the RP constructing a branch of the SPT as it goes These routers generate S G entries in their forwarding tables The SPT works with multicast source as the root and RP as the branch 3 The multicast data sent from the multicast source travels along the constructed SPT to RP and is forwarded by the RP to the receivers along the RPT When RP receives the multicast data from the RPT it will send Register Stop Message to the DR directly connected to the multicast source to finish the multicast source register process gt Switching from RPT to SPT Once receiver side DR receives the multicast data from RP to multicast group G the switching process from RPT to SPT will be triggered 1 The receiver side DR sends S G join message to the multicast source S hop by hop and the join message finally arrives at the source side DR All routers the join message passes will generate the S G entry in their forwarding tables thus building up a branch of SPT 2 The receiver side DR sends prune mess
459. the neighbor switch which is connected to the corresponding port Displays the name of the neighbor switch Displays MAC address of the neighbor switch Displays the firmware version of the neighbor switch Displays the period for the switch s to keep the NDP packets from the neighbor switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Summary to load the following page Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Status UNIT 1 Port NDP Gi1 0M enable Gi1 O 2 enable Gi1 0 3 enable Gi1 0 4 enable Gi1 0 5 enable 6i1 0 6 enable Gi1 017 enable Gi1 0 8 enable Disab le 180sec 60sec Send NDP Packets 0 ooo ooo oo Receive NDP Error NDP Packets e Neighbors LAG Detail Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear A 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear 0 0 0 Detai Clear vw Figure17 3 NDP Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NDP Aging Time Displays the global NDP status enabled or disabled for the switch Displays the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch 337 Hello Time Port Status UNIT Port NDP Send NDP Packets Receive NDP Packets Error NDP Packets Neighbors LAG Detail Clear Displays the interval to send NDP packets Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Displays the port number of
460. the network As workstations and personal computers proliferate on the Internet the administrative complexity of maintaining a network is increased by an order of magnitude The assignment of local network resources to each client represents one such difficulty In most environments delegating such responsibility to the user is not plausible and indeed the solution is to define the resources in uniform terms and to automate their assignment The DHCP dealt with the issue of assigning an internet address to a client as well as some other resources gt DHCP Elements DHCP is built on a client server model where designated DHCP server hosts allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to DHCP clients Generally a DHCP server can allocate configuration parameters to more than one client Figure 10 4 shows you the model 139 DHCP server id BD Switch Switch DNS server DHCP client1 DHCP client2 DHCP client3 DHCP client4 Figure 10 4 DHCP model To meet the different requirements of DHCP clients DHCP server is always designed to supply hosts with the configuration parameters in three policies 1 Manual Assignment For the specific DHCP clients e g web server the configuration parameters are manually specified by the administrator and are assigned to these clients via a DHCP server 2 Automatic Assignment The DHCP server must supplies the configuration parameters to DHCP client with the le
461. the startup config file If it fails the switch will try to read the backup config file If it fails too the switch will be restored to factory settings Choose the menu System gt System Tools gt Boot Config to load the following page Boot Table Select Unit Current Startup Next Startup Backup Image Current Startup Config Next Startup Config Image Image Oo image1 bin v image2 bin v 1 image1 bin image1 bin image2 bin config2_1 cfg Apply Image Table UNIT 1 Current Startup Image Exist 8 OK Next Startup Image Exist amp OK Backup Image Exist amp OK Note 1 The image should be image1 bin or image2 bin 2 The next startup and backup image should not be the same 3 The config filename should be 5 63 characters 4 The postfix of config filename must be cfo 5 The boot config will be set to default after restore 6 The boot config will not be lost after system reset 7 The boot config will be actived in next starting Figure 4 9 Boot Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt config2_1 cfg Boot Table Select Select the unit s Unit Displays the unit ID Current Startup Displays the current startup image Image Next Startup Image Select the next startup image 21 Backup Config config1 cfg Backup Image Select the backup boot image Current Startup Displays the current startup config filename Config Next Startup Input the next startup config filen
462. thers e Deny Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit others Displays the ports that the Profile bound to Click the Edit button to configure the mode or IP range of the Profile 9 4 2 Profile Binding On this page you can configure the multicast filter rules for port Take the configuration on this page and the configuration on IP Range page together to function to implement multicast filter function on the switch Choose the menu Multicast Multicast Filter Profile Binding to load the following page Profile and Max Group Binding UNIT 1 Select Port Profile ID Max Group Overflow Action LAG O v O 1 01 1024 Drop ClearBinding 4 O 0 2 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 103 1024 Drop ClearBinding CL 110 4 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1105 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 6 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 110 17 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 110 8 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 109 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 10 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 11 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1012 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 13 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 14 1024 Drop ClearBinding O 1 0 15 1024 Drop ClearBinding Note The port profile binding configuration here has no effect on static multicast IP Figure 9 12 Port Filter 132 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Profile and Max Group Binding UNIT Select Port Profile ID Max Group O
463. these packets will be transmitted with double tag across the public networks The VLAN VPN function provides you with the following benefits 1 Provides simple Layer 2 VPN solutions for small sized LANs or intranets 2 Saves public network VLAN ID resource 3 You can have VLAN IDs of your own which is independent of public network VLAN IDs 4 When the network of the Internet Service Provider is upgraded the user s network with a relative independence can still work normally without changing the current configurations In addition the switch supports the feature to adjust the TPID Values of VLAN VPN Packets TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is a field of the VLAN tag IEEE 802 1Q specifies the value of TPID to be 0x8100 This switch adopts the default value of TPID 0x8100 defined by the protocol Other manufacturers use other TPID values such as 0x9100 or 0x9200 in the outer tags of VLAN VPN packets To be compatible with devices coming from other manufacturers this switch can adjust the TPID values of VLAN VPN packets globally You can configure TPID values by yourself When a port receives a packet this port will replace the TPID value in the outer VLAN tag of this packet with the user defined value and then send the packet again Thus the VLAN VPN packets sent to the public network can be recognized by devices of other manufacturers The position of the TPID field in an Ethernet packet is the same as the position of the protocol type
464. this screen gt Global Config Hash Algorithm Select the applied scope of aggregate hash arithmetic which results in choosing a port to transfer the packets e SRC MAC DST MAC When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination MAC addresses of the packets e SRC IP DST IP When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination IP addresses of the packets gt LAG Table Select Select the desired LAG It is multi optional Group Number Displays the LAG number here Description Displays the description of LAG 51 Member Displays the LAG member Operation Allows you to view or modify the information for each LAG e Edit Click to modify the settings of the LAG e Detail Click to get the information of the LAG Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG Detail Info Group Number LAG1 LAG Type Static Port Status Enable Rate Auto Port mirror Disable Ingress Bandwidth bps Egress Bandwidth bps Broadcast Control bps Multicast Control bps UL Control bps QoS Priority Cos 0 Join VLAN al Figure 6 8 Detail Information 6 2 2 Static LAG On this page you can manually configure the LAG The LACP feature is disabled for the member ports of the manually added Static LAG Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt Static LAG to load the following page 52 LAG Config
465. tion 352 Step Operation Description Enable NTDP function on the switch and for port 1 On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable NTDP function e Configure the commander switch Step Operation Description 1 Enable NDP function on the On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable NDP switch and for ports 1 3 function 2 Enable NTDP function on the On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable switch and for ports 1 3 NTDP function 3 Create a cluster and configure On Cluster Cluster Cluster Config page configure the related parameters the role as Commander and enter the related information IP pool 175 128 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 4 Manage the member switch On Cluster gt Cluster gt Member Config page select the member switch and click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page Or on Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page double click the switch icon to view its detailed information click the switch icon and click the Manage button to log on to the Web management page Return to CONTENTS 353 Chapter 18 Maintenance Maintenance module assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem 1 System Monitor Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch 2 Log View the configuration parameters of the switch and find
466. tion meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard 384 Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement f
467. tion 7 System Identifies the main functions of the system and Optional Capabilities the functions enabled 8 Management Identifies the management IP address the Optional Address corresponding interface number and OID Object Identifier The management IP address is specified by the user 127 Organizationally Allows different organizations such as IEEE Optional Specific 802 1 IEEE 802 3 IETF as well as individual software and equipment vendors to define TLVs that advertise information to remote device Optional TLVs are grouped into two categories including basic management TLV and Organizationally specific TLV 1 Basic Management TLV A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for all LLDP implementations 2 Organizationally Specific TLV Different organizations have defined various TLVs For instance Port VLAN ID TLV Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802 1 while MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV Power Via MDI TLV Link Aggregation TLV and Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802 3 nose For detailed introduction of TLV please refer to IEEE 802 1AB standard In TP LINK switch the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported Port Description TLV The Port Description TLV allows network management to advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station s port description System Capabilities TLV T
468. tion of each member device Some configuration needs device reboot to take effect so you are kindly recommended to configure the stack at first next connect the devices physically after powering off them then you can power them on and the devices will join the stack automatically After stack is established users can log in the stack system through any member devices to configure and manage it The stack management can be implemented on Stack Info Stack Config and Switch Renumber pages 5 1 1 Stack Info On this page you can view the basic parameters of the stack function Choose the menu Stack Management Stack Info to load the following page Stack Config Stack Name Stack Mac Stack Topo Stack Auth Mode Stack Member Info Stack 00 0A EB 00 13 57 Line None Switch Role Mac Address Priority Version State 3 Master 00 0A EB 00 13 57 5 0 1 2 1 Ready Stack Port Info Stack Port Status Neighbor 3 0 25 Ethernet N A 3 0 26 Ethernet N A Figure 5 7 Stack Info The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Stack Config Stack Name Stack MAC Stack Topo Stack Auth Mode gt Stack Member Info Switch Displays the name of the stack Displays the current MAC address of the stack which usually is the MAC address of the master switch The stack uses it to communicate with other devices Displays the current topology type of the stack There are two options Line and Ring Line represents chain typ
469. tion of the aggregation MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV The MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV identifies a The duplex and bit rate capability of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node that is connected to the physical medium b The current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node c Whether these settings are the result of auto negotiation during link initiation or of manual set override action Max Frame Size TLV The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY Power Via MDI TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN station The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch including three submenus Basic Config Device Info and Device Statistics 16 1 Basic Config LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages 16 1 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally Choose the menu LLDP gt Basic Config Global Config to load the following page 322 Global Config LLDP Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Fast Start Times C Enable Disable Apply 30 sec 5 32768 2 10 sec 1 8192 sec 1 10 sec 5 3600 1 10 Figure 16 1 Global Configuration
470. tisement Displays the number of VRRP advertisements received by this Received virtual router Advertisement Displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent by this Sent virtual router Advertisement Displays the number of the received VRRP advertisement Interval Errors packets whose advertisement interval was different from the one configured for the local virtual router Authentication Displays the number of VRRP packets received that did not Failure pass the authentication check 208 IP TTL Errors Zero Priority Packets Received Zero Priority Packets Sent Address List Errors Invalid Authentication Type Authentication Type Mismatch Packet Errors Length Clear Refresh Displays the number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with IP TTL Time To Live not equal to 255 Displays the number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of 0 Displays the number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of O Displays the number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router Displays the number of packets received with an unknown authentication type Displays the number of packets received with an authentication type different to the locally configured authentication method Displays the number of packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP he
471. to change the role of the switch to be candidate switch 17 3 3 Member Config When this switch is the commander switch of the cluster via the commander switch you can manually add a candidate switch to the cluster as well as remove the designated member switch from the cluster On this page you can configure and manage the member switch Choose the menu Cluster Cluser Member Config to load the following page Create Member Member MAC Member Info Select Device Name Member MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Hops O TP_1 TL SG5428 00 0A EB 13 12 F7 192 168 3 2 online member 0 00 06 1 Figure17 17 Member Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 349 Create Member Member MAC Member Info Select Device Name Member MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Hops Manage Graphic Show Enter the MAC address of the candidate switch Select the desired entry to manage delete the corresponding member switch Display the description of the member switch Displays the MAC address of the member switch Displays the IP address of the member switch used in the cluster Displays the connection status of the member switch Displays the role the switch plays currently Displays the time when the member switch is added to the cluster Displays the hop count from the member switch to the commander switch Click the Manage button after selecting the desired entry to log
472. try in the table Figure 16 10 LLDP MED Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Specify the auto refresh rate gt LLDP MED Neighbor Info Select the desired port to display LLDP MED information of neighbors of the corresponding port Unit Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Device Type Displays the device type of the neighbor 333 Application Type Local Data Format Power Type Information Displays the application type of the neighbor Application Type indicates the primary function of the applications defined for the network policy Displays the location identification of the neighbor Displays the power type of the neighbor device either Power Sourcing Entity PSE or Powered Device PD Click the Information button to display the detailed information of the corresponding neighbor Return to CONTENTS 334 Chapter 17 Cluster With the development of network technology the network scale is getting larger and more network devices are required which may result in a more complicated network management system As a large number of devices need to be assigned different network addresses and every management device needs to be respectively configured to meet the application requirements manpower are needed The Cluster Management function can solve the above problem
473. ts and plays a role which is either master or slave in the stack system The differences between master and slave are described as below Master Indicates the device is responsible for managing the entire stack system e Slave Indicates the device provides backup for the master If the master fails the stack will elect a new master from the remaining slaves to succeed the previous master 2 Stack Event Stack event indicates the global events which might happen during stack operation process with two options Merge It occurs when two independent stacks merge into one stack because of stack link establishment as shown in the following figure N f Stack1 o f Stack2 Stack a Merge into i Co Stack Lin Switch Switch Switch Switch Cea eee _ Figure 5 4 Stack Merge When stack merge occurs the previous masters compete to be the new master The stack members of the defeated stack will join the winner stack as a slave to form a new stack Master will assign Unit Number to the newly joined members and compare their configuration files The members with different configurations files with the master will download the configuration files of the master and re configure e Split It occurs when stack splits into two or more stacks because of stack link failures as shown in the following figure Stack Stack f Stack 2 A eal 5 2 Stack
474. tup process Please wait Cancel Figure C 2 Preparing Setup 3 Then the following screen will appear Click Next to continue If you want to stop the installation click Cancel 374 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TpSupplicant The InstallShield Wizard will install TpSupplicant on your computer To continue click Next Figure C 3 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard 4 To continue choose the destination location for the installation files and click Next on the following screen TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files a Install TpSupplicant to C Program Files TP LINK T pSupplicant InstallShield Figure C 4 Choose Destination Location By default the installation files are saved on the Program Files folder of system disk Click the Change button to modify the destination location proper to your need 5 Till now The Wizard is ready to begin the installation Click Install to start the installation on the following screen 375 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program l The wizard is ready to begin installation InstallShield Figure C 5 Install the Program 6 The InstallShield Wizard is installing TpSupplicant shown as the following screen Please wait TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Figure C 6 Setup Status 7 On the following
475. ture Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN feature The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the specified network source Enable Disable the Quiet timer Specify a value for Quiet Period Once the supplicant failed to the 802 1X Authentication then the switch will not respond to the authentication request from the same 299 supplicant during the Quiet Period Retry Times Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request Supplicant Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant Server Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from authentication server before resending a request to the authentication server 14 6 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the 802 1X features for the ports basing on the actual network Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Port Config to load the following page Port Config UNIT 1 Select Port Status Guest VLAN Control Mode Control Type Authorized LAG O l z v y v Oo 1011 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized A O 110 2 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized C 1 0 3 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0 4 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0 5 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 1 0 6 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Authorized O 11017 Disable Disable
476. twork segment The greatest value means the highest priority of the advertising router and also the possibility of being elected as the DR in the segment while the value 0 means no election right 177 3 Router Dead Interval When the receiving router doesn t receive another Hello packet update from the advertising router within the specified age time it will delete the advertising router from its neighbor table Only routers with the coincident dead interval can be neighbors Designated Router ID The interface IP of the router specified by the advertising router in the advertising interface network Backup Designated Router ID The interface IP of the backup router specified by the advertising router in the advertising interface network Neighbor All the neighbor tables of the advertising router listing the neighbor interface IP addresses in each interface network segment DD Packet Two routers after becoming neighbors will send to each other the header of all routing information in its link state database through the DD packets in which way the receiving router could synchronize the database H 32 bits 8 8 8 8 Version A Packet length Router ID E TI O 0x0000 Key ID Auth Data Len Cryptographic sequence number ace wy omore ooo fl LSA Header Figure 10 40 DD Packet Interface MTU Size in bytes of the largest IP packet that can be sent out by the routing interface of the advertising router
477. u can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View 3 Create SNMP User 304 The User configured in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on management station The specified User Name and the Auth Privacy Password are used for SNMP Management Station to access the SNMP Agent functioning as the password SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch including three submenus SNMP Config Notification and RMON 15 1 SNMP Config The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config SNMP View SNMP Group SNMP User and SNMP Community pages 15 1 1 Global Config To enable SNMP function please configure the SNMP function globally on this page Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config Global Config to load the following page Global Config SNMP Enable Disable Apply Local Engine Default ID Local Engine ID 80002e5703000aeb003775 10 64 Hex Apply Remote Engine Remote Engine ID Appl 0 or 10 64 Hex pey Help Note The total hexadecimal characters of Engine ID should be even Figure 15 3 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SNMP Enable Disable the SNMP function gt Local Engine Local Engine ID Specify the Switch s Engine ID for the remote clients The Engine ID is a
478. uld be sent to ABR and then be forwarded outwards through it Since there is no need to 173 learn about the routing information from other areas the size of the routing table of the routers in the stub area as well as the number of the routing message transferred would be reduced greatly NSSA Not So Stubby Area has a lot in common with stub area but is not completely the same NSSA doesn t allow ABR to import the external routing information described by AS External LSA either But it does allow ASBR in the area to spread in the NSSA the routing information as Type 7 LSA which is learned by other routing protocols Upon receiving it ABR in the area would transform it to AS External LSA and then flood to the whole autonomous system 5 Route Summarization Route summarization is to summarize routing information with the same prefix with a single summarization route and then distribute it to other area Via ABR route summarization a Summary LSA will be distributed to other areas while via ASBR route summarization an AS External LSA will be distributed to the entire AS Therefore route summarization will greatly reduce the size of LSBD ABR Route Summarization When the network reaches a certain size to configure route summarization on the ABR could summarize the intra area route to be a wider one and then distribute it to other areas which could receive less the routing entries As Figure 10 36 shows in Area 1 ABR1 can configure a summa
479. ulti optional ID Displays the Protocol Template ID Protocol Name Displays the Protocol Name Protocol Type Displays the Protocol type Anote The Protocol Template bound to VLAN can not be deleted 79 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Create Protocol Template Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Template page create the Protocol Template before configuring Protocol VLAN 4 Create Protocol VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group page select the protocol name and enter the VLAN ID to create a Protocol VLAN Meanwhile enable protocol VLAN for ports 5 Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group Table page click the Edit button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN 6 Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group Table page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 7 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN gt Network Requirements e Department A is conne
480. ulticast packets on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the multicast control function for the port 254 UL Frame Rate Select the bandwidth for receiving UL Frame on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the UL Frame control function for the port LAG Adote If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit enabled port ingress rate limit feature will be disabled for this port 12 3 Voice VLAN Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream By configuring Voice VLANs and adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs you can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality gt OUI Address Organizationally unique identifier address The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC address If the source MAC address of a packet complies with the OUI addresses configured by the system the packet is determined as voice packet and transmitted in voice VLAN An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers to a device vendor It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address You can recognize which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI a
481. umber of port connected to the Host Protect Type Displays the Protect Type of the entry 277 Source Displays the source of the entry Collision Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries 14 1 3 ARP Scanning ARP Address Resolution Protocol is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly IP address is the address of the Host on Network layer MAC address the address of the Host on Data link layer is necessary for the packet to reach the very device So the destination IP address carried in a packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an ARP Table where the latest used IP address to MAC address mapping entries are stored When the Host communicates with a strange Host ARP works as the following figure shown IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 01 21 AF 0F 4E MAC 00 0F 12 0E ED 2D Host A ARP Request Broadcast Hes Source IP address Source MAC address Destination IP address Destination MAC address 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF OF 4E 192 168 0 103 FF FF FF FF FF FF Source IP address Source MAC address Destination IP address Destination MAC address 192
482. unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch gt Remote Engine Remote Engine ID Specify the Remote Engine ID for Switch The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote device which receives informs from Switch Adore The amount of Engine ID characters must be even 305 15 1 2 SNMP View The OID Object Identifier of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the switch and the MIB Management Information Base is the set of the OIDs The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config gt SNMP View to load the following page View Config View Name 16 characters maximum MIB Object ID 61 characters maximum View Type Include Exclude View Table Select View Name View Type MIB Object ID O viewDefault Include 1 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 m Figure15 4 SNMP View The following entries are displayed on this screen gt View Config View Name Give a name to the View for identification Each View can include several entries with the same name MIB Object ID Enter the Object Identifier OID for the entry of View View Type Select the type for the view entry e Include The view entry can be managed by the SNMP management station e Exclude The view entry ca
483. up Designated Router either The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router Designated Router The identity of the Designated Router for this network in the view of the advertising router The Designated Router is identified here by its router ID The value 0 0 0 0 means that there is no Designated Router Backup Designated The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network Router in the view of the advertising router The Backup Designated Router is identified here by its router ID Set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no Backup Designated Router Number of Events This is the number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state Click Edit to display the following figure Interface Config Interface Vlan1 Router Priority 0 255 Retransmit Interval sec 1 65535 Hello Interval sec 1 65535 Dead Interval sec 1 65535 Transmit Delay L o l sec 1 65535 Cost 1 65535 Network Type v Passive Mode v MTU Ignore v Database Filter Nj Authentication Type v Authentication Key ID 1 255 Authentication Key Figure 10 48 Interface Config gt Interface Config Interface Displays the interface ID for configuration Router Priority The router priority for the selected interface The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255 A value of 0 indic
484. use assigning this IP address to the Client gt Option 82 The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format basing on the format of BOOTP packet The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field The Option field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function for example the DHCP can transmit the control information and network parameters via the Option field so as to assign the IP address to the Client dynamically For the details of the DHCP Option please refer to RFC 2132 Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client Upon receiving the DHCP REQUEST packet the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client The Server supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters according to the Option 82 providing more flexible address distribution way Option 82 can contain 255 sub options at most If Option 82 is defined at least a sub option should be defined This switch supports two sub options Circuit ID and Remote ID Since there is 281 no universal standard about the content of Option 82 different manufacturers define the sub options of Option 82 to their need For this switch the sub options are defined as the following
485. uting in the network to establish multicast routing entries When performing the RPF check the router will look up the unicast routing table and the static multicast routing table at the same time The process is as below 1 Chose an optimal route from the unicast routing table and the static routing table respectively e The router looks up the unicast routing table with the IP address of the packet source as the destination address and selects an optimal unicast route automatically The output interface of the corresponding entry is the RPF interface and the next hop is the RPF neighbor The router will consider the traveling path of the multicast data sent from the RPF neighbor and received on the RPF interface as the shortest path from the multicast source S to the local network e The router looks up the static multicast routing table with the IP address of the packet source specified as the source address and selects an optimal static multicast route automatically The corresponding entry explicitly specifies the RPF interface and RPF neighbor 2 Select one from the two optimal routes as the RPF route According to the longest mask matching principle the longest mask matching route between them will be selected if the two routes have the same mask the route with higher priority will be selected if the two routes also have the same priority then the static multicast route is prior to the unicast route 2 RPF Mechanism Appl
486. ve the multicast data sending to this multicast group with its source not in the specified source list TO_IN indicating the mapping relationship between the multicast group and the multicast source list changes from EXCLUDE to INCLUDE TO_EX indicating the mapping relationship between the multicast group and the multicast source list changes from INCLUDE to EXCLUDE ALLOW indicating the host expects to receive multicast data from more multicast sources besides the current ones If the current mapping relationship is INCLUDE these multicast sources will be added to the multicast source list if the current mapping relationship is EXCLUDE these multicast sources will be deleted from the multicast source list BLOCK indicating the host doesn t expect to receive multicast data from the specific multicast sources any longer If the current mapping relationship is INCLUDE these multicast sources will be deleted from the multicast source list if the current mapping relationship is EXCLUDE these multicast sources will be added to the multicast source list 11 2 1 Interface Config Choose the menu Multicast Routing IGMP Interface Config to load the following page Search Option Search Option All s Interface Configuration E E Query Max Startup Query Startup Query LastMember Last Member Require Router Send Router Select Interface Status Version Robustness Query Interval Response Time interval Count Query Int
487. verflow Action LAG Clear Binding Mote Select the unit ID of the desired member in the stack Select the desired entry for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number The existing Profile ID bound to the selected port The maximum multicast group a port can join The policy should be taken when the number of multicast group a port has joined reach the maximum e Drop drop the successive report packet and this port can not join any other multicast group e Replace when the port joins another new multicast group it will quit the existing multicast group randomly Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Click the ClearBinding button to clear all profiles bound to the port 1 Multicast Filter feature can only have effect on the VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled 2 Multicast Filter feature has no effect on static multicast IP Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Create Profile Required Configure the Profile ID and mode on Multicast Multicast Filter Profile Config page 2 Configure IP Range Required Click Edit of the specified entry in the IGMP Profile Info table on Multicast gt Multicast Filter Profile Config page to configure the mode or IP range of the Profile 3 Configure Profile Binding for ports Optional Configure Profile Binding for ports on Multicast Multicast Filter Porfile Binding page 9 5 Packet
488. which received the tagged voice data stream from the IP phone please assign different VLAN IDs to the voice VLAN the port s default VLAN and 802 1X Guest VLAN to guarantee each function s normal operation 2 If the voice data stream sent from the IP phone is untagged please configure the ingress port s default VLAN as voice VLAN to implement the Voice VLAN function gt Security Mode of Voice VLAN When voice VLAN is enabled for a port you can configure its security mode to filter data stream If security mode is enabled the port just forwards voice packets and discards other packets whose 256 source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses If security mode is not enabled the port forwards all the packets Security Mode Packet Type Processing Mode UNTAG packet Packet with voice When the source MAC address of the packet is the OUI address that can be identified the packet can be transmitted in the voice VLAN Otherwise the packet will Enable VLAN TAG be discarded The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet VO eines is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode UNTAG packet Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all Packet with voice the packets can be transmitted in the voice VLAN Disable ANTAG Packet with other VLAN TAG The processing mode for the device to deal with the pac
489. x Buckets Owner Status bo y 1 041 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 041 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 041 1800 50 monitor Disable 11041 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 01 1800 50 monitor Disable 11071 1800 50 monitor Disable 11011 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 041 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 041 1800 50 monitor Disable 11011 1800 50 monitor Disable 11041 1800 50 monitor Disable 1 01 1800 50 monitor Disable Al Figure 15 10 History Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt History Control Table Select Index Port Interval Max Buckets Owner Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Specify the port from which the history samples were taken in format as 1 0 1 Specify the interval to take samplings from the port ranging from 10 to 3600 seconds The default is 1800 seconds Displays the maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON history group of statistics ranging from 1 to 65535 The default is 50 buckets 130 buckets supported at most so far Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry 315 Status 15 3 3 Event Select Enable Disable the corresponding sampling entry On this page you can configure the RMON events Choose the menu SNMP gt RMON gt Event to load the following page Event Table Select Index User Description Type Owner Status O v vi O 1 public None monitor Disable O 2 public No
490. y ARP Configure the Proxy ARP feature to enable hosts on the same network but isolated at layer 2 to communicate with each other e ARP Displays the ARP information e RIP Configure the RIP feature RIP is an interior gateway protocol using UDP data packets to exchange routing information e OSPF Configure the Open Shortest Path protocol e VRRP Configure the Virtual Router Redundant Protocol Chapter 11 Multicast Routing This module is used to configure several multicast routing protocols for multicast data forwarding Here mainly introduces e Global Config e IGMP Configure the IGMP features e PIM DM Configure the PIM DM features e PIM SM Configure the PIM SM features e Static Mroute Configure the static multicast routing features Chapter Introduction Chapter 12 QoS This module is used to configure QoS function to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements Here mainly introduces e DiffServ Configure priorities port priority 802 1P priority and DSCP priority e Bandwidth Control Configure rate limit feature to control the traffic rate on each port configure storm control feature to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network e Voice VLAN Configure voice VLAN to transmit voice data stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality Chapter 13 ACL Thi
491. y Name is used for authentication SNMP v1 can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v2c SNMPv2c is defined for the group In this model the Community Name is used for authentication SNMP v2c can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v3 SNMPv3 is defined for the group In this model the USM mechanism is used for authentication If SNMPv3 is enabled the Security Level field is enabled for configuration Security Level Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group e noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy security level is used e authNoPriv Only the authentication security level is used e authPriv Both the authentication and the privacy security levels are used Read View Select the View to be the Read View The management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP View Write View Select the View to be the Write View The management access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and modified Notify View Select the View to be the Notify View The management station 307 gt Group Table Select Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Write View Notify View Operation Anote can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view generated by the switch s SNMP agent Select the desired entry to delete

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

FRx OM-POR.book  Whirlpool RF377PXV User's Manual  Il manuale di istruzioni della IMPRESSA S9 One Touch  APC : mode d`emploi - SE-Unsa  Windows BETA Version 3.0 User Manual - Pot    ICOM - AT-140 User manual    HIGH PERFORMANCE PUMP FREEFLO™  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file